Elaine Wilson (pseudonym) was a science mistress at a school in Penzance, a seaside resort in Cornwall in southwestern England. Elaine had been undergoing medical treatment for more than four years for thyroid and pituitary glandular dystrophy.
She had, in addition, suffered from a curvature of the spine which left her round-shouldered. She had trouble walking as her legs tended to swell if she was on her feet too long. She also had rheumatism in her left thigh.
In February 1953, Elaine learned of a healing mission that was to be conducted in Penzance. Although she was highly sceptical of the claims made in the course of such missions, she felt she should attend so that she might undertake a critical evaluation of the methods used by these alleged healers.
It was during the second day of this mission that Elaine felt an impulse to join the crowd that was lining up in front of the altar rail. She did so, although she was not aware of any strong emotion at the time, nor did she experience any special stirring of faith.
She knelt at the altar rail and felt the healer place her hands on her neck. As she did so, Elaine felt a deep-seated burning sensation within her torso. She described the heat as “unexpected, uncomfortable, and slightly strangling.” She then returned to her seat.
Elaine remained in her seat while the congregation began singing various hymns. As the second hymn ended, she became aware of convulsive movements to her neck and shoulders. Her shoulders began to jerk back until they were upright and parallel to the back of the pew, but the lower part of her body did not move.
Her head and neck began stretching upwards. She felt as if a noose had been placed around her neck pulling her head up. Yet she felt no pressure on her skin. The pull on her neck caused a definite upward movement in the head. These movements seemed to be beyond her control.
At no time, however, did she feel any pain. She could feel her vertebrae creaking and thought that the person alongside must surely have heard them. Walking back home after the service, Elaine felt somewhat lightheaded.
She noticed that her feet were not as swollen as usual, as she had difficulty keeping her shoes on. Later that evening, she continued to feel a burning sensation throughout the thyroid region. Her throat felt as if she had been drinking strong brandy. This inner heat later spread to her tonsils and from there up the left Eustachian tube to the middle ear on her left side.
The next morning Elaine awoke feeling fresher than usual, although she had only retired late the previous night. Her head was much clearer, as if a load had been lifted from her brain. Throughout the day she was again aware of various jerking movements in her neck and spine.
Although she could control these movements mentally by concentrating on them, they started again whenever she relaxed. It was then that she realized that the rheumatism in her left leg had completely disappeared.
The stretching movements and sensations of heat continued sporadically for the next few days. Elaine noticed that she could now walk up to a mile (1.6 kilometers) without difficulty, and an old injury to her left leg no longer ached when she walked quickly.
One month later, she noted in her diary that she had taken no tablets for four weeks nor had she received any injections. Her blood pressure was normal. Her back was still upright at the neck and waist. Her feet were no longer swollen and the pain in her legs had not returned.
Her hair was softer, and her skin had become more sensitive. The flesh on her forehead seemed thinner and moved more easily over her scalp. She could walk quickly, even uphill, without difficulty. Her one problem, however, was that her clothes no longer fitted her owing to the change in shape of her figure.
Four months later, she wrote, “My own healing has been permanent, and my health has increased daily. I can now play tennis for over two hours as opposed to five minutes last year. I am continually finding more and more of my old limitations gone. This throws new light on the meaning of the word ‘miracle’. I don’t understand it, but it has happened”.9
In the earlier part of the twentieth century, when the British were still lords of India, a Calcutta lawyer and his wife, Abhoya, started out on a visit to their Guru, Lahiri Mahasaya, who lived in Benares (now called Varanasi).
Their carriage was delayed by heavy traffic, and by the time they reached Howrah station in Calcutta, the train to Benares was whistling its departure. Abhoya, who was a devout disciple of Lahiri Mahasaya, prayed silently to her Guru and implored him to stop the train as she could not bear to suffer any further delay in seeing him.
As the couple reached the platform, they saw an amazing sight. The wheels of the train were moving round and round, but the train itself was making no forward progress. In consternation, the engineer and many of the passengers got off the train to take a closer look at this extraordinary phenomenon.
As Abhoya and her husband were waiting on the platform wondering what to do, they were approached by an English railway guard. Contrary to all precedent, the guard offered his services to them saying; “Give me the money. I will buy your tickets while you climb aboard.”
As soon as they were seated and had been given their tickets, the train began to move slowly forward. The engineer and those passengers who had disembarked rushed to the doors to climb aboard, having no idea how the train had started or why it had stopped in the first place.
The remainder of the journey passed uneventfully for Abhoya and her husband. In due course they reached Benares, where they made their way impatiently to the home of Lahiri Mahasaya.
Seeing her Guru at last, Abhoya was overcome by emotion and prostrated herself before her master. In the Indian manner of extreme devotion, she sought to touch his feet. “Control yourself, Abhoya,” said Lahiri, “how you love to bother me.” And then, with a twinkle in his eye, he added: “As if you could not have come here by the next train!”10
In May 1974, a man bought a book to read to pass the time while he was travelling. He was sufficiently intrigued by its contents to extend a personal invitation to the author.
The Book was Supernature and its author Dr Lyall Watson. This man invited Watson to visit him at his home in Venice, Italy, to witness a peculiar trick that his daughter Claudia was able to perform.
Watson travelled to Venice and in due course met Claudia, who was then eight years old. Shortly after dinner that evening, while the adults talked among themselves, Claudia lay on the carpet paging through a magazine.
Her father reached for a tube of tennis balls from a corner table, and casually rolled one across the carpet. It came to rest in front of Claudia. She picked it up and held it affectionately to her cheek. Then, balancing the ball in her left hand, she gently stroked it with her right. What followed next left Watson stunned.
“One moment there was a tennis ball – the familiar off-white carpeted sphere marked only by its usual meandering seam. Then it was no longer so. There was a short implosive sound, very soft, like a cork being drawn in the dark, and Claudia held in her hand something completely different: a smooth, dark, rubbery globe with only a suggestion of the old pattern on its surface – a sort of negative through-the-looking-glass impression of a tennis ball.”
Watson examined the object closely. He found that the tennis ball had been turned inside out. Yet it still contained a volume of air under pressure. He squeezed the ball and it retained its former shape. He dropped it and it bounced.
Then he picked up a knife from the dining room table and pierced the rubber. The air inside came hissing out. He then cut right around the circumference and was able to recognize the familiar fur which normally covered the outside of the ball.
Later that evening, Claudia performed the trick again. This time Watson kept the ball and took it back to his hotel, where he placed it on the mantelpiece in his room. As Watson described it, the ball stared at him as a mocking symbol. This enigmatic sphere defied his reasoned world of logic. It seemed to him to undermine the very laws of nature.
“It still disturbed me” he wrote. “I know enough of physics to appreciate that you cannot turn an unbroken sphere inside out like a glove. Not in this reality.”11
Berthold Schwarz graduated from Dartmouth Medical School and received his medical degree from the New York University College of Medicine. After interning at the Mary Hitchcock Memorial Hospital, Hanover, New Hampshire, Dr Schwarz became a Fellow in Psychiatry at the Mayo Foundation where he received an M.S. from the Mayo Graduate School of Medicine.
He is a member of numerous medical associations, including the American Psychiatric Association and the American Board of Psychiatry and Neurology. What stamps Dr Schwarz as an unusual man among his peers, is his penchant for investigating strange talents and even stranger stories, with a view to discovering their underlying meaning.
Throughout his career he has followed the advice of the celebrated physicist, John Wheeler, who is renowned for exhorting his students: “In any field, find the strangest thing, and then explore it.”
Since the spring of 1984, Dr Schwarz has studied a young Florida housewife whom he calls “Katie”, in deference to her wishes to remain anonymous. Katie is the tenth of twelve children born of her part Cherokee Indian mother. Katie was forced to discontinue her education in the third grade in order to care for her ailing mother.
Despite her lack of formal education, or perhaps because of it, Katie has demonstrated a spectacular array of psychic talents, including psychokinesis, stigmata, healing and telepathy. She seems to have passed on her talents to her son, who has demonstrated among other things the ability to bend and split metal spoons.
On one particular occasion, Katie’s son, who was then fifteen years old, asked his mother if it was possible to go back in time. She replied that she believed it was. With that the boy went immediately to her walk-in closet, closed the door, and lay down on the floor.
As he later told Dr Schwarz, “I wanted to see what it was like in the 1920’s.” The boy appeared to enter a trance-like condition for he suddenly became aware of being in a strange room. He noticed a Christmas tree in the room, and he could see an old bald-headed man and an oil lamp nearby.
He also spotted an interesting looking cardboard box. He moved towards it, but in doing so managed to knock over the oil lamp. In the ensuing confusion, he simply recalled grasping the cardboard box before the vision faded and he found himself once more back in the walk-in-closet.
Incredibly, the cardboard box was still in his possession. He opened it and found an ostrich-skin cigarette lighter enclosed in a gold leather pouch. Dr Schwarz was later able to examine this lighter. He found that it bore the following inscription: “Compliments Moragues. Bay City. Inc., Mobile, Ala., Christmas 1928.” 12
Several years ago, a Latin-American friend of mine called Jorge Lopehandia was living in Ecuador, in the little village of Baños. He happened to be walking one day down a narrow jungle path along the edge of a cliff. After having travelled down this path for a short distance, Jorge decided to return.
He headed back along the same narrow path. As he was making his way back, Jorge was astonished find the path blocked by an enormous spider web. The web extended from the branches of a bush which flanked the path across the cliff face. The web stretched from his chest down to his feet. In the centre of the web was a brilliant, silver, metallic spider.
What amazed Jorge was that he had walked down that same path only a few minutes earlier, and there had been no sign of any spider or its web. It seemed incredible that such a large web could have been spun in so short a time.
Yet he was now in a quandary, for his only way home was to follow the path that was now blocked by the web. It was impossible to get around the bush without falling down the cliff. Jorge looked at the extraordinary, shining spider, and wondered how he could pass by without having to destroy the creature’s magnificent web.
He closed his eyes and prayed that he might somehow be able to pass without damaging the gossamer threads. When he opened his eyes a few seconds later, Jorge was confronted by an amazing sight. In the middle of the web was an open archway, allowing him to walk easily through. The brilliant, metallic spider was nowhere to be seen. 13
All of the foregoing experiences serve, in one way or another, to challenge our traditional scientific view of reality. They seem to defy the very laws of nature. How then can we account for these anomalies?
The tough-minded realist may react by questioning the authenticity of these stories, branding them as anecdotal and unreliable, probably even the product of unsound minds. Yet for every case presented here, there remain a vast legion of others which might have been included in their place.
It is this wealth of material, coming from sources which are independent of culture, creed or sex, that become for the serious investigator a tide of evidence that simply cannot be ignored. As Jung himself recognized, they are facts which are in practice “uncommonly important and fraught with consequences.”
What strange vision did Sir Victor Goddard see on that stormy day in 1935? Perhaps it is significant that at the time he saw the hangars at the airfield at Drem, he noted that “the scene was lit with brilliant light” which seemed to him like sunshine. Yet within a few seconds he flew back into the pouring rain.
If we suppose that Sir Victor was blessed with a vision of the future, there remains the nagging point that he distinctly recalled seeing the hangar walls renovated in brick, whereas they actually were rebuilt in steel. His vision, if that is what it was, was not an accurate copy of the future airfield at Drem.
Carl Jung may equally well have had a vision, of a type generally referred to as hallucination. He too was aware of a “mild blue light that filled the room” which he did not question at the time. But if it was hallucination, it was also shared by his lady friend.
However, unlike the experience of Goddard, Jung and his friend did not see some entirely different scene replacing that of customary reality. Only the walls seemed to be superimposed with the magical mosaics, for the baptismal font remained unchanged, as Jung himself recorded.
Graham Conway was not aware of any change in awareness, yet for some ten minutes he watched two figures moving towards him along a snowy road. Although they seemed perfectly real, there were no tracks in the snow.
Did Conway then imagine these interlopers? If so, under what conditions might others also become aware of things and people that are not real? Or were they visitors from another realm, who could be seen but left no marks of their passing?
Strange creatures like the hairy hominid witnessed by David Buckley and John Fuller do leave evidence of their passing, as can be seen from physical traces reported in numerous other cases. Are they hoaxes, or instances of men disguising themselves in Halloween costumes? If so, this would seem to be a hazardous pursuit in a land where the constitution grants every citizen the right to carry arms.
And what of those creatures that seem stranger still, like the elves witnessed by Elizabeth Howard? Were they simply characters generated by the imagination of a childish mind? If so, what could have been the cause for such impromptu carnivals of thought?
Faith healing is a long-established phenomenon, although one that is still hotly debated within medical and scientific circles. Yet cases such as these continue to be reported from generation to generation.
Finally, there remain those experiences that seem to defy all logic and rationality. The inverted tennis ball that so bemused Lyall Watson is just one example of events that confound the accepted laws of physics. We dub them miracles.
These cases remain enigmatic anomalies of science. Many people doubt even the possibility of an event like the train that halted in its tracks to allow two late comers to climb aboard. Such stories are usually dismissed as after-dinner tales of fantasy. Yet cases such as these do occur, and they keep on recurring.
What these stories show is that our existing “laws of science” are seriously flawed. Not only are scientists unable to explain these events, but they simply ignore them and are content to relegate them to a category which they call the “paranormal”.
What these stories do prove, however, is what mystics have been saying for centuries, and that is that the universe is a manifestation of an unlimited principle that is fundamentally free. Because of this, it can never be bound by a pre-determined set of laws. So things that cannot be explained by science not only happen, but will continue to happen.
Furthermore, they claim that life holds out the possibility, for those who have the courage and the resolve, to chart anew their course in life, according to their own desires. And material obstacles like the web that confronted Jorge Lopehandia can be overcome in answer to a need.
For such people, truly nothing is written but the scroll they write themselves. They are free to write their will across the stars.
References
9 Elsie Salmon, “Christ Still Healing”, Arthur James, Worcester, 1956, pp. 61-67.
10 Paramahansa Yogananda, “Autobiography of a Yogi”, Self Realization Fellowship, Los Angeles, 1977, pp. 326-7.
11 Lyall Watson, “Lifetide”, Simon and Schuster, New York, 1979, pp. 17-19.
12 Berthold Schwarz, “Presumed physical mediumship and UFO’s“, in “Flying Saucer Review”, Vol. 31, No 6, p. 21.
13 Jorge Lopehandia, personal communication.
Allan, Stories That Defy Science, August 9, 2019, 9:53 am
In January 1976, Graham Conway took his three children, together with three of their friends, on a short holiday to a Youth Hostel in a valley near Chilliwack, in southern British Columbia, Canada.
Their purpose was to do some cross-country skiing away from the regular trails. On the evening of their arrival in the valley it snowed heavily, depositing some fifteen centimetres (seven inches) of powder snow.
The next morning Conway left the teenagers at the Hostel and set off down an old logging road for Chilliwack Lake, about 2.5 kilometres (1.2 miles) away. As he skied through the snow the temperature rose, melting the powder snow and impeding his progress.
Finally, he reached the lake and rested for a while, enjoying the crystal air and the spectacular scenery. Then, looking at his watch, he realized that he would not be back at the Hostel at his pre-arranged time. He decided therefore that he would make faster time on the return journey if he carried his skis and walked back through the snow.
He returned along the same logging road that he had taken to the lake. Coming down a short, steep hill from the lake, he rounded a bend and had an uninterrupted view some 400 metres (440 yards) down the road ahead. Approaching him in the distance were two figures who appeared to be skiing.
He looked attentively at them and concluded that they were his eldest daughter and her friend. He assumed that she had become concerned over his non-arrival and had set out in search of him, together with her friend. The two figures appeared to be engrossed in conversation.
A short distance later the road dipped slightly, and the girls were lost from view. Coming to the top of the dip, Graham was in time to see the two teenagers cross over from one side of the snow-covered road to the other. Although the couple was now closer, he still could not identify them positively.
After a few moments he decided that they were in fact his youngest son and his friend. He now saw that they were not skiing but were walking through the snow as he was. They still appeared to be engaged in a deep conversation.
Before they had come close enough to enable him to recognize them clearly, the two figures left the road, crossed a shallow ditch, and entered the young forest that bordered the road. At that point Graham assumed that they had left to answer a call of nature.
Continuing his steady walk along the now empty road, he was concerned when they did not emerge from the trees. He was also surprised since he knew how difficult it was to walk though the bush in summer, and that it would be worse in the winter when snow covered the branches, rocks and holes that lay buried beneath.
In the deep snow walking would be a formidable and rapidly exhausting task. Graham mentally marked the position where the two figures had left the road and focused on it as he approached the spot. But when he reached the place where he had last seen the two figures, he was dumbfounded to find that in place of the footprints he expected to see, there was only the unbroken surface of the snow.
Thinking that he might have misjudged the area where they had left the road, he searched the entire stretch. Not a single footprint or trail was visible to mark the passage of the two young people. Apart from the imprints of his tracks, the pristine snow lay as it had fallen on the night before.
Conway returned to the Hostel in a daze and found the teenagers all present. None of them had left earlier in search of him. Later that afternoon he returned to the scene but could find no evidence that two strangers had walked along that road and left it to enter the adjoining forest. They seemed simply to have vanished into the crisp Canadian air. 4
In October 1974, Bill and Jesse Fonda were driving down Interstate 40 approaching Asheville, North Carolina, when they spotted a red-haired young man standing at the side of the road. They stopped to pick him up.
The man introduced himself as Clayton and said that his truck had broken down at a nearby motel. He said he was working on a construction job in the town. He also spoke of his family back in Tennessee and said how much he missed them.
Bill and Jesse felt sorry for the young man as they dropped him off at his motel. Standing outside was a blue, 1959 pick-up truck looking very much the worse for wear. Bill helped Clayton repair the truck – a task which took well into that Saturday night.
Clayton was delighted. As he wiped his hands, he announced that he would have to hurry to get back home, as he had to be back by Monday. Bill and Jesse stood waving as the old truck moved off, sputtering and backfiring.
The manager of the motel came up and joined them. He looked thoughtfully down the highway, and then turned to them and said: “He comes here every year, same week, same day. His truck breaks down. He fixes it and then I see him again next year. He’s such a sad fellow.”
Bill and Jesse happened to live in an apartment a short distance from the motel. When they finally got to bed that night, Jesse was restless and could not sleep. She got up and looked out of the French doors in the living room. The moon was full and as she glanced outside, she caught sight of a blue truck.
She went outside to investigate. There was Clayton. The hood of his truck was up, and he was labouring over it.” Hi, Clayton,” Jesse whispered, “what are you doing back? How did you know we lived here?” Clayton didn’t answer but continued to labour over the engine.
Finally, he stopped, looked at Jesse and said pleadingly, “Please help me get home. I miss my wife and baby. I’ve got to get home.” His eyes filled with tears. Jesse ran back into the apartment to wake her husband. Clayton followed close behind. Bill woke up, irritated, and looked outside. There was no sign of Clayton or his truck.
The Fonda’s forgot about this incident. About a month later, they happened to be driving in the country looking for a house with some land which they could purchase. Suddenly Jesse saw a familiar-looking blue truck in a field.
They stopped the car and walked into the field to investigate. “Wow!” Bill exclaimed, “whoever was in that really got it. Look at those bloodstains. Let’s go ask someone what happened.” They made their way to a nearby farmhouse and an elderly man answered the door. When they enquired about the truck the old man shook his head sadly.
“You must be mistaken about the bloodstains” he told them. “Although the incident is still fresh in my mind, that truck has been there for ten years. It happened the week of the full moon in October. I remember that because it was so light outside. I was shaken from my sleep by a terrible crashing noise about 2.00 o’clock.
I ran out into my field and that blue truck had been knocked out there from the highway by a semi-trailer. The truck driver was okay. He admitted he’d fallen asleep at the wheel. It took us two hours to get the boy out and he cried pitifully the whole two hours, begging us to get him home to his wife and baby.
I remember his red hair and blue eyes. The ambulance came – they had to call from the road because I didn’t have a phone – but the boy died before they got him to hospital. It’s a sad thing, such a strong young man had to die. We never found his wife. He had no identification, not even a tag on his truck. Nobody ever claimed him.” 5
It was an early summer evening in 1979 when Lucille Ruda walked down the beach to the pier about half-a-mile (800 metres) from her new residence in Pacifica, California. The waves lapped gently on the sand and the air was fragrant with salt.
From the pier she watched the distant rocky coves and felt a sense of refuge from the strains of life. She thanked God for leading her to such a tranquil spot. As twilight darkened into night, and the pier light came on, Lucille slowly made her way back.
She ambled down the sidewalk along Beach Boulevard. There was no one else in sight. The two houses at the end of the road were shrouded in darkness. A van was parked some distance away. As she moved towards it, she was startled to see four men carrying beer cans emerge from the far side of the van.
They were young, burly and bearded. She heard one of them say, “Let’s get her,” as they fanned out towards her. Lucille was faced with an open field to her left and a sandy bluff on her right which offered no protection. As the men advanced, she prayed silently for help.
Suddenly she felt something press against her right leg. She looked down and saw a huge white German Shepherd at her side. The men stopped, then retreated. One of them cried, “Jesus! look at that”. Then they all scrambled back into the van.
Lucille felt the warm fur of the animal and admired the dog’s noble head. Its white body glowed in the dark. The dog followed her to her door, licked her hand and then loped off into the darkness. She watched it go until it was lost from sight. Lucille had never seen this dog before, nor did she ever see it again. 6
In August 1982, farmhands David Buckley and John Fuller were about to check on the cows at Valley Farms in Connecticut. It was shortly before midnight. As they made their way through the darkness, they were startled to see a strange creature.
“We almost had a heart attack,” said Buckley. “We were about two feet away from it”. Buckley described the creature as about six-foot-tall, weighing about 300 pounds, with immense muscles. It had long, dark brown hair over its entire body and arms that hung down to its knees. It had ominous dark eyes and a set of dangerous looking teeth. Its nose resembled a human’s rather than a monkey’s snout.
“We walked around the back and we saw it on a feed bunk, sitting right on the edge of it, like a person,” said Buckley. “It was watching the cows and it had its hand in the silage and was either playing in it or eating it.”
The creature turned and got up quickly, saw the two farmhands, and walked slowly towards John Fuller, who screamed in terror. It then veered toward Buckley, with its arms outstretched. Buckley later recalled, “We had the impression he wanted to have us for dinner!”
The creature then turned, ran slowly around the corner of the feeding bins, and then simply “vanished into nowhere.” The two men, who were understandably shaken, ran the other way and immediately called the police. Equally understandably, the State Police at Troop C Barracks in Stafford thought the two men were “stoned”.
After Buckley and Fuller were able to persuade them of the genuineness of their encounter, several troopers searched the area. Nothing was found. Buckley told the police: “I’ve never seen a human with a build like that. Not even the muscle builders. ” 7
In 1963, Elizabeth Howard (pseudonym), who was then about six years old, was out driving with her parents along the Upper Levels highway in the Lynn Valley region of Vancouver’s north shore. It was a day in late spring, and although it was around half-past-five in the afternoon, it was still clear and sunny.
Elizabeth was sitting in the rear section of the family station wagon. On their journey home after visiting her grandparents, they stopped at a Drive-In for hamburgers and milkshakes. Then, having collected their refreshments, they continued driving along the Upper Levels highway.
Elizabeth was in the back seat drinking her milkshake and looking to her left out of the window towards the north shore mountains. As they were passing a bank covered in shrubs, she was astonished to see three little elves climbing up the bank.
She continued to watch them until they passed beyond her field of vision. The elves looked just as if they had stepped out of a Disney movie. They were about two-and-a-half feet in height and were all dressed alike.
Each little elf was wearing a red vest, green and white striped leggings, three-quarter length trousers, brown shoes with up-turned points and a red toque with tassels on the end. They were all carrying picks over their shoulders as they clambered up the bank.
Elizabeth could not believe her eyes and was too shocked to mention what she had seen to other members of her family. She insists, however, that what she saw was real, and that she was not taking any medication at the time. 8
References
4 Graham Conway, personal communication.
5 Jesse Fonda, “I met the real phantom hitchhiker”, Fate magazine, January, 1977, pp. 55-57.
6 Lucille Ruda, “At my time of need”, Fate magazine, October, 1985, p. 50.
7 Janet and Colin Bord, “The Evidence for Bigfoot and Other Man-Beasts”, Aquarian Press, Wellingborough, 1984. pp. 14-16.
8 Elizabeth Howard, (pseudonym), personal communication.
Allan, Stories That Defy Science, August 1, 2019, 12:41 pm
Our world is filled with material objects. These objects have been found by science to exist in certain relationships with one another. From an analysis of these relationships we have built up our scientific laws.
We have learned to explain the action of light, the process of heat, and the force which attract magnets to one another. Western technological civilization has been built upon the practical application of these relationships.
And because the manufactured objects which this technology has produced exist in themselves, they have become evidential proof of the validity of these laws.
Our concept of electricity is reinforced every time a bolt of lightning strikes the earth, or when we operate elevators or appliances. The force of gravity, which allegedly caused an apple to caress the head of Newton, is verified every time we hit a baseball in the air.
Nature too obeys these laws, for we warm ourselves at night beside log fires which convert the kinetic energy stored within the atoms and molecules of the wood into heat.
Our three-dimensional world seems very secure, and the scientific laws which explain the way it works seem as solid as the ground beneath our feet. Our world seems very real, for we have sensed it so, and our scientific knowledge has confirmed our faith.
Yet there are occasions in life when mysterious events occur which seem to defy the solid foundation of our beliefs. Because scientists are not able to explain these events within their normal definition of reality, they tend to lump them together as examples of things that are beyond the normal – the paranormal.
It is these strange events of the paranormal, most commonly described in anecdotal form, that are the keys to a new understanding of reality. They are occurrences that caused the 18th century British astronomer William Herschel to admit that “according to received theories these events ought not to happen.”
Yet they do happen, and they continue to happen. But if we examine them carefully, we will find that they become the facts upon which a new view of reality can be built. This new concept of reality becomes pregnant with power, for it offers up the possibility that we may in fact be able to bend reality according to our will.
Here are a few examples of strange events that defy our normal understanding of reality.
Air Marshall Sir Victor Goddard graduated in science from Cambridge University, and subsequently obtained a post-graduate degree in aeronautical engineering.
In 1918 he became a founder member of the Royal Air Force and Captain of the Airship R.36. In 1935 he was appointed Deputy Director of Air Intelligence in the Air Ministry.
In that same year, Goddard flew to Scotland where he intended to play a round of golf at Gullane by the river Forth. Not far from Gullane was a derelict airfield that had not been used since the first World War and had since been converted into a farm.
It was called Drem. Since he was in the neighbourhood, Goddard decided to drive to Drem to visit the owner of the farm. He wanted to see if it could still be used to land light aircraft in case he came again.
“I found the old air-field divided into many separate pastures by barbed wire, each being well populated with sheep or cattle, and one with pigs. The hangars were then nearing dereliction; they were all in use, as barns for hay and farm machinery, cow byres and chicken runs. It certainly was no longer a fit place for a landing or for housing any kind of aeroplane.”
On the following day, less than sixteen hours later, Goddard flew south from Scotland. The weather was bad. Heavy clouds hung close to the ground and the sky was darkened by pelting rain. Seeking to establish his position, he flew low to the ground. Through the dismal gloom he was able to make out the misty silhouettes of hangars which he thought he recognized.
“Yes, this was Drem airfield, right enough. I recognized the hangars as I crossed the boundary fence at less than thirty feet in driving rain. Then suddenly the scene was lit with brilliant light which I supposed was sunshine.
“The airfield was clear, new-mown and clean, the nearest hangar doors were open and on the tarmac apron, wet from recent rain, stood, parked, four aeroplanes – three biplanes (Avro 504s) and then a monoplane of unknown type.
“Emerging through the hangar doors there was a second monoplane being pushed by two mechanics, one on the tail, one on the starboard wing. All five machines were brilliant yellow chrome. The mechanics who were there, attending them, were all in dungarees of blue.”
Now there were no yellow aeroplanes in service in 1935, nor were there any monoplanes. The mechanics of that time wore brown overalls. But what astonished Goddard most in this extraordinary scene was the complete indifference of the men on the ground to his presence a mere thirty feet above them.
“Not one of them looked up. But they were real men. The unreality to them must then have been myself and my quite physical conveyance. No airman anywhere, on any tarmac in the world – that is, the world we think we know – could then have failed to look at me had I been there for him to see and had my roaring Hawker Hart been there for him to hear. Those airmen did not pay the slightest heed to me or it.”
Goddard sped past the four hangars, and as he cleared the last of these newly renovated buildings, he plunged again into the driving rain. In 1939, with the onset of hostilities brought about by Hitler’s Reich, Drem airfield reopened as a flying training school. It was supplied with yellow Avro 504s and Magisters.
The Magister was a new trainer – a monoplane. It was the exact replica of the monoplane Goddard had seen on that stormy day four years before. None had existed in 1935. Meanwhile, the airmen’s overalls had also been changed. They were no longer brown, but blue.
Air Marshall Goddard may have had a vision of Drem airfield in 1935 in which he foresaw the future as it would turn out to be four years later. Yet there was one small flaw. The renovated hangars that he saw in his vision were made of brick, as they had been built originally.
In 1938 they were actually rebuilt in steel. However, when the plans for the renovation were initially drawn up, it was the intention of the planners to leave the brick structures unchanged. They were later overruled. 1
In 1933, Swiss psychiatrist Carl Jung travelled to Ravenna in northern Italy. Together with a lady friend he visited the tomb of Galla Placidia, a fifth century Empress of high class who had had the misfortune to be married to a barbarian prince.
After seeing the tomb, the two of them proceeded into the Baptistery of the Orthodox. As Jung entered the baptistery, he was confronted by a strange phenomenon.
“Here, what struck me first was the mild blue light that filled the room; yet I did not wonder about this at all. I did not try to account for its source, and so the wonder of this light without any visible source did not trouble me.”
As he gazed around the room, Jung was surprised to see that on each wall was a mosaic fresco of incredible beauty. This was astonishing because on his original visit twenty years earlier, he recalled seeing windows where the frescoes could now be seen. He was vexed to find his memory so unreliable.
“The mosaic on the south side represented the baptism in the Jordan; the second picture, on the north, was of the passage of the children of Israel through the Red Sea; the third, on the east, soon faded from my memory.
“The fourth mosaic, on the west side of the baptistery, was the most impressive of all. We looked at this one last. It represented Christ holding out his hand to Peter, who was sinking beneath the waves.”
Jung and his lady-friend stopped in front of this last mosaic for about twenty minutes, discussing the ritual of baptism, before leaving the baptistery. Jung was so struck by the beauty of these mosaics that he sought to obtain photographs of them. But time was short, and he thought he might be able to order the pictures from Zurich.
When he returned home, he asked a friend who was going to Ravenna to get pictures of these mosaics for him. When his friend returned from Ravenna, he said that he had been unable to locate them. He said that the mosaics that Jung had described to him did not exist! As Jung recalled in his memoirs:
“This experience in Ravenna is among the most curious events in my life. The actual walls of the baptistery, though they must have been seen by my physical eyes, were covered over by a vision of some altogether different sight which was as completely real as the unchanged baptismal font. Which was real at that moment?”
Jung was able to establish that the lady-friend who had accompanied him to the baptistery had seen the same main features of the mosaics. She subsequently refused to believe that what she had seen “with her own eyes” had not existed. Jung added:
“To be sure, it is not a fact which can be scientifically verified and therefore finds no place in an official view of the world. Yet it nevertheless remains a fact which is in practice uncommonly important and fraught with consequences.”
There remains one curious twist to this story. During a stormy crossing from Byzantium to Ravenna in the middle of winter, the Empress Galla Placidia is alleged to have made a vow that if she survived the crossing, she would build a church and have the perils of the sea represented in it. 2
It was Christmas 1960. Tienie Groenewald and his wife Judy, who had recently married, decided to spend the festive season with Judy’s parents. At the time Tienie was a pilot stationed at the Langebaan Air Force base, located just north of Cape Town in South Africa.
Judy’s parents lived in Port Shepstone, a seaside village on the Natal coast, some 1200 miles (1900 kilometres) away. Tienie wrote to his father-in-law saying that he intended to leave Langebaan at about 7am on Saturday, and that he expected to reach Port Shepstone early on the Sunday morning. He was also looking forward to showing off his new car, which his in-laws had not yet seen.
As it happened, Tienie arrived home at about noon on the Friday. As they had already packed, he and Judy decided to begin their journey immediately, instead of waiting until the following day. As they did not have a telephone however, they were unable to warn their in-laws of their decision to leave earlier.
Tienie and Judy took turns in driving and motored throughout the night on their long overland journey. At about 10am on the Saturday morning, they had almost reached their destination. Judy looked forward to surprising her parents by arriving almost a full day earlier than planned.
Yet just as they reached the outskirts of Port Shepstone, she was astonished to see the familiar figure of her father waving to them from his van, which was parked on the side of the road.
As Tienie pulled up alongside the van, his father-in-law greeted them warmly saying, “You are right on time. When I left home a short while ago, I said to the wife, the kids will be here in fifteen minutes. When you get there,” he remarked smugly, “you’ll find the coffee waiting.”
Baffled by this unexpected welcome, Tienie asked him how he knew they would arrive almost a full day earlier. “It was easy”, came the reply, “I simply used my ‘grassie’.”
As he later explained to Tienie, “When I woke up this morning, I wondered whether you had left yet. So I took out my ‘grassie’ (a dried grass stalk that he used as a divining rod). Using a map I directed my thoughts at Langebaan, and asked if you were still there.
“To my surprise I got a negative response. Realizing that you were already on your way, I then focused my thoughts on various points along your route. Each time the answer to my mental question was negative. It was only when I tried just outside Port Shepstone that I got a positive response.
“Knowing that you would soon be here, I called out to the wife to put on the coffee, then jumped into my van and drove off to meet you. The rest you know.” 3
References
1 Victor Goddard, “Flight Towards Reality”, Turnstone, London, 1975, pp. 23-26 and p. 29.
2 Carl Jung, “Memories, Dreams, Reflections”, recorded and edited by A. Jaffe, Pantheon, New York, 1961, pp. 284-287.
3 Tienie Groenewald, personal communication.
Allan, Stories That Defy Science, July 25, 2019, 10:44 am
This selected entry was originally published here on November 9, 2015.
Scott: My name is Scott Paton. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”. This is a book dealing with prophecy.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.
Thanks Scott. It’s been quite a while since we last chatted. As readers of my Blog will know, I have had quite a few health issues lately, but I am happy to say that these are over now.
Scott: Well Allan, I’m certainly glad to hear that. So what do you plan to talk about today?
Well Scott, Iran has been in the news quite a lot lately, so I thought this would be a good time to revisit a subject that we have talked about in various Podcasts over the last few years, and that is about Iran and its quest for nuclear weapons.
Scott: I look forward to hearing what you have to say about that Allan, especially since Iran recently concluded a deal with the West on the subject of nuclear arms. Perhaps you could start off by giving us a summary of what that was all about.
Certainly Scott. My pleasure.
As I explained in our Podcast entitled “Persia Reborn“, the land that we now call Iran was once part of a much greater land empire called Persia, which had a long and proud cultural tradition extending back for several thousand years.
However, their traditional system of Government changed in 1979 when the former leader, the Shah Reza Pahlavi, was overthrown as a result of a series of strikes and demonstrations which had effectively paralyzed the country.
It was then that one of the instigators of this revolution, a cleric by the name of Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini, returned from exile in Paris to become the Supreme Leader of the country that now became known as the Islamic Republic of Iran.
The Ayatollah Khomeini showed little interest in developing nuclear energy, and neither did his successor. In fact, the Ayatollah Ali Khamenei, who became the new Supreme Leader in 1989, actually issued a Fatwa, or religious decree in the mid-1990s, banning the use or development of nuclear weapons.
All that changed in 2001, when Islamic terrorists attacked and destroyed the twin towers of the World Trade Center in New York. In response, President George Bush launched bombs and missiles against various Taliban facilities in Afghanistan.
And of course, as we all know, Bush did not stop there. In March, 2003, he ordered US forces to launch an attack on the city of Baghdad, in a mission that came to be known as “shock and awe”, thereby beginning his war against Saddam Hussein and the forces of Iraq.
So in the space of just two years, Iran saw the countries on either side of them attacked by a coalition of Western forces that led to the removal from power of both of their leaders. Clearly, it was time for Iran to act, and act they did.
Scott: So Allan, what did the Iranians do?
Well Scott, although they continue to deny it to this day, the Iranians began their quest to develop nuclear weapons. And as we talked about in our Podcasts titled “Iran’s Nuclear Blunders” and “Nuclear Showdown“, the immediate priority of the Iranian government was to buy time.
The first thing that Iran needed to do was to create an elaborate smokescreen, that was designed to fool other countries into thinking that all they were doing was enriching uranium to the level consistent with that needed to fuel a civilian nuclear power plant.
Secondly, they needed to make sure that the facilities they were building to enrich uranium to the level needed to make atomic weapons, were hidden from the prying eyes of the inspectors of the International Atomic Energy Agency.
As part of their strategy of stalling for time, Iran first entered into a series of long drawn out negotiations with the international community, over whether they should undertake this enrichment process themselves, or whether they should simply import enriched uranium from other designated countries like Russia or the United States.
These discussions dragged on for years without ever reaching a conclusion, which of course was exactly what the Iranians intended. However, things changed in 2006 when the United States as well as other Western nations imposed severe economic sanctions on Iran.
Over time these sanctions damaged the Iranian economy to such an extent that in November, 2013, they decided to begin a series of formal negotiations with the P-5+1 countries, consisting of China, Russia, France, the UK and the United States, plus Germany and the European Union.
Finally, in July of this year, a formal agreement was reached between the various parties involved that became known as the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action, or JCPOA. And it was this agreement that became the deal on nuclear arms that you were referring to.
Scott: Thanks Allan. That really helps me to understand how it all came about. Which brings me to my next question. What did this agreement have to say?
Well Scott, obviously it had a lot to say. In fact the published text of this Joint Plan of Action ran to 159 pages. But in a nutshell, this is what Iran and the P-5+1 countries agreed:
Iran agreed to eliminate its stockpile of medium-enriched uranium completely, as well as reduce its stock of low-enriched uranium by 98%. It also agreed to reduce the number of its centrifuges by two-thirds for the next fifteen years.
Also, for the next fifteen years, Iran will only be able to enrich uranium to a level of 3.67%, and they will not be able to build any new uranium-enrichment or heavy-water facilities. The existing heavy-water plant at Arak will be converted.
Under this agreement, whatever enrichment activities that Iran does decide to undertake over the next ten years will be limited to a single facility that only uses first-generation centrifuges, and not the more advanced kind which they have been using up until now.
Both parties agreed that all the terms of this agreement would be monitored and verified by inspectors of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), who would be granted regular access to all existing Iranian nuclear facilities, as well as any other sites which the IAEA may wish to inspect in the future.
In return for these conditions, it was agreed that once the IAEA inspectors had verified that Iran had fulfilled all of the above obligations, all nuclear-related sanctions imposed by the United States, the European Union and the United Nations Security Council would be lifted.
This agreement was signed in Vienna on 14 July, 2015. It was immediately hailed by President Obama as a triumph of negotiation, and a victory for diplomacy that would rid the entire Middle-East from the spectre of war with Iran for the foreseeable future.
Unfortunately Scott, this is where things began to unravel, and now just four months later, you have to wonder how the various countries involved in these negotiations with Iran could have allowed the situation to have gone so badly wrong.
Scott: What sort of trouble are you referring to?
In answer to your question Scott, there is an old English proverb that says that anyone who sups with the devil needs a long spoon. What this means is that anyone who deals with a devious person needs to be ultra-cautious, for fear of being harmed.
And those who negotiate with Iran have every reason to be concerned, as subsequent events have now proved. For at the very heart of the Iranian approach to these negotiations was their strategy of “Taqiyya“.
According to the Shi’a practice of Islam, “Taqiyya” is a religious dispensation which permits an individual to commit illegal or even blasphemous acts, as a means of deceiving another in order to gain a future advantage.
The ink was hardly dry on this agreement when Iranian President Hassan Rouhani went on local TV to say that Iran had got everything that it wanted, plus a lot more. For example, his version of this agreement went as follows:
• Our prime objective in entering into these negotiations was to keep our nuclear program intact, and to have all sanctions lifted. This we have achieved.
• At first they wanted to limit us to 100 centrifuges. Now we keep 6,000.
• They wanted restrictions for 25 years. Now it is 8.
• First they said we could only have first-generation centrifuges, now we can have IR6, 7 and 8 advanced centrifuges.
• At first they said that the heavy-water plant at Arak had to be dismantled. Now it will remain under certain conditions.
• At first they said that the underground nuclear facility at Fordo had to be closed. Now it will stay open and we will keep 1,000 centrifuges there.
• All sanctions, including on missiles, will be lifted on the day of implementation. Not just suspended, but lifted completely.
In fact President Rouhani presented such a distorted picture of the final agreement, that one had to wonder whether he had ever paid any attention to the details of what had been negotiated in Vienna. But worse was to follow. Much worse.
Scott: Why do you say that, Allan?
Well Scott, as President Obama went to great lengths to explain to both Chambers of Congress, this agreement is founded not on trust, but on monitoring and verification. In other words, the inspectors of the IAEA will verify that Iran does what the agreement says.
In fact this assurance by Obama was a complete farce. For example, the agreement states that in the event of Iranian violations, sanctions will be re-imposed by all the nations involved. The term that Obama used was that these sanctions would “snapback” into place.
However, Article 37 of this agreement explicitly states: “Iran has stated that if sanctions are reinstated in whole or in part, Iran will treat that as grounds to cease performing its commitments under this JCPOA in whole or in part.”
But it is not just a question of whether or not sanctions can or will be reinstated if Iran fails to abide by the terms of this agreement Scott, the harsh truth of the matter is that the immediate outcome has already begun to fulfill Iranian expectations.
Scott: Can you give us some examples?
Well Scott, as President Rouhani told the Iranian people, his primary purpose in entering into these negotiations was to remove the international sanctions. He had good reason to gloat, for without even waiting for Iran to do anything, numerous nations have already dropped these sanctions altogether.
The United Kingdom has already lifted the ban on 22 Iranian banks and companies that were previously blacklisted. German trade with Iran has risen by 33 percent, making it the Islamic Republic’s third largest trading partner after China.
China has agreed to help Iran build five more nuclear power reactors. Russia has now agreed to deliver S300 anti-aircraft missile systems which were previously banned under the sanctions, and is also engaged in talks to sell them Sukhoi fighter planes.
France has sent its Foreign Minister as well as a 100 person strong delegation to negotiate new business deals, including projects to double Iran’s crude oil exports. India’s trade with Iran has jumped by 17 percent, and is negotiating to build a massive sea and rail hub at the Iranian port of Chah-Bahar.
So as you can see Scott, the international community have not even waited for the starting gun to go off before jetting off to Iran to promote their own trade and commercial interests. So what hope is there that Iran will keep to their nuclear obligations now that sanctions are unravelling by the day.
Scott: So tell me Allan, if the previous sanctions are unravelling as you say, do you think that Iran will continue to honour its nuclear obligations under this agreement?
Well Scott, if the past is any guide, the world should not hold its breath. Iran has not stuck to the agreements it made in the past, so there seems little reason to believe that they will start doing so now.
Take for example the recent missile test conducted by Iran. The agreement had hardly been completed when Iranians announced that they had test-fired a new precision-guided medium-range missile that was capable of delivering a nuclear weapon.
This was a clear violation of the 2010 Security Council resolution banning ballistic missile tests by Iran, as well as a violation of the JCPOA agreement in which they agreed not to launch ballistic missile tests for the next eight years.
So in terms of the principle of “Taqiyya” which I described earlier, this was a classic example of “Gotcha“. “You gullible Westerners fell for the trap we laid out for you“.
That may seem bad enough Scott, but the “worse” that I was referring to earlier, is that Iran has not even agreed to the conditions of the agreement announced with so much fanfare by President Obama.
Scott: What do you mean by that Allan?
Well Scott, the Supreme Leader of Iran, Ali Khamenei, who is the final authority on all matters involving the Islamic State of Iran, has not only not approved the terms of the JCPOA agreement, but he has added new conditions since the original agreement was finalised.
In a letter which he dictated to the Iranian President Rouhani after the agreement had been announced, Khanenei prescribed nine new conditions that would have to be met by the JCPOA, and if they weren’t, Iran would cease to be bound by the terms of the agreement.
Here again we see the principle of “Taqiyya” at work. “We set new conditions that you have to meet, and if you don’t then we will scrap the deal, at the same time telling the world that you were responsible“. Talk about being between a rock and a hard place!
So the bottom line announced by the Tehran Times in its edition dated November 7, 2015, is that any sanctions imposed, or re-imposed, by anyone under any circumstances at any time, will invalidate the agreement, and absolve Iran of the need to fulfill its side of the deal.
Scott: So Allan, let me ask you this. Based on what you have talked about today, do you think that Iran will one day get nuclear weapons?
That’s a good question Scott. Obviously only time will tell. But you may be interested in something that took place some forty years ago. It happened in August, 1974, on the road to Tibet.
I was living in India at the time, and to escape the blistering heat of the Southern plains, I decided to travel up to the mountain kingdom of Kashmir. I ended up spending the entire summer there, moving from one hill station to another.
At the time that this incident took place, I was staying at a tourist bungalow at the hamlet of Sonamarg. This exquisite retreat is located along the main road that winds its way from Srinagar in Kashmir, through the Zanskar mountains of Ladakh, up to the western plateau of Tibet.
On the day in question, the monsoon had begun in earnest, and the rain was coming down in torrents. I had met two students from England a few days earlier, and to escape the deluge the three of us were sitting on the covered veranda of the tourist bungalow, drinking tea.
As we talked, our discussion was interrupted by the arrival of an amazing-looking man. To me, he looked like the living image of the 19th century Russian mystic, Grigori Rasputin. He simply walked in out of gloom, and at our invitation, joined us at our table.
He was dressed in thick sheepskin clothing held together by a large black leather belt. Covering his head was what looked like a fisherman’s oilskin hat, and on his feet were black wellington boots that reached up almost to his knees. He seemed to be in his mid-thirties.
But the most striking feature about this man was his thick black beard and his piercing dark eyes. Once he had settled down and accepted our offer of a hot drink, we asked him where he had come from and where he was going. His answer astonished us all.
He said that he had come from France, and was on his way to visit his Guru who lived in Tibet. When we asked him how he had travelled, he said that he had covered most of the journey overland and on foot, hiking through fields and forests to avoid border officials along the way.
When we asked him what route he had taken, he delved into the heavy rucksack that was slung across his back, and pulled out a large map that was covered in plastic to protect it from the rain. He opened it up carefully and spread it out in front of us.
As he was pointing out the various countries he had travelled through en route, I was struck by an unusual feature which appeared on the map. It was a series of black crosses which were scattered over the map in what seemed to be a haphazard fashion.
You’ll never guest what they were Scott.
Scott: Well I have to admit that you’ve got me there, Allan.
When I asked him what they were he replied: “The crosses mark the places where future nuclear explosions are going to take place“. When I asked him how he knew, he said that his Guru had shown this to him on a previous visit.
Scott: That’s amazing Allan. So where were these black crosses located?
Well this is where things get a little vague. You have to remember that this meeting took place over forty years ago. The other thing is that he sat on the opposite side of the table from me, so the map was upside down. But I remember seeing about five or six of these crosses.
Of course, from the vantage point of my present research, I wish I could have had the chance to ask him more questions. But unfortunately, no sooner had he had finished his drink when he got up and said he needed to be on his way. He vanished into the gloom as mysteriously as he came.
Scott: So tell me Allan, do you remember anything about where these crosses were located?
As I say Scott, from where I was sitting on the verandah that day, the map was pretty much upside down. However I do recall the various countries that were marked on the map, and the crosses appeared to be in Iran, Afghanistan and Pakistan.
As you can imagine, I have thought about that meeting many times over the years, especially in view of my own research into future prophetic events. And from my point of view, this does seem to fit in with Biblical End Time prophecies.
Of course, even if these crosses do mark the location of future nuclear explosions, they don’t indicate the source of these attacks. But based on what we know today, Pakistan already possesses nuclear weapons, and Iran may be close to getting them in the near future.
So to get back to your earlier question Scott, if I were a betting man, I would lay good odds that there will come a time when Iran will succeed in getting nuclear weapons, and will use them in the course of hostilities with neighbouring nations.
Not a pleasant prospect Scott, but as you have heard me say many times, I believe we are now living in the End Times, and that the time of Great Tribulation predicted by Jesus and the Old Testament prophets, will soon be upon us.
Scott: Thanks Allan. This has been a fascinating insight into events that have been taking place recently in Iran, and how they may fit in with ancient prophecies of the “End Times”.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”. Do join us for our next Podcast in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.
This selected entry was originally published here on April 20, 2013.
Scott: My name is Scott Paton. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”. This is a book dealing with prophecy. For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”, and is titled “Nuclear Showdown”.
Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.
Thanks Scott. It’s good to be with you again.
Scott: Allan, in your last Podcast you talked about Iran and how it is trying to develop nuclear weapons. Before you go into further detail, perhaps you could start off by telling listeners what it takes to build a nuclear bomb in the first place.
That’s a good point Scott. Well in theory, building a nuclear bomb is fairly straight forward. Just get the necessary ingredients and then put them together in the right way. However in practice things are not quite so simple. And to understand why we need to go back to Albert Einstein.
As you know Scott, Einstein came up with probably the most famous equation in all of science, and that is E = MC2 . What that means in reality is that all matter is simply a form of energy. In fact, incredibly large amounts of it. Just to give you an example, there is enough energy locked up inside a single airplane ticket to fly a plane around the world several times.
So the trick to making a nuclear bomb is to find a way to unlock this energy, and then unleash it in the form of a bomb. Now as we were taught in school, every atom has a nucleus, or centre. Inside this nucleus are varying amounts of protons and neutrons. And the heavier the atom is, the more protons and neutrons it has.
Scott: So how do you go about unlocking this energy?
Well Scott, the problem is that most elements in Nature are stable. And because the nuclear force that binds protons and neutrons together inside the atom is so strong, it is extremely hard to get atoms to break apart. In fact, when the United States finally succeeded in doing this in 1945, there were only two ways of doing so. And basically, the same is true today.
The challenge is to find an atom that is large enough to be unstable, and then find a way to cause the nucleus of this atom to break apart. This process of splitting the atom is called nuclear fission. Another important point is that there has to be enough nuclear material available to create what is known as “critical mass” for an explosion to take place.
In a bomb, an initial explosive charge causes more and more neutrons to be released. These neutrons then cause other atoms to break up, causing a chain reaction. So when they break apart, they cause other atoms alongside them to break up as well. And this chain reaction then keeps going until there is so much energy that the bomb explodes.
Scott: So what materials do you need to make a bomb?
So far only two elements have been found to be capable of causing the chain reaction needed to make a bomb. One element is Uranium, and the other is Plutonium. What makes them suitable for nuclear weapons is that both of these elements have very large nuclei, containing large numbers of protons and neutrons.
Uranium has 238 protons and neutrons, while Plutonium has 239. But what makes it so difficult to build a nuclear bomb in practice, is that neither Uranium or Plutonium are easy to come by.
The reason is that the Uranium ore usually found in nature is a stable element, and is therefore unable to trigger a chain reaction. So to cause an explosion, this ore has to be changed into Uranium 235. It has to be artificially enriched until it is in an unstable state. This is a long process requiring highly specialised equipment known as centrifuges.
Plutonium on the other hand, doesn’t exist in Nature at all, so it has to be made artificially. And the only way to do this is inside a nuclear reactor. So the problem for Iran, as I explained in my last Podcast, is that once they made the decision to build nuclear weapons, they first had to acquire a regular supply of either enriched Uranium or Plutonium, or both.
Scott: And what did they have to do after that?
They also had to find a way to hide this from the eyes of the world, and from the Inspectors of the International Atomic Energy Agency. Because Iran needed time to develop the fissile material needed to make nuclear weapons, they needed to con the Western world into believing that all they were after was to develop nuclear technology for peaceful purposes.
And so began a carefully choreographed series of negotiations that were designed to go nowhere. And in this they have been brilliantly successful. These negotiations first began in 2003, and they have been consistently going nowhere for the last ten years. The latest round of negotiations were held just two weeks ago in the city of Almaty in Kazakhstan.
Despite two days of intensive negotiations, the EU Foreign Policy Chief Catherine Ashton announced that these talks had also been fruitless. There can be little doubt that this news would have been warmly received in Iran, and their chief negotiator Saeed Jalili would have been highly praised.
Scott: Why do you say that, Allan?
Well Scott, since the entire purpose of these negotiations has been to keep the Western nations talking, so that they would not have a reason to make good on their military threats, these successive delays have provided Iran with the breathing room needed to acquire the necessary fissile material for making nuclear weapons.
But although Inspectors for the Atomic Energy Agency have so far been unable to visit the various nuclear sites in Iran, they have issued reports which give outsiders a pretty shrewd idea of what has been going on behind the scenes over the last few years.
As I pointed out in my last Podcast, the main locations used by Iran to enrich Uranium are in underground installations located at Natanz and at Fordow. You can also add another one to this, and that is the heavy water reactor in Arak, which is used for the production of Plutonium.
Using Plutonium to generate a nuclear explosion is not new. Although the original atomic bomb that was dropped by the United States on the Japanese city of Hiroshima used Uranium, the next one that was dropped on Nagasaki was a Plutonium-implosion design bomb. The main advantage of using Plutonium in the manufacture of a bomb is that it is a lot easier to create and control the chain reaction process.
And as a matter of interest Scott, all the nuclear bombs belonging to India, Pakistan, Israel and North Korea use Plutonium as a fuel source. So it is easy to see why this would appeal to Iran as well.
Scott: So does Iran have supplies of both Uranium and Plutonium?
Yes Scott, they do. In fact a recent report in the British newspaper “The Telegraph” indicated that clouds of steam were recently photographed being emitted from forced air coolers at the Arak plant in Central Iran, indicating that the plant was in full operation.
This is further evidence that the Iranian regime has been pursuing more than one way to build a nuclear weapon. All they have to do now is to enrich the quantities they have already stockpiled to the level needed to create the chain reaction in a bomb. However they do have one final hurdle to overcome.
They have to develop the trigger mechanism necessary to create the first explosive charge within the confined space of the bomb. And this is what they have been doing at their military explosives facility at Parchin, just outside of Tehran, which has also been off limits to nuclear inspectors in recent years.
Scott: So tell me Allan, do you think that recent events in North Korea have had an influence on Iran?
Absolutely Scott. In fact the two most interested spectators in the whole drama that has been taking place between North and South Korea and the United States have been Israel and Iran – and for totally different reasons.
Iran has been watching the unfolding saga in North Korea very closely, to see how the United States would react if it was challenged by a country that possessed nuclear weapons. And based on what we have seen up to this point, the answer is “very carefully”, so as not to provoke a nuclear showdown.
Israel, by contrast, is watching events in North Korea with increasing alarm. For the way that North Korea has been acting lately is exactly how they have been warning that Iran would behave if they ever acquired nuclear weapons. In other words, Iran would be quick to challenge their enemies and threaten them with thermo-nuclear war.
Scott: So where do you think all this will end Allan?
Well Scott, my own personal view is that it will end exactly where the Old Testament prophet Ezekiel said it would end. In previous Podcasts, I have quoted from the prophecies of Ezekiel, and his prediction that there would be a coalition of Islamic nations that would launch a land invasion on Israel.
Scott: What makes you say that?
Well Scott, we need look no further than what the Iranians themselves have been saying. Speaking recently to a group of Iranian war veterans, President Ali Khamenei said that Israel would disappear from the (and I quote) “landscape of geography”, and that the country would soon be returned to the Palestinians.
This is only the latest in a long war of words in which Iran has threatened to destroy the land of Israel. And of course the leader of Israel, Benyamin Netanyahu, is a man who does not take these threats lightly.
After all, he grew up with the memory of the Jewish Holocaust still fresh in his mind. He learned from the hard school of history that when a despotic leader announces to the world beforehand that he plans to destroy the Jews, as Hitler did in his book entitled Mein Kampf, then it would be wise to take these threats seriously.
And he certainly is in the forefront of those warning of the threat posed by a nuclear Iran. Another spokesman for this view is Ehud Barak, who was until recently the Israeli Minister of Defence. Speaking in an interview with the Washington Post, Barak said, and I quote:
“A nuclear Iran will be the end of the nonproliferation regime. Saudi Arabia will turn nuclear immediately, Turkey within several years, and probably the new Egypt will start moving to do it. Not to mention the potential of weapons-grade material leaking into the hands of terrorist groups from Iran.”
We also need to remember that Israel is not Iran’s number one enemy. The Islamic world has for many years now been split along sectarian lines. One group follows the Shiite sect of Islam, and this faction is led by Iran. The other group consists of Sunni Moslems, and is dominated by Saudi Arabia.
So as Ehud Barak has pointed out, if Iran were to acquire nuclear weapons, there would be an immediate rush by surrounding countries to do the same, and this would inevitably lead to a much more terrifying threat to world peace, quite apart from the danger to the continued existence of the state of Israel.
Scott: So Allan, if Iran is poised to become a nuclear power, what can the rest of the world do to stop it?
Well Scott, this is where the rubber meets the road. Since it is clear that sanctions alone will not stop Iran from acquiring nuclear weapons, and since North Korea has already shown that a country that has nuclear weapons can effectively thumb its nose at the rest of the world, then the choices facing the West are stark indeed.
During his recent visit to Jerusalem, President Obama made it clear that while he believed that there was still time for diplomacy to work in negotiations with Iran, if these negotiations were to fail, then the United States would (quote) “do what is necessary”.
I leave it to listeners to decide for themselves what Obama means by this. But if the words of Obama are not a sufficient deterrent, then the response by the Government of Israel should leave no doubt in anyone’s mind. If the United States is not prepared to bomb the nuclear facilities in Iran, then Israel will do so on its own.
So the 64,000 dollar question is this. How long will it take for Iran to explode its first nuclear device? It may be a matter of weeks, or it may be a matter of months. But I personally feel that it will be sometime before the end of this year.
And if this is the case, then the entire Middle East will be plunged into crisis. For you can imagine that if their nuclear sites are successfully attacked, then Iran will do everything in its power to retaliate, and a number of different countries will be in their cross-hairs.
But I will have more to say about all this in my next Podcast. And just a reminder for those people who would like to read my book, it can be reached here
Scott: Thanks Allan. You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”. Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series called “Signs of the Times”.
This selected entry was originally published here on January 14, 2013.
Scott: My name is Scott Paton. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”. This is a book dealing with prophecy.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”, and is titled “Iran’s Nuclear Blunders”.
Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.
Thanks Scott. Always a pleasure to talk to you again.
Scott: Allan, in your last Podcast you talked about modern Iran, and how it would come to play an important part in future events prophesied in the Bible. How do you think this will come about?
Well Scott, as I mentioned earlier, what has taken place in Iran over the last few years has not only brought the country to the brink of disaster, but as a result of their nuclear blunders, they have brought the world closer to the very scenario predicted by Ezekiel.
The situation in Iran right now is that the entire country is in a state of crisis, largely as a result of international sanctions imposed by Western countries, in response to Iran’s intransigence, and its apparent efforts to produce nuclear weapons.
Scott: What sort of crisis are they facing?
A short while ago, Shamseddin Hosseini, who is the Minister of the Economy in Iran, reported that the country was facing a 50% drop in oil revenues as a result of these sanctions.
In addition, many of the country’s imports, such as food and consumer goods, have been drastically reduced. For example, the number of container ships visiting Iran dropped from 378 in 2010, to a little over one hundred in 2012.
And the number of dry bulk ships carrying food, as well as necessary commodities like coal and iron ore, has dropped by 75% over the last two years. Only eight refrigerated cargo vessels carrying fresh produce called in at Iranian ports during the first ten months of 2012. And only five fishing trawlers docked in the same period, down from 20 two years before.
In October the Government announced that traders would no longer be able to export goods like wheat, flour, sugar and red meat, in order to conserve dwindling supplies at home. And two weeks later, Iran’s Oil Minister announced plans to ration the supply of diesel fuel, in a bid to curb the rampant smuggling of scarce fuel to neighboring countries.
According to the International Monetary Fund, the Rial, which is the main currency of Iran, has lost about 40% of its value against the American dollar since August. And while the official rate of inflation is given as 25%, many economists believe that it is actually closer to 75%.
This reduction in the value of their currency has brought severe economic hardship to citizens throughout Iran. And this has led to the first signs of social unrest, as street protests have broken out recently in various parts of the country.
And in a rare public confession that the Government was struggling under the weight of these international sanctions, the Ayatollah Khamanei was quoted as saying: “These sanctions are barbaric. This is a war against a nation“. And in a predictable show of defiance, he went on to add: “But the Iranian nation will defeat them.”
All of these problems have been brought about by Iran’s biggest blunder, and that is their decision to build nuclear weapons in the first place.
Scott: But don’t the Iranians say that their nuclear program is designed for peaceful purposes only?
Correct. In fact they have been saying that repeatedly to anyone who would listen, ever since their nuclear program began. But not many countries believe that today. Europe and the United States don’t. Neither do other Arab states. And Israel certainly doesn’t.
The very fact that Iran has been willing to undergo such hardships, and for so long, has sent a clear message to the world that they are determined to develop nuclear weapons as soon as possible, no matter how many sanctions they have to endure along the way.
The ironic thing about their present situation Scott, is that if they had wanted to, they could have succeeded in developing nuclear weapons long ago, soon after they came to power in 1979. The fact that they chose not to do so at that time, has subsequently proved to be yet another in a long series of political and strategic blunders by the religious leaders of Iran.
Back in the 1950’s, at a time when the Shah was the leader of Iran, he launched a nuclear program with the help of the United States that was part of an Atoms for Peace program. Under this program, the Shah approved plans to build up to 23 nuclear power stations by the year 2000.
As part of this program, President Gerald Ford signed a directive in 1976 offering Tehran the chance to buy and operate a US built reprocessing facility for extracting plutonium from nuclear reactor fuel – the very thing that Iran is now trying so desperately to achieve.
However, when the regime of the Shah was toppled by the Islamic Revolution in 1979, the new leader of the country, the Ayatollah Khomeini, cancelled the entire program, saying that it was incompatible with Islamic law.
And following the death of Khomeini in 1989, his successor, Ayatollah Ali Khamanei went even further. He issued a “Fatwa” – or religious edict – saying that the production, stockpiling and use of nuclear weapons was forbidden under Islamic law.
Scott: So Allan, when do you think Iran decided to go ahead with the development of nuclear weapons?
Well Scott, it is evident that the attitude of the rulers of Iran changed dramatically after 9-1-1. As you will no doubt recall, the response by George Bush to the attack on the World Trade Center, was to launch a full scale invasion of Afghanistan in October 2001.
And if that didn’t cause the Iranians to reconsider the need for nuclear weapons, then the events of March 19th, 2003, certainly did. For it was on that night, as the world looked on, that CNN broadcast live coverage of the US attack on the Presidential Palace in Baghdad.
This destructive display of aerial firepower came to be known by the phrase “Shock and Awe”. There is little doubt that those who were most shocked and awed by this ferocious display of firepower, were the rulers in Tehran.
For in the space of just nineteen months, they had come to witness both the countries on either side of them being attacked by the US. And in each of these cases, the aerial attacks were followed by land invasions, as part of George Bush’s global war on terror.
For a country that had captured US diplomats in the past, and held them hostage for over a year, all the while referring to America as the “Great Satan”, this should surely have caused the rulers in Tehran to ask themselves: “How long before we are next?”
So the impetus to gain nuclear weapons would have gone into overdrive from that moment on. And the reason for doing so was, as I explained in my last Podcast, that no country that has developed nuclear weapons in the past, has ever been attacked by any other state.
The perfect example of this is North Korea. Despite openly flaunting the West, including the United States, and continually threatening to destabilize the area, no nation has been willing to confront them, simply because they are known to have a small stockpile of nuclear weapons.
Scott: So what has been happening in Iran over the last ten years?
Well Scott, the leaders of Iran were now confronted with an enormous challenge. They not only had to acquire the materials and equipment necessary for the enrichment of uranium, as well as the facilities needed to house them, but they also had to find a way to do so without the rest of the world finding out about it.
And over the last ten years, this has been a saga that would have done justice to any James Bond novel.
The first thing that Iran needed to do was to create an elaborate smokescreen, designed to fool other countries into thinking that all they were doing was enriching uranium to the level consistent with that needed to fuel a civilian nuclear power plant, which is about 5%.
Secondly, they needed to make sure that the facilities designed to enrich uranium to the level needed to make atomic weapons, were hidden from the prying eyes of the inspectors of the International Atomic Energy Agency.
As part of their strategy of stalling for time, Iran first entered into a series of long drawn out negotiations with the international community, over whether they should undertake this enrichment process themselves, or whether they should simply import enriched uranium from other designated countries like Russia or the United States.
When these negotiations inevitably failed, Iran announced that they would now have no choice but to build the enrichment facilities themselves. However, in place of the accepted standard of uranium enrichment needed for civilian nuclear power stations, which was 5%, they announced that they intended to raise the enrichment level to 20%.
When the international community refused to go along with this, and enacted a series of sanctions against them, the President of Iran announced that it was their “inalienable right” to do this. He branded the sanctions as “illegal actions imposed by arrogant powers”.
Scott: So where does Iran have their enrichment facilities?
Well Scott, Iran now has seventeen sites that are known to be involved in various aspects of their nuclear program. Of these, two are the most important, because they are the ones that contain the centrifuges that do the actual enrichment of uranium.
The biggest of these facilities is known as Fordow, located outside the holy city of Qom, about a hundred miles to the south of Tehran. The other is at Natanz, roughly midway between Qom and the city of Isfahan.
Both of these facilities are underground. The Fordow site is located about 300 feet below the ground, and has been excavated from the inside of a mountain. Fordow is considered to have about 3,000 centrifuges at this time.
Natanz is a hardened Fuel Enrichment plant built about 25 feet underground, that is protected by a layer of concrete some two and a half feet thick, as well as another 70 feet of compacted earth on top of that. There are currently about 7,000 centrifuges installed at Natanz.
The other key location is Parchin. This is a military complex about 12 miles from downtown Tehran. Although Parchin is officially described as a facility for the testing and manufacturing of explosives, there have been reports that it has also been involved in nuclear weapons research.
But although inspectors of the International Atomic Energy Agency claimed in November 2011 that they had credible information that the Parchin facility had been used for implosion testing, their repeated attempts to visit this site have so far been blocked by Iran.
So as you can see Scott, this is not the sort of behaviour that would encourage countries like Israel and the United Sates to believe that the Iranian authorities are simply engaged in peaceful research.
Scott: So what has the rest of the world been doing about this?
Well Scott, Western countries have been relying for some years now on an escalating series of sanctions, to try to force Iran to give up its nuclear ambitions. But as we have already seen from the response I quoted earlier by the Ayatollah Khamanei, these sanctions only seem to have made Iran even more determined to succeed.
But behind the scenes, almost every kind of covert operation that you can think of has been tried at one time or another, especially by Israel and the United States. And that is why I compare this covert operation to the sort of thing you might read in a James Bond novel.
One of the strategies used was to attack the centrifuges themselves by means of cyber warfare. In June 2010, a computer worm was discovered that came to be known as Stuxnet. Although no one has ever admitted to creating Stuxnet, it is believed to have been a joint creation of Israel and the US.
Stuxnet was the first system of malware designed to target industrial systems, specifically the Siemens software and equipment used by Iran in their enrichment process. Stuxnet was believed to have rendered hundreds of centrifuges inoperable.
Two years later, another source of computer malware emerged, that also targeted Iranian computers. This one was called Flame. Flame was designed to record audio, screenshots, network traffic and keyboard activity.
This information was then relayed to command and control servers scattered around the world. The Flame virus could also spread to other computer systems over Local Area Networks, or by way of USB sticks, and it is thought to have been responsible for infecting thousands of centrifuges.
But this covert campaign has not been limited to cyber warfare. During the years 2010 and 2011, at least five Iranian nuclear scientists have been killed by unknown attackers. Their favourite MO has been to approach on motorcycles and then plant magnetic bombs on the outside of the cars in which these scientists were traveling.
I have even read stories about specially designed pens containing Radio Frequency ID chips, that have been given to Iranian scientists by visiting dignitaries, that could send radio signals to overhead drones to signal their locations.
As I say Scott, we would probably be amazed if we knew the full extent of this covert operation targeting the Iranian nuclear program. And this is where I feel the Iranians have been guilty of another huge strategic blunder.
Scott: Why do you say that, Allan?
Well Scott, if their purpose in developing nuclear weapons was designed to protect them from outside attack, then their nuclear enrichment program of the last ten years has been an unmitigated disaster.
Not only has the country been brought to its knees economically, as a result of the severe sanctions that have been applied by the West to all the countries that do business with Iran, but it seems ever more likely that they will invite the very attack that they fear.
I fully expect an aerial attack on Iranian nuclear facilities by either Israel or the United States, or both, before the end of this year. And when that happens, it will set in motion a chain of events that will lead to the very scenario predicted by the prophet Ezekiel.
It still amazes me Scott, that in spite of the fact that we live in such a sophisticated world, with supposedly wise heads governing the affairs of nations, that a situation could arise that exactly matches the words of an old Hebrew man who lived more than 2,600 years ago. But I will have more to say about all this in my next Podcast.
And just a reminder for those people who would like to read my book, it can be reached here
Scott: Thanks Allan. You have given us valuable insights into what is going on in the Middle East at this time, and how these events seem to be unfolding according to ancient prophecy.
This selected entry was originally published here on December 2, 2012.
Scott: My name is Scott Paton. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of the book “The LastDays of Tolemac“. This is a book dealing with prophecy.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”, and is titled “Persia Reborn”. Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.
Thanks Scott. It’s a pleasure to be with you again.
Scott: So Allan, I see that the title of today’s talk is called “Persia Reborn”. What exactly do you mean by that?
Well Scott, you will recall that in earlier Podcasts I explained that the ancient prophets predicted that our present world age would end in a series of cataclysms brought on by a close encounter with a comet.
Because of the catastrophes that would afflict the earth at that time, and the devastation caused by the global earthquakes and Tsunamis that would follow, the ancient prophets referred to this event as “The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord.”
According to the prophet Ezekiel, this Terrible Day of the Lord would happen after the Jews had returned to the lands of their fore-fathers, and Israel became a nation state once more. As I pointed out in my last Podcast, this occurred on May 14, 1948.
In chapter 38 of his Biblical book of prophecy, Ezekiel went on to say that after Israel had once again become a nation, it would be threatened by many nations, and that the armies of these nations would surround Israel on every side.
Now if this prediction proves to be correct, in the same way that his prediction about the creation of the state of Israel was correct, then Ezekiel gives us a clear timeline as to when this comet will appear.
So what this means Scott, is that because we now know what to look for, we can study world events and see if they unfold in the way that Ezekiel predicted they would. And that is what I plan to do in succeeding Podcasts.
Scott: So Allan, how does this relate to Persia?
Well Scott, according to Ezekiel, the great coalition of armies that would march on Israel would come from, and I quote, “the northparts“, and from countries like “Persia, Libya and Ethiopia“.
Of particular interest here, and what I want to talk about today, is Ezekiel’s reference to the land of Persia.
What I find significant, Scott, is that if Ezekiel’s words do prove to be correct, then the old foes of Persia and Israel will once again confront one another, just as they did in Biblical times.
Scott: So Allan, does that mean we are about to see a replay of the Bible conflicts of the past?
Well Scott, yes and no. For while the modern state of Israel is slightly less than 65 years old, and is similar in many ways to what it was in Biblical times, the ancient empire of Persia has been completely transformed.
For starters, the Persia of old no longer exists. The old empire has been replaced by a new country called the Islamic Republic of Iran. This new republic officially came into being on April 1st, 1979, so modern Iran is just over 33 years old.
It certainly wasn’t like that in Biblical times. For the Persia of old was one of the great empires of the world. Its history stretched back to before the Iron Age, to a time when the western nations of today didn’t even exist.
Ancient Persia has been home to some of the world’s oldest civilizations, with urban settlements dating back to about 4000 years BC. At the height of its golden age, it ruled an area extending from Libya and Spain in the west, to the coast of India in the east.
Over the centuries Persia was ruled by a succession of dynasties, beginning with the Medes, who unified the nation in 625 BC. However, it was later conquered by the invading armies of the Greeks under Alexander, followed by the Arabs, the Turks and the Mongols.
The turning point in Persian history happened between 633 and 656 AD, when the country was invaded by Moslem Arabs. This was the time when their ancient religion based on the teachings of the Prophet Zoroaster, was replaced by the religion of Islam.
After many years of foreign occupation by various invading armies, Persia was once again unified as an independent state in the year 1501, under Islamic rulers known as the Safavids.
But whereas up until that time, most of the population of Persia were Sunni Moslems, under the Safavids they were forced to become Shi’ites, and from then on Shi’a Islam became the official religion of Persia.
Another significant change introduced by the Safavids, was that Persia became a monarchy, and was ruled either by an emperor or a Shah. This system of government continued until up until 1979, when the Shah Reza Pahlavi was driven from power.
Scott: Wasn’t that the time of the American hostage crisis?
Yes Scott, it was. The revolution actually began in January 1978, when street riots broke out against the increasingly authoritarian rule of the Shah. These disturbances continued throughout that year until, in January 1979, the Shah fled after strikes and demonstrations had effectively paralyzed the country.
On February 1st, 1979, one of the instigators of the revolution, a cleric by the name of Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini, returned from exile in Paris to become the Supreme Leader of the country.
The Shah meanwhile had been diagnosed with cancer, and he traveled to the United States for treatment. This was the pretext used by the Ayatollah to organize students to storm the American embassy in Tehran.
Fifty two embassy personnel were captured when students poured into the embassy compound , and they were held hostage in Iran for 444 days. They were finally released in January 1981, on the day that President Ronald Reagan took office.
Incidentally, it was also at this time that Khomeini began referring to America as the “Great Satan”. However, this ideological slogan proved to have serious consequences for Iran, as it unleashed a powerful anti-Iranian backlash throughout the West that still continues to this day.
And this is where the destinies of Israel and Iran became intertwined once again. For no sooner had Iran become a nation state in 1979, than it became embroiled in civil war, just like the state of Israel had been some 30 years before.
At the time that Israel became a state, the United Nations called for the land of Palestine to be partitioned into two parts. One part was to consist of an independent Arab state, while the other part was to become an independent Jewish state.
The UN also decided that the city of Jerusalem would not belong to either the Jews or the Arabs, but would instead be ruled by an International Trustee System, administered by the United Nations themselves.
Well as you can imagine Scott, this was pretty much a recipe for disaster, and there could have been little surprise when civil war broke out between the Jews and the Arabs the very next day.
Scott: So Allan, how does this compare with the situation in Iran?
The situation in Iran was slightly different. In their case, the civil war didn’t break out between Iranians and non-Iranians, but between the Iranians themselves. The revolution was between supporters of the Shah, and those who aligned themselves with the Ayatollah.
The revolution itself was relatively short-lived, as the Pahlavi dynasty of the Shah collapsed when the military declared its neutrality a short while later. And the country officially became an Islamic Republic when the people approved a national referendum on April 1, 1979.
But this didn’t bring an end to the fighting. Soon after, Marxist guerillas joined rebels in various parts of the country, engaging in fierce fighting with government forces. The most violent of these revolts was the Kurdish uprising, which led to thousands of casualties.
It was while Iranian Government forces were embroiled in defeating their internal enemies, that Saddam Hussein tried to take advantage of the ongoing political and social crisis, by launching a full scale assault on Iran.
On September 22, 1980, the Iraqi army invaded Iran at Khuzestan, which took the leadership of Iran completely by surprise. This was the beginning of the Iran-Iraq war which was to last for six years, and cause almost a million casualties in Iran.
And it was out of this conflict that the seeds were planted that would lead, some thirty years later, to the armed confrontation that now exists between the states of Israel and Iran.
And this unfolding saga has proved to be as devious, twisted and malign as the plot of any fiction novel.
Scott: I sense that you’re about to take us on a James Bond type ride. Am I right?
That’s a good analogy Scott, because the intrigue associated with the Iranian manoeuvres over the last few years would easily rival any spy story.
But to go back to the time of the Iran-Iraq war which finally ended in 1988, Iran’s neighbor Afghanistan was involved in a battle of its own, with US backed mujahadeen fighting Soviet forces in a conflict that ultimately cost the Afghans over a million lives.
And having just emerged from a costly war of its own, both in terms of casualties and resources, the overriding concern of the Iranian leadership at that time was to find a way to avoid being over-run by either of these two superpowers.
This fear was undoubtedly reinforced some years later when the Americans attacked Iraq, and destroyed the forces of Saddam Hussein. So in short order, the leadership in Iran saw both of their neighboring countries, Iraq and Afghanistan, being invaded by American troops.
So Iran now found itself in the same position that Israel had been some thirty years earlier. And their response to their predicament was to do exactly what the Israelis did. I suspect you can probably guess what that was Scott.
Scott: Well Allan, my guess would be that they decided to build an atom bomb.
Pretty shrewd Scott. You’re right. As history has now shown, both nations decided to adopt the same strategy to protect themselves from the forces ranged against them. They decided to develop nuclear weapons.
And the reason they did this was simple. Iran realised, just like Israel had learned before them, that those countries that had their own nuclear capability were safe from attack, both from the West and from the East.
Outside of the main nuclear nations of the West, allied with China and Russia, only four countries have developed the capacity to produce nuclear weapons. These four are India and Pakistan, along with Israel and North Korea.
Of these four nations, only Israel has never publicly admitted to having nuclear weapons, choosing instead to follow a policy of ambiguity. Under this policy, Israel neither admits or denies that it has nuclear weapons, even though this is now taken for granted by its enemies.
From a defensive standpoint, perhaps the best example of the protective power of nuclear technology, is the country of North Korea. Ever since they exploded a small nuclear device in October 2006, North Korea has been safe from outside attack.
This despite some of the most provocative behaviour by any nation, and despite continuing threats to the people of South Korea. The fact that North Korea could effectively do whatever they liked, and thumb their noses at the rest of the world, has not been lost upon the leaders of Iran.
And if there were any doubts about the effectiveness of this strategy, they have surely been laid to rest by the recent overthrow of Muammar Gaddafi in Libya. Shortly after Gaddafi seized power in a military coup in 1969, he tried to obtain nuclear technology.
Although his initial efforts met with failure, over the years he managed to acquire both the expertise and the fissionable material needed to succeed.
However, shortly after the attack on the World Trade Centre in 2001, Gaddafi surprised everyone by announcing that he had decided voluntarily to eliminate his stock of chemical weapons, and to stop the production of nuclear material.
This later proved to have been a critical mistake, because if he hadn’t done this, it is unlikely that NATO would have risked intervening in the Libyan crisis that led to his death, and the collapse of his authoritarian regime.
Scott: So Allan, how does this tie in with what happened in Iran?
Well Scott, Like Gaddafi, the Ayatollah Khomeini no doubt saw the value of having nuclear weapons. But partly as a result of his religious dogma, and partly because of an amazing sequence of strategic blunders, Iran has stumbled from crisis to crisis.
As I suggested earlier, what has taken place in Iran over the last few years would surely rival any James Bond novel for deception, mystery and intrigue.
In following Podcasts, I want to talk about some of these blunders and explain firstly, why the present strategy in Iran has brought the country to the brink of disaster, and secondly, how this will likely lead to the precise scenario predicted by Ezekiel.
And just a reminder for those people who would like to read my book, it can be reached here
Scott: Thanks Allan. You have given us some fascinating insights into what is happening today in the Middle East, and how these events seem to be unfolding according to ancient prophecy.
This selected entry was originally published here on December 5, 2015.
Scott: My name is Scott Paton. I am speaking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”. This is a book dealing with prophecy.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.
Hello Scott, how are things with you?
Scott: Great, thank you. As you will no doubt recall Allan, at the end of our last Podcast about ISIS, I asked you what would happen to the Jews. You said that that was a topic for another time, so I was hoping that you could perhaps elaborate on that today.
Certainly Scott. My pleasure. But before I do that I would just like to say that I remain convinced that the Biblical description of the origin of Judaism is one of the most bizarre accounts in the history of civilization.
Much of what has happened to the Jews over the millennia simply defies rational understanding. So before I talk about the future of Israel, I think it would help to go back and review some of the extraordinary things that have happened in the past.
The Old Testament of the Bible is full of improbable stories that prompt more questions than they provide answers. For example, according to the eleventh chapter of the Book of Genesis, after the time of the Biblical flood, it says that “the whole earth was of one language, and of one speech“.
At that time the descendants of Noah said to themselves: “Go to, let us build us a city and a tower, whose top may reach unto heaven; and let us make us a name, lest we be scattered abroad upon the face of the whole earth“. Then in verses 5 to 8 we read:
“And the LORD came down to see the city and the tower, which the children of men built. And the LORD said, behold the people is one, and they have all one language; and this they begin to do: and now nothing will be restrained from them, which they have imagined to do.
“Go to, let us go down and there confound their language, that they may not understand one another’s speech. So the LORD scattered them abroad from thence upon the face of all the earth: and they left off to build the city“.
Now Scott, this is one of the most intriguing stories in the entire Bible, and it raises a whole series of questions for which we simply have no answers.
• What exactly were these descendants of Noah trying to do, and why was this so offensive to the LORD?.
• Who was this LORD the Bible was referring to anyway?
• Who were the “us” who proceeded to scatter the descendants of Noah upon the face of the earth, and then cause them to speak in a host of different languages?
• And how exactly did they accomplish such a stupendous feat?
Let’s just think about that for a moment Scott. How do you manage to scatter an entire people all over the earth, and in the process cause them to forget their mother tongue and replace it with a language that is completely different? It just boggles the mind. At least it boggles mine.
Scott: So who do you suppose these people were?
I really have no idea Scott. But there is another strange story in the Book of Genesis that may give us a clue. In chapter six we read the following:
“And it came to pass, when men began to multiply on the face of the earth, and daughters were born unto them, that the sons of God saw the daughters of men that they were fair; and they took them wives of all which they chose.
“And the LORD said, My spirit shall not always strive with man, for that he also is flesh: yet his days shall be an hundred and twenty years. There were giants in the earth in those days; and also after that, when the sons of God came in unto the daughters of men, and they bare children to them, the same became mighty men which were of old, men of renown“.
One of the things I find particularly interesting is that in the King James version of the Bible, the word LORD here is spelled in capital letters, just like it was in the story of the tower of Babel. Could this possibly refer to his rank, and could this LORD possibly be the leader of the “sons of God”?
And could these “sons of God” be the same beings who were so outraged when the descendants of Noah began to build their great tower? And were these “sons of God” giants, and if so where did they come from and where did they go?
Notice Scott that in the above quotation the LORD said that his spirit would not always strive with man, because “he also is flesh”. This certainly suggests that the LORD was not some supreme deity, but was made up of flesh and blood himself. This is a point I will return to later.
So do you see where I am going with this Scott? There is something decidedly other-wordly about many of these stories. You might even say that they are “out of this world”.
And this brings me to something that I have studiously avoided in all the years that I have been writing my Blog, not only because it has long been the butt of ridicule, but also because there is now so much disinformation surrounding the whole subject that most people assume it is all a hoax.
Scott: So what exactly are you referring to Allan?
The subject I am referring to Scott is UFO’s. Now before you and other listeners think that I have finally lost my marbles, let me emphasize that I am being perfectly serious about this, and I have a special reason for introducing this topic into our discussion.
Obviously the subject of UFO’s has been debated endlessly over the last fifty years or more, and is a topic that invariably generates far more heat than light. I just want to cut to the chase and mention the name of someone you have probably never heard of before Scott. His name is Clifford Stone.
Scott: You’re right there Allan. So what does he have to do with the history of the Jews?
Well Scott, Clifford Stone is one of those people that I could talk about for hours. But since we don’t have the time I’ll try to be brief. However, for the sake of those people who follow these Podcasts on my Blog, I’ll put a link there so that they can read more about him if they wish.
Clifford Stone is an American who was born in Ohio. At an early age he had memories of being contacted by ET’s. At the age of eight he was befriended by an Air Force captain, and this was the beginning of his association with the military. During the Vietnam war he tried to enlist in the US Air Force.
When Clifford was turned down by the Air Force as a result of a skin condition, his friend suggested that he try to join the Army instead. He did so and was selected for the job of clerical typist. But to his surprise, he hardly got to type a single letter.
Instead, a few weeks after joining the Army he was picked up in a staff car and taken to the Pentagon. From there he was moved by means of an underground shuttle to a location where he was told that he had been specially chosen for a secret assignment.
His assignment was to interact and communicate with extraterrestrial beings who were housed at this secret location. During the 22 years that Clifford spent with the Army, he also formed part of an elite group whose task was to recover crashed UFO’s and their occupants.
Since his retirement, Clifford has conducted numerous interviews describing his experiences with alien beings. In these discussions he has indicated that he personally knew of 57 different types of alien beings that had been in contact with the earth.
So if Clifford Stone is to be believed, alien beings are real and they are visiting our planet at this time. Obviously we can only speculate as to what their motives are for doing so. But the reason why I believe that his stories are true is because I have seen UFO’s myself on three different occasions.
So the point I want to make here Scott is this. If many different types of alien species are visiting the earth today, then they could well have visited earth in the past. And if they are communicating with us now, they could just as easily have communicated with those people who were alive then.
And so we need to examine many of the Bible stories to see if they can shed any light on possible human and alien interactions. And this brings me to what is undoubtedly the strangest story of them all, and that is the saga of Moses.
Scott: Why do you say that Allan?
Well Scott, I think most people are familiar with the story of Moses, and how he was called upon by God to rescue the children of Israel from bondage in the land of Egypt, and then lead them to a promised land flowing with milk and honey.
What most people seldom stop to consider is that the LORD who commanded Moses to carry out this mission, begins to look more and more like an extraterrestrial being, rather than the everlasting Deity. He also seems to be someone who clearly had an agenda of his own.
One of the most striking features of the Bible is the difference between the God of the Old Testament and the God of the New. While the God of the New Testament is portrayed as an all-loving God, the God of the Old Testament seems more like a choleric martinet.
The LORD God of the Old Testament insists on obedience. He is jealous of any other rivals and is quickly roused to anger. He is also ready to seek vengeance on anyone who disobeys him. Certainly he comes across as an entity to be feared, rather than a God who is all-loving.
While the God of Jesus loves all of humanity to the point that he is even prepared to sacrifice his own Son upon the cross, the LORD of the Old Testament orders Abraham to offer up his own son Isaac as a human sacrifice, no doubt as a test of his faith, or should that perhaps be his ability to follow orders?
And whereas the God of Jesus embraces not only the Jews but also the Gentiles, or those people born outside of the Jewish faith, the LORD makes a covenant or pact with one specific tribe of people, and then announces that they are his chosen ones above all others.
As recorded in the 14th verse of the 4th chapter of the Book of Exodus, when Moses argues with the LORD saying that he doesn’t have the eloquence needed for the job of convincing Pharaoh to set the Jews free, we read that the anger of the LORD was kindled against Moses. I mean relax… calm down!
But things get even stranger, for in verse 24 of the same chapter we read that: “It came to pass by the way in the inn, that the LORD met him (referring to Moses), and sought to kill him“. Now I don’t know about you Scott, but I always get a tad edgy when I read about Gods who try to kill people.
Scott: So Allan, are you saying that the God who spoke to Moses wasn’t divine?
Well here’s the rub Scott. The stories about the behaviour of the LORD of the Old Testament are not the sort of thing that I would expect from an eternal God or heavenly father, as has been described by Jesus in the New Testament. At least not by today’s standards of morality.
In the passage about Moses that I just described, we see the same reference to the LORD, again spelled in capital letters. While I am prepared to concede that Jehovah or Yahweh might well represent Deity, I am troubled by these questionable actions that are ascribed to the LORD.
Then again, the above passage says explicitly that the LORD met Moses on the road to the inn. Does that mean that the LORD was actually a flesh and blood person? And if so, does this relate to the passage I discussed earlier, where the “sons of God” said that they were flesh and blood like us?
All of these stories make me wonder whether a race of alien beings might have arrived on the earth in the distant past posing as divine beings, and then used their advanced intelligence and technological knowhow to impress and manipulate the local population into obeying their commands.
Anyway, to get back to the story of Moses, when he returns to Egypt and orders Pharaoh to let the Jews go, he refuses. As the LORD explains to Moses, this is because he (the LORD) has hardened Pharaoh’s heart. So he decides to bring about a series of plagues upon Egypt as punishment.
Now most people who read the Bible are left with the impression that the plagues that assailed Egypt at that time were a series of miracles ordered by the LORD, in order to change Pharaoh’s mind. Several millennia later, it was left to another Jew to explain what was really going on at the time.
In his book Worlds in Collision, written by the Jewish research scientist Immanuel Velikovsky, he explains that the plagues of Egypt were not miracles at all. They were actually the natural consequences of a close encounter between the earth and a large comet. I talk about all this in our Podcast # 11.
And then Scott, there is the mystery of the pillar of cloud by day, and the pillar of fire by night.
Scott: So what can you tell us about that?
When Moses led the children of Israel out of Egypt, the land was shrouded in darkness. As Velikovsky explains in his book, the reason why the earth was in darkness was because it was immersed in the gaseous tail of the comet which enveloped the earth in a veil of gloom.
Yet despite this hardship, it seems that the LORD was able to provide some timely help to Moses and his wandering band of Israelites. Verses 21 and 22 of Chapter 14 of the Book of Exodus explain this in the following way:
“And the LORD went before them by day in a pillar of a cloud, to lead them the way; and by night in a pillar of fire, to give them light to go by day and night. He took not away the pillar of the cloud by day, nor the pillar of fire by night, from before the people“.
So I ask you again Scott, what on earth do you think was going on here?
Now maybe I have too wild an imagination, but I have come across something that looks remarkably similar to what is described in this passage in photographs of the so-called cigar-shaped UFO’s that were common in the 1950’s.
They were able to disguise themselves in atmospheric clouds during the day, but at night they were illuminated by the glow of the energy fields of the craft. In fact almost all UFO’s glow brightly at night, and this is the reason why these sightings are referred to as LITS – Lights in the Sky.
There is an even more telling passage taken from the Book of Exodus in Chapter 33 verses 9 to 11.
“And it came to pass, as Moses entered into the tabernacle, the cloudy pillar descended and stood at the door of the tabernacle, and the Lord talked with Moses.
“And all the people saw the cloudy pillar stand at the tabernacle door: and all the people rose up and worshipped, every man in his tent door. And the LORD spake unto Moses face to face, as a man speaketh unto his friend”
So Scott, the above passage alone should make it obvious that the cloudy pillar was actually a vehicle of some sort, and that the LORD used it as a means of conveyance. And the kicker here is that all the Israelites saw the LORD speaking to Moses face to face, like a man speaking to a friend.
So here we have a passage that provides compelling evidence that the LORD of the events described in the Book of Exodus appeared as a physical being, or someone who had the power to look like one, and who travelled in a craft of some sort. But of course Scott, there is more.
Scott: Carry on my friend. This is certainly far out.
Well Scott, this LORD was not content to act merely as a guide to the wandering Israelites. He also assumed the role of teacher and technological Guru, as we can see from the detailed instructions that he gave to Moses on how to build an Ark.
Unless the Ark is recovered one day from wherever it was hidden in antiquity, we will probably never know exactly what it was or what it was used for. However, we do know from Biblical accounts that it could be used as a weapon, such as the time when it was used to bring down the walls of Jericho.
It is clear that it generated some type of force field, which was the reason why Moses was warned never to allow others to approach it too closely. Finally, when the great temple was built by Solomon in Jerusalem, a special room was set aside in the Holy of Holies in order to house the Ark.
Another aspect about the Ark that I find intriguing is the fact that two Arks are mentioned in the Bible. One was the Ark built by Noah and the other was the Ark built by Moses. The Ark that Noah built was used as a means of salvation, while the Ark of the Covenant was used as a means of destruction.
Which brings us to the pinnacle of the LORD’s agenda in his dealings with Moses and the children of Israel, and that was to act as their Teacher and Lawgiver.
Scott: Let me guess Allan. Are you referring here to the Ten Commandments?
Absolutely Scott. If there is one thing we can say about the LORD who spoke to Moses, it is that he liked giving orders. The second is that he was a micro-manager, for we have chapter after chapter devoted to the minutiae of how the Israelites were commanded to live every aspect of their lives.
And the laws that the LORD proclaimed to Moses did not only apply to the men and women, but to their sons and daughters, their man-servants and maid-servants, as well as any strangers who might happen to be living with them. These laws even applied to their cattle.
The LORD was at his best itemising every tiny detail about how the Israelites should conduct various ceremonies, sacraments and ritual sacrifices. And naturally, everything that the LORD told Moses was dutifully passed on to his followers. You can find them all set out in the first five books of the Bible.
Of course what we remember most about the encounters between the LORD and Moses are the Ten Commandments. After the children of Israel had been wandering in the desert for some months, they arrived at Mount Sinai. The Bible records how Moses climbed the mountain to commune with the LORD.
As we read in the Book of Exodus, Chapter 24, verse 12: “And the LORD said unto Moses, come up to me into the mount and be there, and I will give thee tables of stone and a law, and commandments which I have written, that thou mayest teach them“.
And we all know what happened next Scott. Moses was on the mountain for forty days and forty nights. Now we have to remember that he was already over eighty years old at the time, so it is no surprise that when he didn’t reappear for over a month, his followers gave him up for dead.
So naturally, they then did exactly what anyone could have predicted. Believing they would never see Moses or the LORD in the flesh again, they resorted to their old habits when they were in Egypt. They created a calf out of gold earrings to be the focus of their worship and prayers.
When Moses did finally return, carrying with him the tablets of stone on which were inscribed the Ten Commandments, he was outraged to find his followers engaged in revelry. He hurled the two stone tablets to the ground, where they were smashed into tiny pieces.
This could have been highly embarrassing for Moses, but fortunately the LORD came to his rescue with two more stone tablets to replace them. I would sure love to know Scott, just what might have been said between the LORD and whoever it was who had to carve these laws all over again.
Scott: I have to admit it must have been an interesting situation.
The laws that Moses received on the stone tablets were a series of basic rules that the Israelite were commanded to live by. There were ten of them. Based on what we have already learned about the LORD so far, it is no surprise to find that the first three rules related to the LORD God himself.
The LORD proclaimed on these stone tablets that he was a jealous God who would tolerate no competition from any other God or graven images, nor could anyone take his name in vain. Also not surprisingly, seven out of the ten commandments began with the words “Thou shalt not…”.
On the positive side, the Israelites were commanded to honour their parents and keep holy the Sabbath day. Now I am the first person to enjoy a day off now and then Scott, but the LORD of Moses insisted that the Israelites obey this commandment to an extreme degree.
The LORD set out a litany of things that the Israelites were expressly prohibited from doing on a Sabbath, using as his reason the fact that God took six days to create the heavens and the earth, and that on the seventh day he rested. And this commandment applied to everyone, even the cattle.
It is interesting to compare the commandments of the LORD of Moses with those of Jesus. Whereas most of the commandments consisted of things the Israelites were forbidden to do, Jesus simply demanded that people love God with all their heart, soul and mind, and love their neighbours as themselves.
Obviously Scott, this is not the place to compare Christianity and Judaism. However, there is one point on which both Christians and Jews do agree, and that is the commandment not to kill. Yet the fact is that no sooner had Moses descended from Mount Sinai, than he gave the order to kill.
As we read in the Book of Exodus, Chapter 32, verses 26 to 28:
“Then Moses stood in the gate of the camp and said, who is on the LORD’s side? Let him come to me. And all the sons of Levi gathered themselves together unto him.
“And he said unto them, thus saith the LORD God of Israel, put every man his sword by his side, and go in and out from gate to gate throughout the camp, and slay every man his brother, and every man his neighbor.
“And the children of Levi did according to the word of Moses: and there fell of the people that day about three thousand men.”
The Bible doesn’t say what the LORD’s reaction was to this massacre. Presumably he approved since he went on to prescribe a host of other laws which included: “And if any mischief follow, then thou shalt give life for life, eye for eye, tooth for tooth, hand for hand, foot for foot.” (Exodus Chapter 21: 23,24)
People today express their revulsion at what they consider to be the barbarism of modern Sharia law, where thieves have their hands chopped off and adulterers are stoned to death. But under the law of Moses, Jews were doing the very same thing two thousand years before.
Anyway Scott, my purpose here is not to denigrate the Jewish religion. I merely want to point out some of the mysterious anomalies associated with their early history, as well as some of the unusual behaviour displayed by the LORD in his dealings with Moses.
Of course, as far as their past is concerned, the Jews have had to endure more hardships than perhaps any other people. Although they have always been assured that that they are the chosen ones of the LORD, it might be more accurate to say that they have been the victims of the LORD.
Scott: Why do you say that Allan?
Well Scott, the LORD promised Moses that he would lead the Israelites to a land flowing with milk and honey. But let’s face it, the place he led them to has turned out to be the most fought over piece of real estate on the planet. And then there are the incredible hardships that the Jews have had to face.
Their people have been led into captivity, not just once but twice. Their great temple in Jerusalem, hailed as one of the great places of worship of their time, was utterly destroyed – firstly by Nebuchadnezzar the king of Babylon, and then again in the year 70 A.D. by the Romans.
Their people have been driven out of their own land to every corner of the world where they have had to endure abuse, hostility and oppression. Even Shakespeare used the moneylender Shylock in his play The Merchant of Venice as an example of corruption and personal avarice.
What prompted Hitler to target the Jews and wipe out six million of them in the holocaust? The Jews have their faults like any other people, but they never did anything to warrant such extreme slaughter. And now there is Iran. What did the Jews ever do to incur the wrath of the Ayatollahs?
No Scott, there is something sinister happening here, and it has been going on for thousands of years. I would like to think that now that the Jews have at last returned to their ancestral land, that they face a better future. Unfortunately, the prophets of old suggest that even worse lies in store for them.
Well Scott, I’m sorry to have taken up so much of our time talking about the past, but in our next conversation I will focus on what Biblical prophecy has to say about the future of Israel.
Scott: Well Allan, I think I can honestly say that this has been the most extraordinary Podcast we have ever done together. You have truly blown my mind. In fact I hardly know what to expect in our next discussion.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”. Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times.”
This selected entry was originally published here on September 30, 2014.
In a Poll conducted toward the end of last year by the Barna Group, a research firm that focuses on matters of religious faith, it was reported that 41% of Americans over the age of 18 believe that the world is currently living in the “End Times” period, as prophesied in the Bible.
Yet the Poll revealed an interesting dichotomy. While 77% of those people who consider themselves to be Evangelicals supported this view, an almost equal percentage of people who profess to be Catholics (73 %), felt that the “End Times” are not upon us at this time.
But while there may be conflicting opinions about whether or not we are now living in Apocalyptic times, both groups were in agreement on one point. And that is the question: “Why is there no mention of the United States of America in “End Time” prophecy?”
In fact, Pastors, Preachers and Ministers from across the United States confess that this is the question that is most commonly asked of them by their congregations. It is an enigma that appears to defy conventional explanation.
As noted in Charisma Magazine, when the New York Times best-selling author Joel C. Rosenberg tells his audiences that America is not mentioned in Bible prophecy, many ask in amazement how the wealthiest, most powerful nation in history can play no part in the events of the Last Days.
While numerous countries are specifically mentioned in Biblical texts concerning the events of the Last Days, such as Israel, Libya, Egypt, Ethiopia, Persia, modern Turkey and Iraq, as well as references to Russia and even China, there is nothing at all about America.
As Joel Rosenberg himself explains:
“The Bible doesn’t say what happens to us. But by the absence of us being clearly defined in the text, it means something has happened. The question is what—what will happen to us that will neutralize our ability or desire to be an influential player in the last days of history before the return of Jesus Christ?” (View source)
Billy Graham, doyen of American evangelists, has for many years warned that the world is living in the End Times, and that the Second Coming of Jesus is not far off. His son Franklin, has gone even further. He predicts that America is about to experience God’s wrath because of its wickedness.
“In the last four years, we have begun to turn our backs on God. We have taken God out of our education system. We have taken him out of government. You have lawyers that sue you every time you mention the name of Jesus Christ in any public forum.
“What has happened is we have allowed ourselves to take God out everything that we do – and I believe that God will judge our nation one day“. (View Source)
Exactly what form this judgement will take is something that Franklin Graham has not gone on record to say. But that has not stopped numerous other preachers around the country from weighing in with their own opinions.
For example, Greg Laurie, who is Pastor of the Harvest Christian Fellowship in Riverside, California, contends that there are three plausible reasons why America does not feature in End Times prophecy. The first is that the United States might be devastated by a nuclear war.
In support of this possibility, he cites the continuing threat posed by Russia, as well as other hostile nations that now possess, or may soon possess, nuclear weapons. He even foresees the possibility of a series of nuclear strikes carried out by terrorist organizations.
The second reason quoted by Laurie is that the country may simply decline as a world power. As he writes:
“As our country becomes more and more secular, systematically eliminating God and the Bible from our education system, courts, and the arts we will begin to reap the inevitable results of sin. We will begin to rot from the inside“.
Laurie suggests a third reason why the United States is not mentioned in Scripture, and that is because the country might experience a great religious revival, which could lead to a vast number of its citizens disappearing off the earth at the time of the end. As he writes:
“When the Rapture of the church takes place, don’t you think there would be an impact on the United States if 78 million people disappeared? If people in every level of government, the military, the economic sector, business, agriculture, medicine and communications suddenly disappeared from the face of the earth, it undoubtedly would have a crippling effect on our infrastructure as a nation.
“For all practical purposes, when the Rapture takes place, it will impact every nation. It will cause the entire world to suddenly shift. This could be the scenario for the United States in the last days“. (View Source)
Unfortunately, not everyone who studies Bible prophecy is as sanguine about the future of America as Laurie is. Others suggest dire scenarios ranging from economic and political chaos, caused by the collapse of its debt-based economy, to military defeat at the hands of the armies of the Anti-Christ.
What all of these Biblical preachers share in common is that they base their views solely upon the writings of Scripture, believing them to be the direct word of God, and the final authority on all matters relating to the Last Days before the return of the Christ.
Yet if they could only bring themselves to be a little more eclectic in their research, these good Christian ministers might well discover the true answer to the question of why the United States does not appear to play any part in the End Times prophesied in the Bible.
Within the span of the last hundred years or so, there have been two men who have demonstrated a profound insight into the future of the North American continent, as well as what will happen to it in the coming years. Perhaps fittingly, both of these men were born in America.
The first of these unusual men was Edgar Cayce. While there are many people who acknowledge Cayce today as an important mystic and healer, there are relatively few Americans who actually know much about who he was, what he did, or how he did it.
Edgar Cayce was born in Hopkinsville, Kentucky, in 1877, and died in 1945 at the age of 67 at his home in Virginia Beach, Virginia. Those who do recall his name tend to associate him with the best-seller written about him in 1967 by author Jess Stearn, who called him “The Sleeping Prophet“.
Yet the reality was that Cayce was neither “asleep”, nor was he a “prophet”. Instead, he was a man who discovered that he possessed an extraordinary gift that has so far never been matched by any other person. It all began when he developed an acute case of laryngitis.
His condition was so serious that it affected his ability to speak. Finally, after suffering from this condition for many months, he sought help from Al Layne, a local homeopathic physician. It was Layne who suggested that he place himself in a state of self-imposed hypnosis.
So, on 30th March, 1901, the young Cayce lay down on a couch and settled into a relaxed state. Then, to the amazement of his parents and a few others who were present in the room, he proceeded to describe exactly what was wrong with his throat, as well how to treat it.
Following his own advice, Cayce was soon completely cured of his disease. News of his remarkable recovery, which was publicized in the local press, soon attracted people from surrounding areas, all of whom were anxious to see if he could help them recover from their own illnesses.
In dealing with these cases, Cayce would always follow the same procedure.
He would lie down on a couch, place his arms across his chest, and relax. Then, just as his eyelids began to flicker, someone would ask him a question. All Cayce needed to know was the name of the person that the reading was for, and where that person was at the time of the reading.
It didn’t matter how near or far the person for whom the reading was conducted happened to be at the time. Cayce would then begin to intone an answer to the question. Although most of these questions related to health matters, over time they covered a host of other topics.
It should be noted that Cayce never actually “fell asleep” during any of his readings. To observers, he seemed to be in a trance-like state. And when he opened his eyes at the end of a reading, he remembered nothing. It was his secretary who recorded every word that had been spoken.
Nor did he ever charge for a reading. He merely invited those who wished to do so, to make donations. During his lifetime he gave over 14,000 readings, including such notable historical figures as President Woodrow Wilson, Thomas Edison, Nelson Rockefeller and George Gershwin.
Readers need to understand, as Cayce himself went to great lengths to emphasize, that he was not the author of the material contained in his readings. He said that much of the information that he gave came to him from the subconscious mind of the person for whom he was doing the reading.
He also attributed the source for most of the historical and esoteric content of his readings to the Akashic Records, which he claimed was a universal source of knowledge that was a repository of everything that had happened in the past, as well as everything that would happen in the future.
On many an occasion Cayce’s answers were in direct conflict with his own personal beliefs, such those dealing with astrology and reincarnation. But in each case he chose not to interfere, and left it up to the individual for whom the reading was given to decide on its value and validity.
For those who may be unfamiliar with the Cayce story, the following video provides a brief summary of some of the events that were predicted to occur in the coming years.
What has made Cayce an important interpreter of End Time prophecy was that, in the course of his readings, he was occasionally asked questions about the future of America, especially about events that were predicted in the Bible to occur during the days leading up to the return of the Christ.
One of his most famous readings about the future of America took place on August 13, 1931, when the question he was asked was: What is the shape of the world to come? Part of his reply is quoted below:
“In the next few years lands will appear in the Atlantic as well as the Pacific. And what is the coast line now of many a land will be the bed of the ocean. Even many of the battle fields of the present will be ocean, will be seas, the bays, the lands over which the new order will carry on their trade as one with another.
“Portions of the now east coast of New York, or New York City itself, will in the main disappear. This will be another generation, though, here, while the southern portions of Carolina, Georgia – these will disappear. This will be much sooner.
“The waters of the lakes will empty into the Gulf, rather than the waterway over which such discussions have been recently made. It would be well if the waterway were prepared, but not for that purpose for which it is at present being considered.
“Then the area where the entity is now located (Virginia Beach) will be among the safety lands, as will the portions of what is now Ohio, Indiana and Illinois, and much of the southern portion of Canada and the eastern portion of Canada; while the western land – much of that is to be disturbed – in this land – as, of course, much in other lands.” (Reading 1152-11)
It is clear from this reply that the continent of North America would undergo dramatic geological changes at the time of the end. This message was reinforced in subsequent readings when his source said that the earth itself would be convulsed as a result of a change in its axis.
And this is where the second American possessing unusual talents enters the scene. His name is Gordon-Michael Scallion. And just as in the case of Edgar Cayce, Scallion’s unusual ability manifested itself unexpectedly in his life as a result of a health crisis affecting his throat.
In 1979, as explained in previous Blog posts under the heading Future Flooding, Gordon-Michael Scallion, or GMS as he prefers to be called, was is the middle of delivering a public lecture when he suddenly lost his voice completely “in a split second”.
He was taken to hospital where doctors conducted a series of comprehensive tests on his vocal chords, larynx and throat. However, since they were unable to find anything wrong, they dismissed his symptoms as psychosomatic. Yet stranger things were to follow.
Within a few hours of leaving the hospital, GMS found that his physical vision had changed. He now began to see colours and lights around animals, plants, trees and people. He had no idea what these colours meant and he thought that his vision was to blame.
It was only later that he realised that what he was seeing were the “auras” of people, plants and animals. And like Cayce before him, he discovered that he had the ability to look into people and see what was wrong with their physical, mental or spiritual bodies.
Then in 1991, he found that he was able to sense what was wrong with the earth itself. He began to experience nightmares in which it appeared as if the earth was a sentient being, just like a human, and that it was in great pain.
He also began to get visions of changes that would take place to the existing continents of the earth in future times and, in particular, changes that would take place on the North American continent. As he later wrote:
“Since 1979 I have had ongoing visions concerning the Earth, sometimes as many as ten or more in a day, lasting from a few seconds to minutes. In 1982, I began to sketch a map based on the visions, and I updated it through the years as new information was presented to me.
“This map is the culmination of a major ongoing effort to consolidate all the Earth change information I have received. As a result, the “Future Map of the World” is the most comprehensive and up to date representation of Earth Change visions and information presented to me over the past seventeen years.”
Scallion’s future map of North America is of particular interest, because the information he received in his visions so closely match that of Edgar Cayce in his readings half a century before. According to this map, large parts of the East Coast will be swamped by the ocean, along with major parts of West Coast. In addition, the Great Lakes will drain into the Gulf of Mexico, just as Cayce predicted in his reading 1152-11 quoted above.
But Scallion has not only compiled a map of what his visions suggest will be the future outline of the United States, he has also gone on record to indicate how these changes will occur on the Pacific Coast, as shown in the video below:
Scallion indicates that the reason for the above earth changes is a change in the alignment of the tectonic plates, such as might be caused by the interaction between the earth and a large comet. And this is where his visions match the descriptions given by St. John in his Book of Revelation.
As I explained in my article entitled What is “Wormwood” in the Book of Revelation?”, the different plagues associated with the seven angels with their seven trumpets described by St. John, are actually the predictable effects of a close encounter with a comet.
Now Scallion was not the first person to link disasters in North America with an encounter between the earth and a comet. As far back as the 12th century AD, a Christian mystic known as St. Hildegard of Bingen in Germany, was advocating just such a scenario during the End Times.
Just as Scallion’s predictions have been based on visionary experiences, so St. Hildegard, who came to be known as the Sibyl of the Rhine, had a series of visions about future events. And in 1141 AD, she had a vision in which she was instructed to “write down that which you see and hear“.
She subsequently published her first theological text under the title of “Scivias” (“Know the Ways of the Lord”). In this work, which dealt with things that would occur during the days leading up to the return of the Christ, she referred to the coming of a comet and its impact on “the great nation”.
“Before the Comet comes, many nations, the good excepted, will be scoured with want and famine. The great nation in the ocean that is inhabited by people of different tribes and descent by an earthquake, storm and tidal waves will be devastated. It will be divided, and in great part submerged.”
As she went on to record:
“The Comet by its tremendous pressure, will force much out of the ocean and flood many countries, causing much want and many plagues. [After the] great Comet, the great nation will be devastated by earthquakes, storms, and great waves of water, causing much want and plagues.
“The ocean will also flood many other countries, so that all coastal cities will live in fear, with many destroyed. All sea coast cities will be fearful and many of them will be destroyed by tidal waves, and most living creatures will be killed and even those who escape will die from a horrible disease. (View Source)
So here we have evidence, written almost eight centuries before the readings of Edgar Cayce, of a “great nation” that will be “divided” (split into two parts), and devastated by “earthquakes, storms, and great waves of water”, and “in great part submerged”.
It takes little insight to recognise that the “great nation” that St. Hildegard was referring to here was the United States of America, especially since her predictions match almost exactly what Cayce said in his reading 1152-11 quoted above, and what Scallion has illustrated in the above video.
There seems little doubt, therefore, that the reason why America is not mentioned in Biblical prophecy about the events of the “Last Days”, is because the entire country has been devastated by a series of natural disasters, robbing it of its former influence and power.
And for those who scoff at the idea of America splitting into two parts, it is worth remembering that three of the greatest earthquakes to have hit the continental United States, occurred in 1811 and 1812 in the Mississippi valley region of the New Madrid seismic zone.
The New Madrid fault line is a series of faults that run for 150 miles (240 Kms) beneath the continental crust of the North America plate. Earthquakes that occur in this zone threaten parts of Illinois, Indiana, Missouri, Arkansas, Kentucky, Tennessee and Mississippi.
In the case of the earthquakes of 1811 and 1812, windows shook as far afield as Washington, D.C., waking the President, while church bells rang in Richmond, Virginia. Those closer to the epicentre, such as Ohio, fled their homes in terror, as the ground continued shaking for more than ten minutes.
The entire town of Little Prairie was destroyed by liquefaction, as seismic waves caused the water-saturated soil to turn into liquid that was incapable of supporting those structures built upon it.
And when will all this happen? It will begin on the “Great and Terrible Day of the Lord”, when a giant asteroid, almost a mile wide, will slam into the Atlantic Ocean not far from the island of Puerto Rico, setting off a series of towering Tsunamis that will devastate all the coastlines of the world.
When that time comes, the judgement of God that evangelists like Billy Graham have long warned about, will strike America with a series of hammer-blows that will leave it a mere shadow of its former glory and might, and no longer able to influence the affairs of the world.
This selected entry was originally published here on July 12, 2014.
In a news article published by the New York Times on October 28, 1921, the famed American automobile magnate Henry Ford made the memorable comment, which has since been repeated innumerable times, when he said: History is bunk!
Now Henry Ford’s remark was directed more toward his attitude that events that happen in the present are more important than things that have happened in the past. But there was more wisdom in his words than he might have imagined at the time.
In an essay devoted to this point, noted columnist Patrick Lockerby wrote:
“In archaeology and library research you can make a claim based on the easy pickings that lie on the surface or you can break into a sweat as you dig deeper. But it is not enough to dig deep. You must sift every spadeful, and sift it fine. Truth is most often found in the tiniest of grains: it is easy to miss if you don’t focus intently.” (View Source)
His point goes to the very heart of the historical dilemma. The history of the past is invariably written, and rewritten, by the historians of the present. And it is often their misinformed education of the present which leads to their deformed view of the past.
And it is in this sense that much of what has been written about the past is often “pure bunk”. An example of this was provided in the previous instalment in the history of Easter Island, which reads like the script from a soap opera, replete with jealousy, vengeance, war, disease, starvation and ultimately cannibalism and death.
And all this simply because those historians who concocted the history of Easter Island prior to the arrival of Westerners, neglected to attend to the vital point mentioned by Lockerby, when he said: Truth is most often found in the tiniest of grains.
In the case of Easter Island, archaeologists, historians, geographers and a host of other scientists all missed the crucial clue, which was that the soil that covers the entire island actually arrived after the statues had been built, and not before.
But there is an even better example of a conundrum posed by a mysterious set of ancient ruins, which has also been mangled by archaeologists and historians, who have once again allowed the “easy pickings that lie on the surface” to blind them to the truth that lay beneath.
These ruins can be found today in the South American country of Bolivia, on the flanks of the Andes mountains, and are located just 45 miles (72 kms) from the modern city of La Paz. These ruins lie within the boundaries of the municipality of Tiwanaku (Tiahuanaco).
The ruins of Tiwanaku may be small in size, yet they provide a stunning display of ancient megalithic architecture, engineering and geometry that clearly supersedes anything else of its era. In fact, in designating this a World Heritage site in the year 2000, UNESCO noted:
“The city of Tiwanaku, capital of a powerful pre-Hispanic empire that dominated a large area of the southern Andes and beyond, reached its apogee between 500 and 900 AD. Its monumental remains testify to the cultural and political significance of this civilisation, which is distinct from any of the other pre-Hispanic empires of the Americas.” (View Source)
The ruins themselves can roughly be divided into four separate areas. The first is what is known as the pyramid of Akapana. Then there is the area of the semi-underground temple. This is located in front of the area of the ceremonial courtyard of Kalasasaya. Finally there is the area known as Puma Punku.
The Akapana pyramid is perhaps something of a misnomer, as it is a blend between the step pyramids of Mexico and the pyramids of Egypt. Shaped more in the form of a rectangular cross, it consists of seven different levels, each with its own stone retaining wall, and rises to a height of about 55 feet (18 metres).
However, only the lowest level and part of the second have been excavated from the earth that covers it. Investigations suggest that the entire pyramid was once clad in blocks of red sandstone. The whole structure is surrounded by well-preserved drainage canals.
The area of the small semi-subterranean temple is accessed by a series of descending steps. The temple itself is made up of 48 pillars made of red sandstone. Its most notable feature are the many styles of carved stone heads that are set into the surrounding walls.
In the centre of the underground temple stands a carved stone monolith known as “El Fraile” (The Friar). This statue was carved out of red andesite, a type of very hard granite that is common to the region.
Situated to the side of the Akapana pyramid is a large courtyard and ceremonial platform known as the Kalasasaya. The courtyard is over three hundred feet long. It is entered through a flight of seven steps cut into the centre of the eastern wall, leading to an imposing gateway made out of enormous blocks of stone.
The imposing Gateway of the Sun
The interior of the courtyard contains two carved monoliths, one of which weighs over twenty tons, as well as the most famous artifact of the entire site, which is the monumental “Gateway of the Sun”, incorporating the image of the “weeping god”.
This gateway has been carved from a single block of andesite, and has been cut to form a large doorway with niches on either side. Above the doorway is an elaborate bas-relief of the central deity, believed by the local Indians to have been their Creator-God Viracocha.
The deity is flanked on either side by thirty intricately carved glyphs, known as Chasquis, as well as a row of eleven other icons that are carved along the bottom of the panel. Another feature of the Kalasasaya temple is the “calendar wall”, consisting of ten large stone pillars set in a modern wall.
An important point that visitors to Tiwanaku should bear in mind, is that the entire area was reconstructed by archaeologists in the 20th century. So most of what can be seen in the Kalasasaya courtyard today bears little resemblance to what was originally found, but rather reflects what these archaeologists thought would make the most impressive memorial.
The cyclopean ruins of Puma Punku
Finally, there is the site located about a mile away from the main temple complex known as Puma Punku (Door of the Puma). This consists of little more than a series of scattered blocks of stone, except for the fact that some of these stones weigh anywhere from 100 to 150 tons!
Confronted with megalithic ruins of such complexity and size, modern historians were challenged to come up with a history that would explain them, especially since they were so dramatically different from anything else found on the South American continent.
The history they devised is the history that is taught to every schoolchild in Bolivia today, and is a source of immense national pride. The following is an extract from a local travel guide which gives a popular rendering of the story that historians came up with.
“This civilization arose in the 6th century BC, and local Indian legends described the city as the capital of the bearded white god Wiracocha.
“Tiahuanaco endured a thousand years more than Rome, and almost 2000 years more than the Inca civilization that built Machu Picchu. Moreover, the inhabitants had developed a system of agriculture that turned barren Altiplano land into the breadbasket of their society.
“The city of Tiahuanaco, capital of a powerful pre-Hispanic empire that dominated a large area of the southern Andes and beyond, reached its apogee between 500 and 900 AD. Its monumental remains testify to the cultural and political significance of this civilization, which is distinct from any of the other pre-Hispanic empires of the Americas.
“The classic, or fourth period (300-700 AD), is perhaps the most dramatic, with its huge stone structures that watch over the site today.
“During its peak, the capital of Tiwanaku boasted a huge stone-faced pyramid, cut stone enclosures, elite residences, exquisitely decorated buildings, a system of subterranean canals, and at least four square kilometers of residential buildings.
“The Tiwanaku imperial economy was based on the intensive utilization of raised fields, camelid pastoralism, terrace agriculture, an extensive exchange and colonial system, and the organization of large numbers of laborers for state projects. There was a rigid social and political hierarchy expressed in elaborate art and architectural styles.
“The ruins of Tiahuanaco bear striking witness to the power of the empire that played a leading role in the development of the Andean pre-Hispanic civilization.
“The buildings of Tiahuanaco are exceptional examples of the ceremonial and public architecture and are of one of the most important manifestations of the civilizations of the Andean region.
“Clearly, the ruins of Tiahuanaco show a great ceremonial center, and a city that numbered, at its height, more than 20,000 inhabitants. Researchers have divided this civilization into five distinct periods.
“The civilization seems to have totally vanished by 1200AD.” (View Source)
The history outlined above tells an inspiring tale of humble beginnings that lead on to greatness – of imposing architecture, sophisticated engineering and advanced agriculture that speak of the glories of a now vanished era. The unfortunate truth is that all of this is “pure bunk”.
The idea that a powerful Bolivian pre-Hispanic empire once dominated the region for thousands of years is complete fiction. There was no great capital city housing 20,000 citizens, no elite residences, no decorated buildings, and certainly no agriculture that turned the barren Altiplano (high plateau) into a giant breadbasket.
The droll part about this so-called “history”, was that archaeologists and historians had to frame their history of Tiwanaku to conform with the current scientific paradigm, which holds that the earliest civilization on the planet began 5,000 years ago with the Sumerian and Egyptian cultures.
So operating within this paradigm, historians came up with a scenario beginning in the 6th century BC, and ending with the mysterious disappearance of the entire Tiwanaku culture in the 12th century AD, thus conveniently disposing of it before the arrival of the Incas of Peru, early in the 13th century AD.
Yet if these scientists had been prepared to undertake an honest enquiry into the evidence, they would have found some interesting facts which point to the likelihood that, many thousands of years ago, Tiwanaku was originally located at sea level, at that it was at one time a flourishing seaport.
The first fact is that the ruins of Tiwanaku are at an altitude of over 12,000 feet (3,650 metres) above sea level. This is an altitude where most plants will not grow, and corn in particular will not ripen. Its average annual temperature is 45 degrees Fahrenheit (7.7 degrees C), with an average annual rainfall of 24 inches (630 mm).
Based on this evidence alone, it is clear that the present location of Tiwanaku could not possibly have supported an advanced civilization involving tens of thousands of people, especially since some of the agricultural terraces that surround the existing ruins reach as high as 18,000 feet.
The second interesting fact concerns Lake Titicaca, located just a few miles to the west of Tiwanaku. Although it is considered to be the world’s highest fresh water lake, in earlier times it was an inland salt water sea, before being suddenly thrust up to its present height of 12,500 feet (3,800 metres) above sea level.
This is borne out by the fact that the shoreline of the lake is littered with millions of fossilized seashells. It also still retains a slightly saline content, which accounts for the fact that ocean dwelling fish, as well as creatures such as seahorses, continue to be caught in the lake to this day.
Lake Titicaca drains to the south along the Altiplano plateau, spreading out over the Desaguadero Basin and on toward Lake Poopó. If the lake actually had been filled with sea water in earlier times, we should expect to find evidence of evaporated salt deposits in the region, and that is exactly what we do find.
The great salt lake of Salar de Uyuni
One of the most spectacular features in all of Bolivia is the Salar de Uyuni. It is the world’s largest dried up salt bed. It covers an area of over 4,000 square miles (10,500 square kms), which is one third of the size of Belgium, or twenty-five times larger than the famous Bonneville salt flats in Utah.
The crust that is found on the surface of Salar de Uyuni has a thickness of about 33 feet (10 metres), and is made up of eleven separate layers. It is estimated that the dry lake itself contains about ten billion tons of salt, as well as being the world’s richest source of lithium.
The existence of all this salt lends credibility to the theory that Tiwanaku was once a seawater port. And nowhere is there better evidence of this than in the megalithic blocks of stone that can be found at PumaPunku, situated a short distance away from the main ceremonial centre of the city.
Exquisite designs carved into the polished granite
Whereas the main ruins of Tiwanaku are clearly linked with the ceremonial, religious and social focus of this ancient culture, the gigantic blocks of stone that lie strewn all over the plateau at Puma Punku are distinctly different. They seem to possess a unique character of their own.
These megalithic stones are bluish-gray in colour, and generate a metallic tone when struck. They also appear to be the product of an advanced system of technology, as individual blocks have exquisitely cut edges and indentations in a variety of patterns and designs.
Recessed double-crucifix design
One of the most common of these indentations is the symbol of the cross, a double-crucifix design deeply recessed into the granite with pure, clean lines, which could only have been produced with the aid of highly sophisticated stone-cutting tools. Other motifs include arrows, circles and niches unlike anything seen at Tiwanaku.
Easily the most striking feature of the entire site are the gargantuan precision-made H-blocks made of andesite that once formed the walls. Each of these stones is so intricately carved that it has about 80 different surfaces, yet each of these surfaces seems to have been polished into a perfectly smooth finish.
Examples of the indentations carved in stone for the metal clamps that held these stones together
In assembling the walls of Puma Punku, each stone was finely cut to interlock with adjacent stones, and was designed to form load-bearing joints that fitted together without the use of mortar. These joints are so precise that not even a razor blade can fit between the stones.
Another feature of the stonework at Puma Punku was the use of metal clamps or ties. For example, the side walls of the water channels were built with upright stone slabs held together with I-shaped metal clamps which were recessed into the stone.
When analysed in the laboratory, these clamps were found to be made of an unusual alloy, comprising copper, arsenic, nickel, silicon and iron. It is also worth mentioning here that this same system of using metal clamps was found at the Ahu Vinapu megalithic wall on Easter Island.
The entire site of Puma Punku speaks of an ancient civilisation suddenly afflicted by appalling tragedy, as catastrophic forces of nature devastated the region, destroying all but the few remnants that can be seen strewn around the site today.
Who can solve the riddle of my past?
The story of who these people were, how they built their cyclopean structures, and how they met their end, would appear to be lost forever in shrouded legends of antiquity. Yet there is one relic which could be the key to unravelling the mystery of the past. It is the magnificent Gateway of the Sun itself.
Dedicated to the “weeping God” Viracocha, whose tears can still be seen immortalised in stone, the Sun Gate stands in mute splendour as it gazes over the stark plateau of the Altiplano, inviting all who pass that way to solve the riddle of its past.
This selected entry was originally published here on May 18, 2014.
Scott: My name is Scott Paton. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”. This is a book dealing with prophecy.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this Podcast is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. Hello Allan and welcome to the Podcast.
Hello Scott. It’s good to be with you again.
Scott: In our last discussion you referred to the American philosopher George Santayana, who wrote that those who cannot remember the past are condemned to repeat it.
That’s correct Scott. I also went on to say that our world has suffered from numerous global catastrophes in the past, and that these disasters have wiped out entire civilizations that have now vanished from the historical record.
But the reason why we no longer remember these earlier disasters is not because we lack the evidence, but because modern historians have deliberately chosen to ignore them.
Scott: But why would historians do such a thing?
That’s an excellent question Scott. On the face of it this would seem to make no sense at all. But that is why the work of Thomas Kuhn is so important, and why I have devoted so much time to his research in recent discussions.
As Kuhn pointed out in his book The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, all science is practised in a paradigm. And he was not just referring here to natural sciences like astronomy, cosmology, physics and chemistry, but also to things like geology, biology, history and archeology.
What he meant by this is that every scientific discipline is based on a certain set of beliefs that are considered to be established facts. And because these beliefs are considered to be proven beyond doubt, they are no longer questioned.
But the problem that Kuhn identified, and which formed the major part of his book, was that within the history of science over the last 400 years, there have been numerous examples where these “proven” beliefs have later been found to be wrong.
It is these mistakes of the past which have led to complete revisions of past data, in ways that have led to enormous upheavals that Kuhn called scientific revolutions. And that is what we are seeing in the world of science today.
Scott: Why do you say that Allan?
Well Scott, as I have indicated in my last two Blog posts, the Theory of Evolution set out by Charles Darwin in his book The Origin of Species has been hailed for over a century as one of the most complete scientific theories ever conceived, and is today regarded by science as a proven fact of nature.
Unfortunately, it also happens to suffer from one small defect.
The problem is that over the course of the 155 years that have passed since his book was first published, no evidence has been found to support Darwin’s central thesis, which is that all species have evolved from a single progenitor.
In spite of an exhaustive search of the fossil record, there is no evidence to show that one species has changed into a completely new species, as a result of an infinite series of tiny changes that have been passed on from one generation to another….Nada…. None!
Scott: So are you saying that Darwin’s Theory of Evolution is wrong?
Absolutely. As I pointed out in an earlier Blog post, the basic principles of Darwin’s theory have now been found to be unfounded.
Now I am not saying that the idea of evolution itself is wrong. The fossil record makes it clear that different species have lived on the earth in forms of ever increasing complexity, over periods of time that span many hundreds of millions of years.
There is also no question that every species undergoes a struggle for survival, and that it is the strong who are best equipped to survive. It is also obvious that every species has a remarkable capacity to adapt to changes in its environment.
Furthermore, as Darwin correctly pointed out, every species can adapt to these changes in environment by changing their physical characteristics. And these changes can be passed on from one generation to another.
In fact, every aspect of Darwin’s acclaimed theory of evolution is correct – except for the most important one, and that is this.
One species does not change over time into another species. As the evidence now conclusively proves, no species ever has. And from this we may safely deduce that no species ever will.
Scott: So Allan, why do you think that Darwin’s Theory of Evolution still continues to be taught?
Well Scott, it continues to be taught for the reason that Thomas Kuhn pointed out in his book. It has become an entrenched part of our current scientific paradigm, and to question this now would be to challenge the validity of the paradigm itself.
To do so would be heresy, as well as being professional suicide. No biologist would have a hope of attaining recognition or status within the official ranks of science today, if he or she publicly challenged Darwin’s theory.
And so it is with so many of the other “facts” of science. Those who try to challenge established ideas are denied space to publish their work in official journals, or to defend themselves when their characters are impugned, and the results of their research are rejected.
Or like Velikovsky, who chose to publish his unconventional ideas in books which subsequently became international best sellers, they are personally ostracised and excommunicated from their particular discipline of science.
So Darwin’s Theory of Evolution continues to be taught today for the simple reason that science doesn’t have a better theory to replace it. And because the prospect of going back to the Biblical idea of Creationism, or its later cousin called Intelligent Design, fills them with horror and dismay.
But to get back to your original question Scott, of why historians would deliberately choose to ignore evidence of past cataclysms, I need to point out something else that is closely linked to Darwin and his Theory of Evolution.
Scott: Please carry on Allan. I find this fascinating.
When Darwin was 22 years old, he set sail on HMS Beagle on a journey that was to last five years and take him all around the world. It was while he was on board the ship that the Captain gave him a copy of a book which has just been published.
The name of the book was Principles of Geology, and it was written by one of the most influential scientists of his day, and a man whose work still forms the basis of modern geology. His name was Charles Lyell.
Lyell was an interesting man. Born in Scotland into a family of means, he was educated at Oxford University, where he graduated with an M.A. degree in 1821. After graduating, he decided to take up Law, and for a while practised as an attorney.
A few years later, however, Lyell began to suffer from failing eyesight. He therefore decided to abandon his legal career, and turn instead to geology, which had been a long-time hobby of his, and make this his new full-time profession.
One might suppose that a man with failing eyesight would have been better served by pursuing matters of law, rather than the demands of fieldwork in an exacting profession. But in Lyell’s case, it was a decision that would lead to personal fame and subsequent knighthood.
What made such a profound impact on the young Darwin, and played a leading part in the development of his theory of Natural Selection, was the fact that Charles Lyell was a staunch believer in the concept of Uniformitarianism.
Scott: What exactly was Uniformitarianism?
Well Scott, it was the idea that the earth was shaped in the past by the same forces that we see at work today. In fact the subtitle of Principles of Geology was: “An attempt to explain the former changes of the Earth’s surface by reference to causes now in operation“.
While he was a student at Oxford, Lyell had attended lectures given by William Buckland, who believed equally firmly that the earth had been afflicted by numerous catastrophes in the past.
However, Lyell became disenchanted with Buckland’s ideas, especially when he tried to link the concept of catastrophism with the Bible, by using the story of Noah’s flood as an example.
For Lyell, the present was the key to the understanding of the past, and there was no need to introduce references to God, the Bible, or any other supernatural source, in order to explain the changes that had taken place on the earth in the past.
In due course Lyell’s version of geology came to be known as Uniformitarianism, because of his fierce insistence that the processes that alter the earth’s surface act in a uniform manner, and that they take place imperceptibly slowly.
His work influenced Darwin deeply, so that when he later came to write his Origin of Species, he described the process of Natural Selection as a kind of biological uniformitarianism, where evolution took place in front of our eyes, but at a pace that was much too slow for us to recognise.
There was, however, one supreme irony in all of this. In spite of the simplicity and elegance of Lyell’s theory of uniformity, he was faced with the same embarrassing problem that later confronted Charles Darwin.
Scott: What was that?
The short answer is that Lyell’s theory wasn’t supported by the evidence. This embarrassing fact was so obvious that Lyell pointed it out himself in his book. In the 12th edition of Principles of Geology he wrote:
“It has been truly observed that when we arrange the known fossiliferous formations in chronological order, they constitute a broken and defective series.”
Then after listing even more anomalies that were apparent in the stratification record, and which also were in conflict with his theory, Lyell went on to conclude:
“These violations of continuity are so common as to constitute in most regions the rule rather than the exception, and they have been considered by many geologists as conclusive in favour of sudden revolutions in the inanimate and animate world.”
When Charles Darwin arrived in South America and began to examine the fossiliferous formations in that part of the world, he found even more dramatic evidence of earth’s catastrophic past. As he published in his Journal of Researches:
“It is impossible to reflect on the changed state of the American continent without the deepest astonishment. Formerly, it must have swarmed with great monsters: now we find mere pigmies, compared with the antecedent, allied races.”
“Certainly, no fact in the long history of the world is so startling as the wide and repeated exterminations of its inhabitants.”
“What, then, has exterminated so many species and whole genera? The mind at first is irresistibly hurried into the belief of some great catastrophe; but thus to destroy animals, both large and small, in Southern Patagonia, in Brazil, on the Cordillera of Peru, in North America up to Behring’s Straits, we must shake the entire framework of the globe.”
Scott: So how did Charles Lyell deal with this problem?
Well Scott, you’re not going to believe this. Since he couldn’t deny the evidence that lay all around him, and which contradicted his theory of slow, imperceptible change, Lyell chose to fall back on a proven strategy that had served him well as a practising attorney.
That strategy can best be summarised as follows. When the facts support your argument, then emphasize the facts. But when they don’t, then ignore the facts completely, and question instead the integrity of all those who believe them.
Clearly, Lyell was not the sort of person to allow embarrassing facts to stand in the way of his personal theory. So instead of amending his theory to match the facts, as one would expect from an ethical scientist, he chose instead to ignore everything that contradicted his theory.
In fact he went even further. He blithely dismissed his critics as ignorant men who didn’t know what they were talking about, and, furthermore, were unaware of their own ignorance. As he wrote in Principles:
“It appeared clear that the earlier geologists had not only a scant acquaintance with existing changes (caused by wind, flowing water, etc.), but they were singularly unconscious of the amount of their ignorance.”
Scott: I’m absolutely amazed, Allan. I can’t believe he could get away with it.
Exactly Scott. One can’t imagine anyone getting away with such a thing today. But get away with it he did. In fact, in certain cases he even resorted to parody as a way of shrugging off facts that contradicted his theory.
Perhaps the best example of this was the matter of the wandering hippopotamus.
Scott: What was that all about?
Well Scott, it seems that in a cave at Settle in west Yorkshire, England, located some 1450 feet above sea level, were found the remains of a variety of animals that included mammoth, rhinoceros, bison, hyena and hippopotamus.
During excavations, it became clear that the floor of the cavern was covered in sand containing foreign pebbles, which indicated that it had been submerged beneath the sea at an earlier time.
The question that perplexed people at the time was how the bones ended up together in a single cavern, especially when none of the animals found in the cave had ever lived in the British Isles.
To most geologists of that time, this seemed like clear evidence that the earth had undergone some great catastrophe in the past. Not so Charles Lyell. He dismissed such an idea, and offered up in its place the following explanation in his book Antiquity of Man:
“The geologist … may freely speculate on the time when herds of hippopotami issued from North African rivers, such as the Nile, and swam northward in summer along the coasts of the Mediterranean, or even occasionally visited islands near the shore. Here and there they may have landed to graze or browse, tarrying awhile, and afterwards continuing their course northward.
“Others may have swum in a few summer days from rivers in the south of Spain or France to the Somme, Thames, or Severn (rivers in Wales and England), making timely retreat to the south before the snow and ice set in.”
This bizarre scenario may have fobbed off other lily-livered geologists of that time, but when Immanuel Velikovsky came across this passage in the course of his researches, he could not resist this sardonic response which he included in his book Earth in Upheaval:
“Hippopotami not only travelled during the summer nights to England and Wales, but also climbed hills to die peacefully among other animals in caves, and the ice, approaching softly, tenderly spread little pebbles over the travellers resting in peace, and the land with its hills and caverns in a slow lullaby movement sank below the level of the sea and gentle streams caressed the dead bodies and covered them with rosy sand.”
Scott: Well Allan, I’ve got to hand it to you. That really is quite a hoot.
Well Scott, it would be if it weren’t such a sad reflection on the true state of affairs in science today.
Unfortunately, the moral of this story is that for almost two centuries geologists have allowed themselves to be hoodwinked by the theory of Uniformitarianism, and have ignored the facts that blatantly contradict this theory.
And instead of being the recipient of all the high honours that were conferred upon him, including a knighthood, Charles Lyell should have been run out of town by the nearest sheriff for being the scoundrel that he was.
In fact it gets worse. The idea that changes in the surface of the earth have primarily been the result of forces of nature that operate slowly and imperceptibly, has now also been incorporated into the paradigms of History and Archeology.
So references to cataclysmic events that can still be found in historical records are ignored by scholars today. And structural ruins that bear testimony to catastrophic changes in the past, continue to be ignored by archeologists.
They are ignored because the idea of catastrophic change within the recent history of the earth has now been officially expunged from the current paradigm of science. Those few brave souls who still continue to challenge that view are condemned to being mere voices crying in the wilderness.
So Scott, there you have the answer to your question. Historians ignore the evidence of catastrophic events that have occurred in recent times in the history of the earth, because to do otherwise would offend the theory of Uniformitarianism, which has now become part of the official dogma of science.
Scott: So are you saying there are written records of past disasters that are deliberately being ignored by historians?
Yes Scott there are. Probably no one was better equipped to interpret these ancient records than Immanuel Velikovsky. His brilliant intellect and talent for languages allowed him to delve into records that were written in English, Latin, Greek, Hebrew, German, French, Italian and Spanish.
After spending ten years conducting research at major libraries around the world, Velikovsky went on to write numerous books detailing the evidence that he found.
His most famous work Worlds in Collision was devoted to an analysis of literary sources taken from ancient cultures in all parts of the world. And his book Earth in Upheaval focused on the geological evidence that he found.
In his books Velikovsky produced evidence taken from ancients documents emanating from pre-Columbian America, as well as from China, India, Persia, Babylon, Iceland, Finland, Greece and Rome.
Some of these literary sources are included in my Blog post here
Despite the fact that all of the excerpts taken from these ancient documents were carefully referenced and annotated, historians are content today to dismiss them as mythical stories, rather than as accounts of real events that actually happened.
In my next instalment Scott, I want to draw attention to the way modern archeologists have also chosen to ignore ruins of ancient civilizations that can still be found all over the world, simply because they too do not fit in with the dogma of Uniformitarianism.
Scott: Thanks Allan. This has been another fascinating discussion on the way the history of science has unfolded over the last few centuries.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book “The Last Days of Tolemac”. Do join us for our next Podcast in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.
Another example of the way in which our minds influence matter can be found in the ancient art of dowsing.
Dowsing is a term which has come to be used to describe a phenomenon that has been demonstrated by numerous people throughout history. It is commonly associated with the search for underground supplies of water, although it is by no means limited to such objectives. Dowsing is usually linked with the use of a divining aid, such as a rod or pendulum, although many dowsers find that they are able to dispense with an aid altogether.
In the search for underground water, a dowser usually holds a Y-shaped stick and proceeds to walk over a selected area of ground in a methodical fashion. When the dowser arrives at a point directly above a subterranean source of water, the stick suddenly jolts from its horizontal position. Those who have experienced this sudden twitch vary in their description of the nature and origin of this force. Almost none of them can agree on an explanation of this phenomenon.
Despite traditional skepticism in scientific circles as to the legitimacy of dowsing, the indisputable fact is that it works. People who simply go ahead and try it often find to their surprise that they are able to achieve practical results. Dowsing is not limited to the search for underground objects, for it has also been used to investigate everything from suspicious deaths to the diagnosis of disease.
The ideas of men like Abrams and Hieronymus with regard to natural “radiations”, find a sympathetic refrain in the work of Thomas Lethbridge.
Lethbridge was a trained archeologist at Cambridge University who undertook a series of experiments in the 1950s involving the use of a pendulum. His experiments were based on the supposition that every object in nature exhibited a specific “radiation” which could be intercepted by means of a suitable pendulum.
The pendulum that Lethbridge used consisted of a piece of string attached to a rod with a small weight at the end of it. Lethbridge found, by a lengthy system of trial and error, that any object could be identified by its own special rate of vibration. This vibration could be intercepted by matching the length of the string on the pendulum with the particular rate of vibration of the object concerned.
Lethbridge found, for example, that gold possessed a vibratory rate of twenty-nine inches. To resonate in harmony with anything made of gold, therefore, it was necessary for the length of string on the pendulum to be exactly twenty-nine inches long.
So if he wanted to find a gold ring buried in a field, then, using a pendulum with a suitable length of string, he would walk around the field with the pendulum swinging to and fro. When he approached the ring, Lethbridge found that the pendulum would change its motion and proceed to rotate in a clockwise direction without his inducing any deliberate change in motion.
Not only was he able to discover different hidden objects in this manner, but he found that the pendulum could be used in numerous other ways as well, particularly in archeological applications. He found that by means of the pendulum he was also able to identify such non-physical aspects as “age”, “heat” and “colour”. His extraordinary success in utilising a pendulum was recounted in his book Ghost and Ghoul, published in 1961.
On the face of it, Lethbridge’s ideas and his lavish claims for the abilities of a pendulum seem ridiculous, for they contradict known laws of science. When a pendulum which is swinging to and fro suddenly begins to rotate without any direct force being applied to it, it defies Newtonian physics. Critics naturally reject such a phenomenon as imaginary or fraudulent, or explain it away as the result of subconscious reflex action.
Lethbridge himself was remarkably candid about his discoveries. He was quick to acknowledge the apparent absurdity of his work, and to concede that he had no idea why it worked. By all accounts, according to his own formal education, he agreed that such things ought not to work. Yet the irresistible proof of his ideas lay in the evidence which he himself had accumulated, and which others were able to duplicate.
Referring to Lethbridge’s ideas, author Stephen Jenkins wrote in his book The Undiscovered Country:
“I would think this whole idea mad in the extreme if I hadn’t tried it and found it to work, and seen others work it.”12
Whatever the reality of these subtle radiations of matter may happen to be, they become even more mysterious when diviners claim to be able to detect them without actually being present at the site concerned. For just as Curtis Upton found that he was able to treat diseased crops merely by using a photograph of the field concerned, so other diviners have been able to work equally effectively from maps.
Commenting on these remote forms of divination, Don Robins writes:
“There are many instances where as much information can be gleaned from a map, even a rough sketch map drawn only for the purpose of divination, as from visiting the site. Even if one is looking for water then it is self-evident that energy from the water itself is not being picked up: there is something else which probably lies within the orbit of the subjective concentration of the diviner.
“This could be why nearly every attempt to pin the diviner’s gift down by scientific experimentation fails, for empiricism and determinism do not recognise any observer effect exists. The greatest mystery is that it works in a scientific vacuum, seldom open to objective testing and heavily dependent on the subjectivity of the diviner.”13
In dealing specifically with this subjective factor, as detailed by Tom Graves in his book entitled Dowsing, Robins goes on to add:
“Read Graves’ book and you will see that the only way to divine is to set yourself in the right mental framework. You have to instruct yourself consciously to look for water or energy or whatever. In fact you have to tune yourself like a resonating cavity.”14
This conscious tuning of the mind is the essential ingredient in all forms of divination, whether they be dowsing, astrology, examining tea-leaves in a cup, or evaluating the entrails of a sheep. Any individual is capable of any form of divination if he or she is prepared to provide a sympathetic mental framework.
The subject must first start with the mental concept that the intended objective is possible, and then act in full confidence that this objective will be achieved. The desired objective will then manifest itself in physical form, patterning itself on the underlying mental thought-form. We are reminded of the findings of Lawrence LeShan in his investigation into the manifestation of paranormal phenomena:
“It became clear during this several-year search that at the moment the paranormal information was acquired (when “telepathy” or “clairvoyance” or “precognition” was happening) they were reacting to the world as if it were constructed and “worked” on different grounds than those grounds on which we normally believe it to be constructed. At those moments they used a different metaphysical structure of the world than our ordinary, everyday metaphysical structure.”15
The key factor in this revised mental framework is conviction. For, as LeShan goes on to point out:
“Another limit is the complete belief in it. One must know it is valid to operate within it.”16
Once we have complete conviction in our desired mental framework, then confirmatory results automatically follow. If this underlying mental structure is different from that of conventional thinking, it will yield results which are equally at odds with accepted understanding. We might use as an example of an “unscientific” paradigm, the case of astrology.
Although there are various astrological systems in use today, which differ within themselves as to their constituent features, they are all based on the premise that the motions of the sun and planets influence the nature of personalities and the events that are associated with them. In most astrological systems, this association is intrinsically linked with the precise moment of birth of the individual concerned.
Now science rejects this basic premise of astrology as factually absurd. Since planets are considered to be remote physical objects composed of inert gas or matter, they are believed by scientists to have no possible influence on human events. Furthermore, since the precise moment of birth can be affected by a variety of factors, such as the decision to deliver the child by induction or Caesarean section, the actual time of birth is clearly subject to human factors which must surely undermine any supposed astronomical association.
In scientific terms, therefore, astrology simply does not stand up to critical analysis. Yet critics of astrology have overlooked the crucial element of mind. It is the mind which determinesthe nature of this association, and not the planets themselves. Since, as mystics have pointed out, there is no intrinsic relationship between space and objects or between time and events, we are free to impose any pattern of association upon them that we wish.
Astrologists, therefore, have merely imposed another view of reality upon the world; one which requires human events to be bound by the motions of the planets. Astrology works for those who operate with conviction within that mental framework. Astrologists must recognise, however, that despite any amount of supporting evidence, astrology will never be considered to be a valid scientific hypothesis, as long as science continues to exclude the influence upon matter of the subjective state of mind.
As in all forms of divination, the link between circumstance and matter is purely mental. It works because we ourselves make it work. We devise the mental pattern and we supply the energy, which then manifests according to our underlying pattern of belief. We may energise any mental pattern that we wish.
I may, for example, hold the concept that weather formations can be predicted by shuffling a pack of playing cards, and that various changes in weather conditions can be linked to specific sequences of cards. As completely unscientific as my basic rationale may be, my results will bear out my underlying assumption, in direct response to the conviction with which I apply it.
Although there is in fact no limit to what can be achieved in this way in practice, the ability to create physical thought forms is dependent on the personal power of the individual concerned. Where this is strong and is reinforced by an intense desire and resolute will, miraculous things can be achieved. They will be miraculous, however, only insofar as they appear to contradict the known laws of science.
The scientific description of the universe now represents the dominant cast of mind in the world today. The scientific description of the world is based, as we have seen, on certain fundamental assumptions. While these assumptions are now held to be self-evident, it is clear upon examination that they remain mere articles of faith.
These assumptions are that the universe is ultimately a rational phenomenon, and that being rational, can be interpreted and understood by a rational process of investigation. The universe is also assumed to be a totally consistent and predictable affair. So once a particular event occurs, it is assumed by scientists that it will always happen again, as long as the same physical conditions apply.
It is this consistency which lies at the heart of the scientific explanation of the world. Having been conditioned into this way of thinking, it is natural that scientists should come to regard the universe as being the product of a consistent set of laws, which are themselves immutable.
The purpose of science has always been to identify these laws. Because consistency is the linchpin of the scientific description of the universe, it is not surprising that scientists tend to reject anything that threatens this consistency. Any observable which runs counter to any single scientific law, is ultimately a threat to the entire scientific edifice. It threatens to bring down the whole pack of cards.
For, as Margenau and LeShan succinctly point out:
“A completely consistent cosmos cannot be inconsistent in one area. One exception collapses it all.”17
The reason why radionics, dowsing, astrology and other forms of divination are rejected by science is because they are clearly inconsistent with its fundamental laws. The reason why such things appear to operate within a scientific vacuum is because science has thus far been unable to cast its deterministic net over the phenomena concerned.
Nor is science likely to succeed until it allows for the recognition of the subjective state of mind. Yet the range of anomalous observations is so great, as we have seen throughout the pages of this book (The Cosmic Web), that they surely point to the fact that the fundamental laws proposed by science are nothing but the products of belief.
Seen in this light, science is not a rational system of investigation which comes ever closer to describing the true nature of the universe. Instead, it is merely one system of applied belief, among many, which moulds nature according to its underlying tenets of belief. Science will never provide a final understanding of the universe. The universe will always be too rich for its restricted laws.
While such an evaluation may seem heretical to many, certain perceptive scientists have already begun to entertain serious doubts about the fundamental validity of science. For, as Edward Harrison, professor of physics and astronomy at the University of Massachusetts observed on receiving the Melcher Award in 1986:
“Human beings of all societies and in all periods of history believe that their ideas on the nature of the real world are the most secure, and that their ideas on religion, ethics and justice are the most enlightened. Like us, they think that final knowledge is at last within reach. Like us they pity the people in earlier ages for not knowing the true facts. Unfailingly, human beings pity their ancestors for being ignorant and forget that their descendants will pity them for the same reason.
“Dare I say that secure knowledge can never be found? That our boundless ignorance explains why we feel so confident of success in bounded knowledge? That each discovery creates in the long run more mystery than it solves? That we stand no closer to the ultimate truth than did our forbears? And that we are no better than the people who lived a thousand and even ten thousand years ago?”18
Professor Harrison points toward a truth which is as old as humanity, and which we find reflected in the ancient writings of the Hindu sages:
“The greatest of all delusions is the conviction that knowledge is not a delusion.”19
The reason why every generation remains convinced that its knowledge is the only truth, is that each generation moulds nature into a reflection of its deepest held beliefs. It is the fact that these beliefs find fulfillment in experience which lends credibility to their underlying beliefs. Yet this basic principle remains true for every generation, including our own.
Our thoughts determine our beliefs, and it is these beliefs in life which determine our experiences. We then delude ourselves into thinking that the knowledge distilled from these experiences is “truth”, which is then taken to be representative of the Creator’s Will. But as beliefs change, so do experiences, and so does the knowledge that is gained from them.
The reason why our experiences continually change in direct relationship with our thoughts, is because the universe is not an objective reality existing in space independently of us, but is a subjective projection in consciousness. It is this truth which is revealed in the direct experience of the Sage, as we see from the following words of Ramana Maharshi:
“Those who have realized the Self by direct and immediate experience clearly perceive beyond all doubt that the phenomenal world as an objective, independent reality is wholly nonexistent.”20
We find its echo in the teachings of the Buddha:
“The Buddha said to Subhuti, ‘All that has a form is an illusive existence. When it is perceived that all form is no form, the Tathagata is recognized’.”21
In his epic work The Crest Jewel of Wisdom, the 8th century sage Sankara wrote:
“With the emergence of the mind everything arises and with its subsidence everything ceases. In the dream state, in which there are no objects, the mind creates its dream world of enjoyers and others by its powers. Similarly, all that it perceives in the waking state is its own display.” 22
Because the nature of what is experienced in consciousness is directly related to the contents of each individual consciousness, it follows that individual experiences in life will be influenced by individual thoughts. What is experienced in life can never be consistent for every individual in every age. Subjective experience breeds knowledge born of that experience, and this knowledge is always limited.
Any change in the way we perceive the universe inevitably leads to a change in the apparent functioning of the universe. As we find in the Tripura Rahasya:
“So also the universe has repeatedly been taken to be real so that it now looks as if it were completely real. The remedy lies in a change in outlook. The world becomes for one whatever one is accustomed to think of it.”23
Again, as is recorded in the Hindu classic, the Agamas:
“The universe has no eternal support, nor is it cognized from without; but as you make it so it becomes.” 24
When Tom Lethbridge unwittingly began his experiments in dowsing, he found that he began to experience results which were in line with his thinking. When Kreskin undertook experiments in telepathy, he found that his intuitive ideas came to be rewarded with success. When Jules Romains investigated the possibility of eyeless sight, he found that he achieved results according to his inner conviction.
When Friedrich Jurgenson acted on impulse, he found that he was successful in recording strange discarnate voices on his tape recorder. Despite the fact that each of these instances is in direct conflict with the universally accepted laws of science, they nevertheless occurred.
The fact that they did so is convincing proof that scientific laws do not set effective limits to what we may or may not achieve, and that the universe is more susceptible to thought than we have hitherto believed. Each one of these people instinctively acted on the principle of creative thought as enunciated by the Tripura Rahasya:
“One starts by imagining something; then contemplates it; and by continuous or repeated association resolves that it is true unless contradicted. In that way, the world appears real in the manner one is used to it.”25
Each one of us is free to imagine anything we wish, and to bring this thought form into manifestation in our world of personal experience. There are no limits to the range of this creative power, other than the limits which we impose upon ourselves in the form of our beliefs. It is these beliefs which set the boundaries of our world and determine the character of our experience.
Yet such is the nature of our “enlightened” scientific world, that each one of us is conditioned by our education to believe that we are bound by the apparent limits of our bodies, and that we are further bound by scientific laws to which the universe rigidly adheres. But it is not this universe that binds us, it is our own conviction that we are bound. However, this bondage is illusory, for as the Tripura Rahasya points out:
“The strongest fetter is the certainty that one is bound. It is as false as the fearful hallucinations of a frightened child.”26
Within our world of personal experience, each one of us is free to spin our cosmic web. We are free to spin whatever we wish, and to link these strands of thought together in any manner that we wish. Our universe does not unfold according to any pre-ordained set of rules. It responds to those influences which we ourselves have set in motion.
When we truly grasp the awesome power at our command and have the courage to snap the fetters of our conditioned thinking, then we stand at the threshold of a new beginning – a new era of experience. Being now the conscious creators of our lives, we come to interact with our world with new vitality and zest. Not only are we free to attract those experiences in life which we most desire, but we also become architects of a new reality, able to mould our world in dazzling ways.
In spinning our cosmic web, we may choose to operate within our culturally derived paradigm, or we may substitute a new paradigm of our own. We are always free to choose. In working within our accustomed paradigm, we can focus our thoughts upon any object of desire. These objects can be material, such as a new house or car, or whatever else represents the target of our desire.
We can also focus upon particular levels of achievement, such as that of a professional engineer, or doctor, or opera singer. We can select as our objects of desire the achievement of some goal such as the gain or loss of weight, the cure for some specific ailment, or the answer to some deep riddle of history or science. All of these objectives are valid targets of desire, and all of them can be fulfilled by the necessary investment of personal energy.
The time it takes for any of these objectives to be attained will depend upon the degree of energy which is applied, and the confidence and vigour with which each is pursued. All negative thoughts of failure will of course undermine these efforts, as will self-doubt and a diffident approach. As in all things, confidence comes with success, and small achievements of desire inevitably provide the foundation for launching the fulfillment of a lifelong dream.
The above objectives can safely be pursued within our customary paradigm of thought. Where this paradigm is deficient, however, as for example in the case of paralysis or an incurable disease, one is always free to impose a new paradigm of thought which transcends the former limitations.
It goes without saying that the imposition of a personal preferential paradigm of thought, which runs counter to that of the majority, must always demand a greater investment of energy, as it is necessary to overcome the inertia of the former conditioning of mind. Again, it is the zest and faith with which each new paradigm is applied which is the determinant of success.
Examples of such variations from common experience can apply to all aspects of life. They are particularly suited to sport. In the pursuit of sport most sportsmen and women give little thought to the limiting effects of the paradigm, or to the possibility that the paradigm within which each sport is played may itself be changed.
Whereas much can be gained by the practice of visualisation towards an intended goal within the accepted paradigm, even more amazing things can be achieved by overriding the accepted paradigm altogether. So, for example, a golfer or tennis player need not be bound by the commonly accepted laws of dynamics. We assume that a golf ball must inevitably be bound by the laws of motion and gravitation in negotiating the slope and nap of a putting green.
Yet, with a strong mind which is able to superimpose a different paradigm of thought in which these limitations do not apply, it would be possible to putt directly at the hole and ignore such features as the cut of the green and its slope. The ball would travel unerringly over these features in a straight line directly into the hole.
The first practitioner of such a miraculous form of putting would nevertheless have to counter a strong contingent of foes, who would no doubt attribute this result to the influence of magic, voodoo or witchcraft.
Similarly, tennis players could superimpose new mental paradigms in the execution of their ground strokes. So a ball struck with a heavy top-spin may suddenly skid off the ground at an unexpected angle, thoroughly confusing an opponent who was expecting the customary bounce of the ball under such circumstances. Achieving such a result is simply a matter of focusing the mind on the intended objective, and then operating in the confident faith that such a result can be attained.
The subtlety of such an approach is that the applicable mental paradigm could be changed as the game was in progress. So balls struck within the normal paradigm of thought would behave in one way, and those within another paradigm would behave quite differently. We can easily imagine how formidable any player would be who had the necessary strength of mind to vary paradigms at will.
Within our accepted paradigm of thought, we believe that a baseball bat or golf club is an inert object which exercises no influence over the ball, other than as an instrument of action. Yet if we were to substitute this thought with the idea that the bat or club was a resonator of energy which could be charged, then we could mentally infuse it with an enormous reservoir of power.
This power could then be used to achieve a formidable effect, out of all proportion to the physical energy expended. So the casual swing of a baseball bat could produce an explosive effect sending the ball rocketing out of the stadium. Again, the paradigm within which one chose to operate could be varied according to the needs and situation of the time. Above all it would introduce an element of sheer surprise which would be quite unnerving to opponents and nothing short of amazing to onlookers.
The range of possible interactions between mind and matter are so vast that entire volumes would be necessary even to begin to do justice to them. Yet we may perhaps conclude by offering an example of how the creative mind can deal with the daily challenge of living, by applying the power of visualisation and focused thought.
One day in November 1987, Bruce Gibbs rented a Piper Cherokee in which to do some aerial sightseeing. Although he was a scallop fisherman by profession, he was also a trained pilot with some five years of flying experience. On this particular day, Gibbs, then aged 46, took off from Chatham airport in Massachusetts and climbed to an altitude of a thousand feet, where he levelled off.
Just as he was getting a feel for the controls of his rented plane its single engine cut out, causing the plane to lose height. Aware that he would have to make an emergency landing, Gibbs radioed a hasty Mayday message to Chatham, and indicated that he would try to bring the plane down in a cleared area nearby.
When it became apparent that the glide path of the plane was too steep and that he could not avoid crashing into the trees below, Gibbs tried a mental technique which he had used successfully before in other dangerous situations. He focused his mind and visualised himself walking away from the wreck unscathed. Although the plane was badly damaged in the ensuing crash, Gibbs found that he was unhurt.
The door of the cockpit was jammed, however, pinning him within the wreckage. In addition, aviation fuel was leaking out causing an imminent threat of explosion. Using both his feet to kick the door open, Gibbs rapidly exited the plane, although not before coolly collecting his briefcase and glasses. Undeterred by this close call with death, Gibbs then went for a workout at the Chatham Health Club, and subsequently spent the evening dancing.
Later, in relating his story to Michelle Caruso of the Boston Herald, Gibbs attributed his safe escape to his visualisation technique. He claimed that this technique had enabled him to walk over white-hot coals, and to survive other emergencies in the past. These included sinking boats and a diving accident in which his air supply ran out while he was 95 feet (29 metres) below the surface of the water. 27
Yet however we choose to spin, and whatever events are attracted within our webs of cosmic experience, these webs remain limits to our experience. Although we are ever free to recreate our webs in novel ways, thought itself traps the thinker within its subtle strands. For the thinker is not separate from thought, but is a creature born of thinking. The persons we believe ourselves to be are products of our interaction with experience.
In the same way that we spin our cosmic webs, so we come to create our personalities. Within the narrow confines of an individual personality, bound by the shackles of thought, there can never be real freedom of expression. True freedom comes with the transcendence of thought, for thought itself, as Krishnamurti has affirmed, can never take us to the freedom of Reality beyond.
“Thought can create the most marvelous instrument – it can go to the moon, to Venus; but thought can never possibly touch ‘the other’ because thought is never free, thought is old, thought is conditioned. Thought is the whole structure of the known.”28
Despite the limiting nature of thought, it is always possible to be free of thought, and of the entire cycle of rebirth. Thought always exists within consciousness. But this consciousness is posited upon the Supernal Awareness of the one true Reality. When the mind no longer spins its web of thought, the pristine purity of our eternal nature shines forth.
“When the mind does not create pictures due to thoughts, it is (in) the unmodified state which is its primal and pure condition. When the pictures on a wall are erased, the original wall remains. No other work is necessary to restore its original condition.”29
If we wish to transcend the limitations of thought, and experience the sublime joy of our true heritage, we must cease our spinning. We need to unravel that web of thought that we have so assiduously learned to spin, since the moment of our birth. In so doing, however, we face the extinction of the spinner.
Our personality, which is our most intimate and treasured possession, is itself the product of spinning, and must inevitably die with the unraveling of the web. Yet it is the death of our limited personality that is the price we must pay to rediscover our illimitable Self. It is our voluntary sacrifice of life within our web of limited expression that opens the portals of true life, and an awareness of our own resplendent Being.
For as Nisargadatta Maharaj has pointed out:
“To be a living being is not the ultimate state; there is something beyond, much more wonderful, which is neither being nor non-being, neither living nor not-living. It is a state of pure awareness, beyond the limitations of space and time.”30
Our lives do not end with the death of our personalities. Instead, we are reborn into a state of awareness that is shrouded in eternal bliss where we are freed from all those limitations that attended all of our previous lives. For as Jesus explained to his disciples:
“And ye shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free.” (John 8: 32)
References:
12 Stephen Jenkins, “The Undiscovered Country”, Neville Spearman, London, 1978, p. 144.
13 Don Robins, “The Secret Language of Stone”, Rider, London, 1988, p. 160.
14 Ibid, p. 163.
15 Lawrence LeShan, “The Medium, The Mystic and The Physicist”, Ballantine, New York, 1975, pp. xiii-xiv.
16 Ibid, p. 154.
17 Henry Margenau and Lawrence LeShan, “Einstein’s Space and Van Goch’s Sky”, Macmillan, New York,1982, p. 6.
18 Quoted in Fate magazine, June, 1988, p. 7.
19 “Tripura Rahasya”, translated by Swami Saraswathi, Sri Ramanasramam, Tiruvannamalai, 1962, p. 157.
20 “The Collected Works of Ramana Maharshi”, edited by Arthur Osborne, Rider, London, 1959, p. 25.
21 D.T. Suzuki, “Manual of Zen Buddhism”, op.cit., p. 40.
22 “The Collected Works of Ramana Maharshi”, op.cit., p. 142.
23 “Tripura Rahasya”, op.cit., p. 88.
24 “The Collected Works of Ramana Maharshi”, op.cit., p. 113.
We are not bound by the so-called “laws” of science unless we choose to be. Nor are we bound by the idea that our bodies are subject to all the limitations that science imposes upon us. We are always free to discard them whenever we wish.
Evidence continues to accumulate that the mind is able to overcome the physical limitations of the body to a degree that is regarded as impossible, according to accepted scientific and medical opinion.
When Paul Brunton visited Egypt in his search for people with unusual talents, he happened to meet a man who offered to show him some strange feats of hypnotism.
When he expressed interest in seeing these powers, the hypnotist, who called himself Monsieur Ades, placed his female associate named Marguerite into a hypnotic trance. He then invited Brunton to blindfold the lady so that she would be unable to see through her eyes.
He obliged by fastening pieces of gummed tape across her eyebrows, eyelids and cheeks. On top of the tape, he tied a thick velvet bandage around her eyes and head, until he was satisfied that her vision was completely obscured.
Ades then invited Brunton to select at random any passage from any book of his choice and place it in front of Marguerite. He chose a scientific book published in French, marked a certain paragraph, and set it in front of her.
At the signal given by Ades, Marguerite picked up a pencil and began to write. As she did so the hypnotist stood silently by watching her. In a few minutes she completed the task. Brunton then asked her to underline certain words in the text, which she did.
When he scrutinised what the lady had written, Brunton found that his selected passage had been accurately transcribed, including the words that he had underlined, with the exception of the word statisticiens, which she had recorded as statistiques.
Following this test, Ades then asked Marguerite to write out the same passage, but this time using her left hand rather than her right. Brunton reported that she did so with ease, even though she later claimed in her awakened state that she was not ambidextrous. 38
This hypnotic feat is usually dismissed by western skeptics as just another example of contrived fraud, resulting from collaboration between a cunning magician and his trained accomplice. Yet what made Brunton’s evidence significant was that it was matched by a Pakistani by the name of Kuda Bux.
Bux was born in Kashmir in 1906. During the 1930’s he travelled to the west and gave stage performances under the pseudonym of Professor K. B. Duke. Bux claimed that he possessed a talent for eyeless sight and gave numerous demonstrations to support his claim.
In 1934 he entertained a group of distinguished scientists in London which included Edward Andrade, then professor of physics at London University. Bux permitted himself to be blindfolded to the satisfaction of all those present, and then asked for a book to read.
Before one was produced, professor Andrade suggested that they obtain one which none of those present had ever read, in order to eliminate the possibility of any telepathic liaison. Several books were sent for from a nearby bookstore and placed before the Kashmiri performer.
Bux then extended his hands over one of the volumes and began to read aloud in his characteristic melodious style. When he was halfway down the page, Andrade switched books and opened another at random. Bux hardly interrupted his flow of words before continuing to read aloud from the new volume. He continued reading page after page, regardless of how often the books were changed.
On another occasion, Bux permitted a physician to administer atropine to his eyes before conducting his demonstration. Although atropine produces a blurring of vision, this made no difference to the successful outcome. Another doctor insisted on putting a film of collodion over his eyes prior to applying the bandages, but this too had no effect on his ability to see.
Bux went on to display a series of sensational examples of his talent. On one occasion in a Manchester hospital, having been securely blindfolded by a physician, he walked down the corridor, stepped outside, mounted a bicycle and rode off into the afternoon traffic.
It was a feat that he later performed again in New York, when he rode a bicycle blindfolded through the traffic of Times Square. On this occasion his head was almost completely swathed in bandages. Again, in Liverpool in 1937, while heavily bandaged, Bux calmly walked along a narrow ledge on the edge of a building some two hundred feet above the ground. 44
As amazing as the exploits of Kuda Bux were, they made little impression on the scientists of his time, and to this day he is still discounted as a fraud.
Critics have dismissed him as just another clever sleight-of-hand artist, who was able to see perfectly well with his physical eyes by the subtle manipulation of his bandages, in a way that would enable him to see via a “nose-peek”, a downward glance through the spaces alongside the nose.
Despite the vehemence of their views, however, these sceptics have displayed little enthusiasm for repeating his ventures into the New York traffic. Their intellectual stance remains an ironic reflection of the truth that there are none so blind as those who will not see.
In defence of this Pakistani, it is instructive to learn how Kudu Bux himself explained the nature of his powers. He claimed that his talent was self-taught, and that it was the result of many years of practice. Far from being unique, however, Bux claimed that anyone could do what he had done, if they were prepared to undertake the necessary mental discipline.
Based on the guidance he received from a guru in Hardwar in northern India, Bux learned to concentrate his mind to the point where he could focus his attention without the invasion of any distracting thoughts. This was merely a preliminary discipline, however, for he claimed that eyeless sight depended on the ability to visualise what the physical eyes could not see.
Bux began by memorising certain objects and then, after blindfolding himself, trying to recreate pictures of these objects in his mind. In due course, he found that he was able to establish a link between these physical objects and his mental visualisations. He learned to see these objects even when blindfolded. After starting with furniture, pictures, flowers and maps, he graduated to the printed page.
Finally, after eleven years of strenuous effort, he was able to read books at will. To those who claimed that he possessed X-ray vision he replied: “X-ray vision would imply that I can see through my blindfold. But I cannot see through anything. I see with something else other than my eyes. I see with the mind’s eye.”45
As amazing as the claims of Kudu Bux were, they were dwarfed by experiments carried out by the French scientist Jules Romains.
In 1918, Romains theorised that human beings might actually be able to see without using their physical eyes. He therefore decided to conduct a series of experiments to test this possibility of eyeless sight. He began his experiments by hypnotising a man whom he had picked at random. He then proceeded in the following manner:
“I bandaged his eyes and warned him that he would be using a faculty which he possessed beyond doubt, although he had never had occasion to discover it. I explained to him briefly that I was going to place a newspaper in his hands and that he should try to “see” and “read” some, at least, of the largest letters.
“I made it very clear that he was not to rely on sensations of touch; that he was to “see”, in the strict sense of the word, and furthermore that I was persuaded that he could do it.”39
It is important to note that Romains planted the suggestion to the hypnotised man that he did, in fact, possess the ability to “see” without the use of his physical eyes, and that he, Romains, had absolute confidence in his ability to utilise this hitherto unused faculty.
Romains then produced a copy of a newspaper which the man had not previously seen and asked him to read the title. The man made an intense effort, as was demonstrated by his agitation and nervous gestures. After a silence of about two to three minutes, the subject began, hesitantly, to announce the title of the newspaper, which was printed in letters 30 millimetres (1.2 inches) in height.
The title conveyed by the subject was correct. Romains congratulated the man and then asked him to read out the title of an article printed in letters of five millimetres (.2 inches). He redoubled his efforts, and after a short while came up with a heading which, although not entirely correct was nevertheless a very close equivalent.
The effort to “see” these letters had so exhausted his subject that Romains was obliged to terminate his experiment at that point. In conducting this test, Romains noted that the man had not been forewarned before hypnosis about the nature of the material that would be presented to him.
He also stressed that at no time had this man held the newspaper in his hands while “reading” the contents. This experiment was conducted in broad daylight in the presence of two witnesses.
Stimulated by this initial success, Romains repeated this experiment with four other volunteers. These volunteers were not pre-selected for any special reasons. They merely happened to be the first four people who came along. Following the same procedure as before, he hypnotised each subject individually, and then asked him to “read” from a newspaper.
Although none of these volunteers had been told anything in advance about the nature of these experiments, all of them displayed a capacity to “see'” under hypnosis while blindfolded.
In the course of hundreds of subsequent tests, which were all successful and conducted in the presence of others, Romains took every precaution he could think of to eliminate the possibility of fraud. He placed the reading material under a glass cover so that the subject had no direct contact with the material itself.
The subjects were blindfolded in different ways suggested by those witnessing these experiments. To avoid the possibility of the volunteers gaining a glimpse of the material through a gap in the bandages, Romains constructed an articulated set of metal panels which he called a bouclier.
This simple arrangement prevented any direct line of sight between the eyes of the subject and the reading material, by allowing a metal panel to be placed beneath the jaw of the blindfolded person, which shielded the material which lay beneath.
Having now acquired convincing evidence of the ability of his subjects to “see” under hypnosis without the use of physical eyes, Romains wondered whether this faculty was a product of the hypnotic state alone, or whether it could be cultivated in the normal state of consciousness.
In order to investigate this possibility, he decided to use himself as a subject. He therefore began a series of experiments which involved thirty-one sittings, and which extended over a period of about one hundred and fifty hours.
During these experiments Romains securely blindfolded himself and took particular care to avoid any slivers of light penetrating along the sides of his nose, thus allowing him to see the material with his physical eyes. He also adopted a posture of extreme mental concentration, which he considered to be indispensable to any success he might achieve.
His attitude throughout these experiments was one of confident expectancy. He imbued himself with the conviction that he actually did possess the faculty he was seeking to express, and simply waited expectantly for signs of confirmatory evidence. As Romains noted at the time:
“We must act as if we had the power of entering into direct contact with the exterior things present, as if the surroundings and the objects of which they are made up came to us, declared themselves to us without intermediary.”40
Romains’ first dozen sittings, which lasted for about five hours at a time, proved to be extremely exhausting and passed without the faintest sign of any inner vision. Despite his initial disappointment, he persisted in his efforts.
As the sittings progressed, Romains found that he began to make out vague shapes and colours. These initial glimpses were wavering and discontinuous at first and possessed no precise contours or definition. As he continued his efforts, however, he was able to identify large objects that were brightly illuminated.
By the end of his sittings, Romains had succeeded in seeing various objects that were located in the room around him. This awareness of internal vision was not just limited to those objects directly in line with his eyes, but also included those objects which were behind him. His acquired sense of vision was, in fact, spherical in nature, operating over the complete span of 360 degrees.
Realising that the extraordinary faculty which he had discovered could be of profound benefit to the blind, Romains then conducted a series of experiments with two people who had become completely blind and who no longer retained any retinal sensitivity.
These new experiments were undertaken in a normal state of consciousness, without recourse to any form of hypnosis. Romains’ first subject was a man called Michel who had lost his sight during combat. Although the initial experiments proved fruitless, Michel continued until he was finally able to identify the number 4, a figure of some eight centimetres (three inches) in height, which had been placed under glass in a developing frame.
A second blind subject, named Baudoin, soon gained similar success. Buoyed up by this breakthrough, the two blind subjects rapidly began to identify other numbers, and to recognise colours and other objects. Michel and Baudoin were jubilant that they had found a means of restoring their sight. They returned to the Centre de Nice (a local hostel for the blind) to tell the news of their amazing success. Their joy, alas, proved to be short-lived.
“Michel and Baudoin were convinced that their blindness would cease; and in spite of my distinct advice they announced to their comrades of the Centre (de Nice), and perhaps to others, these facts, the possibility of which they had not considered ten days earlier.
“I did not see them again. My most urgent representations did not even secure me the privilege of meeting them. I encountered polite but evasive intermediaries who talked of “fatigue” and “passing indisposition”. 41
Believing that he had stumbled upon a discovery which held the utmost value for science and medicine, Romains tried for many months to gain the interest of the French Academy of Sciences, the Academy of Moral Sciences, and the Sorbonne.
Finally, at 7 o’clock one Thursday evening in October 1920, Romains was invited to give a demonstration of eyeless sight at the Sorbonne at 2 o’clock on the following day.
When he explained that it was hardly possible to prepare a subject at such short notice, he was informed: “If you are unable to show us anything tomorrow we shall of course come to no conclusion whatever against your work, and if on the other hand you show us the slightest thing, the least bit of anything, we will cry it from the housetops.”42
By an amazing stroke of luck Romains was able to contact a person who had conducted two preliminary tests of half an hour each two years before. This man agreed to present himself at the Sorbonne at the prescribed time on the following afternoon.
When the dignitaries assembled at the appointed hour, Romains proceeded to blindfold and hypnotise his subject. Although he was doubtful that any positive result would be forthcoming at such short notice, and with so little preparation, the man successfully identified various objects that were placed in front of him.
When Romains later discussed the implications of this result with the professors who had witnessed it, they declared that “they no longer recalled anything clearly enough.” 43
On the following day, a report was issued to the effect that Romains had been revealed to be a fraud. He was accused of “trickery” and was said to have “broken down” at having been exposed, to the point where he had talked of tearing up the records of his work.
The scientific world was not ready then, nor is it ready now, to recognise a fact that was contrary to its accepted paradigm of thinking.
Yet, the astonishing truth is that vision is a function of the mind and is not dependent on the physical operation of the eyes. As such, sight does not require the possession of healthy eyes, and people who are blind can still learn to see.
Romains had provided the evidence, assembled in scrupulously scientific fashion, to prove the existence of the faculty of eyeless sight. What he had not done, and could not do, was to explain how such a “miraculous” process had actually come about.
But here again, it simply is not possible to “explain” a phenomenon that is expressly forbidden by a certain paradigm of thinking, within the context of that paradigm of thought.
Since Romains’ demonstration of eyeless sight clearly breached the boundaries of accepted scientific thinking, the response of the professors of the Sorbonne matched the attitude of the Holy Fathers of Rome who had confronted Galileo three centuries before.
Eyeless sight could not be real because the accepted scientific paradigm did not permit the manifestation of such a phenomenon. There was clearly no point in entertaining this anomalous fact, since all the known facts contradicted it.
Because his ideas offended the accepted theories of vision, Romains became yet another victim of the ages old crusade against the revelation of the true potential of the human mind. Just as it is not necessary to have physical eyes in order to see, so it is not necessary to have ears in order to hear.
When Napoleon Hill was an expectant father, pacing up and down outside the delivery room waiting to hear the results of his wife’s confinement, he saw two nurses emerge from the room. Instead of stopping to talk to him, however, they strode swiftly past. A few minutes later the attending physician appeared with a grave expression on his face, and motioned Hill aside.
“Before you go in,” the doctor cautioned him, “I must prepare you for a shock. It’s a boy and he was born without ears. He hasn’t the slightest sign of ears, and of course he will be deaf all his life.”46
The average father would have heard this pronouncement with overwhelming gloom and would have resigned himself to his son’s inevitable handicap in life.
But Napoleon Hill was not an average father and did not accept the fact that his son would be obliged to spend his life in a cocoon of silence. He did not, however, resort to some form of technological or surgical relief. Instead, he tried something far more intuitive and revolutionary.
For the next nine years Hill adopted a programme of what might be called “creative visualisation”, in which he formulated in his mind the image of his son without any hearing disability.
He resolutely pursued this campaign of faith in the conviction that he could help his son through the power of focused thought. Some twenty-five years later, Hill’s son had an appointment with another physician. This time the specialist approached Hill smilingly.
“Miraculous”, he exclaimed, “I have X-rayed this young man’s head from every possible angle, and I see no evidence that he possesses any form of hearing equipment. Yet my tests show that he has sixty-five percent of his normal healing capacity!” 47
The boy, who would otherwise have been condemned to a life of limited opportunity, was instead able to attend normal grade school, high school and college, all of which he passed with excellent grades. When confronted by this astonishing enigma the ear specialist could only concede:
“Without doubt the psychological directive the father gave through the child’s subconscious mind influenced nature to improvise some sort of nerve system which connected the brain with the inner walls of the skull and enabled the boy to hear by what is known as bone induction.”47
Jesus observed that all things were possible to any person who truly believed. By contrast, the hardened realist of today’s materialistic age has become conditioned into thinking that only those things are possible which scientific law decrees.
But as has long been demonstrated by those simple souls who have possessed the necessary faith, the “laws of physics” and the “laws of nature” do not establish limits to what is possible in this world. The spirit of life which infuses every heart is, as Maharaj has indicated, “a manifestation or expression of a principle fundamentally and totally free”.48
There is literally no limit to what the unconditioned mind is able to achieve.
Science’s ability to preside over human experience is limited to those who have bound themselves within the purview of scientific thinking. Those who do not choose to be stayed by its commands, find that the rigid laws of science become transformed into gossamer strands of silk.
Not only are people able to see without eyes and hear without ears, but there is evidence to suggest that people are able to think and function normally without any sign of brains!
The English Mechanic, for example, published an account in 1914 of three cases which came to the attention of Dr. Etienne Destot, a radiological surgeon associated with the Tribunal of the Seine in Paris.
In the first case a boy of twelve fractured his skull on a gas-lamp as he was sliding down the balustrade of a staircase. The boy was examined by Dr. Daniel Moliere, a surgeon of the Dieu Hospital in Lyons. The doctor stated that the boy had lost a bowl of brains.
Although he remained in a coma for ten days, he subsequently regained consciousness and, to the utter amazement of the attending doctor, regained the use of all his faculties.
In another instance, a stonemason was severely injured when a large cornice stone, which he was mounting, gave way and fell on him. After lapsing into a coma for fifteen days, the mason also awakened to the full use of his former skills. Even though the left frontal bone and left frontal lobe of the brain had been torn away in the accident, his motivity, sensitivity and speech remained unimpaired.
Finally, an Arab was admitted to a hospital in Algiers, suffering from a wound to his skull, which had been caused by the blow of a hammer. For two months the man showed no sign of any disability. Then unexpectedly, he fell into a coma and died. A post-mortem examination of the Arab revealed that he did not have any trace of brains left in his skull.” 49
The disclaimer that these incidents were merely bizarre anecdotal reports drawn from unreliable sources in the distant past, can be discounted by the report which was published in Science in 1980.
This report announced some extraordinary findings regarding intelligence and the cerebral cortex which had been discovered by the British neurologist John Lorber, holder of a research chair in pediatrics at Sheffield University. In the course of conducting research into the nature of hydrocephalus, or water on the brain, Lorber did a series of brain scans on people who suffered from this malady.
One of these persons was a student at the University who had been referred to Lorber by his personal physician, when it was noticed that his head was slightly larger than normal. Lorber performed a brain scan on this student and was startled by the result.
“When we did a brain scan on him, we saw that instead of the normal 4.5-centimetre thickness of brain tissue between the ventricles and the cortical surface, there was just a thin layer of mantle measuring a millimetre or so. His cranium is filled mainly with cerebrospinal fluid.” 50
Not only was Lorber surprised to find that the student could function in a normal way, but he was later astonished to discover that the young man had an IQ of 126 and had gained a first-class honours degree in mathematics. Yet, as Lorber had found, he had virtually no brain.
Nor was this an isolated case, for as Patrick Wall, professor of anatomy at University College, London, has remarked:
“Scores of similar accounts litter the medical literature, and they go back a long way, but the important thing about Lorber is that he’s done a long series of systematic scanning, rather than just dealing with anecdotes. He has gathered a remarkable set of data and he challenges, “How do we explain it?”50
Evidence continues to accumulate that certain individuals are able to lead fully productive and functional lives, but who do not have any grey matter in their skulls. Albert Einstein was fond of commenting that his brain was his “laboratory”, and when he died, he donated his brain for the advancement of science.
Researchers were amazed to discover that the brain of one of the greatest scientists the world has known, weighed almost a third less than that of the average human being.
Future historians of science may consider it fortunate that the young Einstein was never examined by a brain specialist who had been trained to equate the size of the brain with potential human achievement. Einstein might well have been told that he could never expect to take his place in normal society, or to complete his elementary education.
Science has determined man to be a creature of the earth, and a product of the long, slow march of time. Born out of the primeval slime of antiquity, he is believed to have emerged from the ancient seas, until he came to stalk the land.
Driven by the constant struggle for survival, he mutated through a kaleidoscope of forms, until he laboriously reached that pinnacle of physical expression in which he exists today. Man is believed to be the captive of his genes, which set strict limits to what he may and may not do.
The testimony of the Sages points to an altogether more ethereal source. Man, they say, is a creature of ancestral freedom. The apparent limits of his physical form are but the shadows of his mind. Loose the shackles of his thoughts, they claim, and he is free to explore the utmost limits of desire.
His only obstacle is the impediment of his own belief. Man’s ultimate destiny, and the end of all his striving, lies in the rediscovery of his one true source.
Continued in Part Four
References:
38 Paul Brunton, “A Search in Secret Egypt”, Dutton, New York, 1936, pp. 99-101.
39 Jules Romains, “Eyeless Sight”, translated by C. K. Ogden, Citadel, Secaucus, 1978, pp. 46-47.
40 Ibid, p. 136.
41 Ibid, pp. 194-195.
42 Ibid, pp. 186-197.
43 Ibid, p. 198.
44 John Godwin, “This Baffling World”, Hart, New York, 1968, pp. 392-395.
45 Ibid, p. 397.
46 Napoleon Hill, “You Can Work Your Own Miracles”, Fawcett, New York, 1971, p.15.
47 Ibid, p. 17.
48 “I Am That”, Conversations with Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, translated by Maurice Frydman, Book I, Chetana, Bombay, 1973, p. 10.
49 Anonymous, English Mechanic, 99:186-187, 1914.
50 Roger Lewin, “Is Your Brain Really Necessary?”, in Science, 210:1232-1234, 1980.
The fact that the oak tree emerges upon examination to have a mental and subjective source rather than an outward and objective nature, does not in any way alter its apparent reality. It continues to stand proudly before us, and to appear as something distinctly separate from ourselves.
Yet this apparent independent reality is illusory, for what our detailed investigation into the nature of matter has revealed, is that the tree is intrinsically part of ourselves, and is responsive to our every thought and deed.
The universe, of which our oak tree is a part, is a construct of the mind. Being mind-made, it can always be remade.
This priceless jewel of understanding is the culmination of our search into the meaning of manifested form. It is this discovery of the inherent plasticity of our world which allows us to mould it according to our birthright of creative freedom. Yet we remain plagued with doubt.
The idea that the mind can somehow come to influence the objective world that we see and sense around us, seems in complete conflict with our sensory perceptions. For, as one questioner challenged Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj:
QUESTION: “How can the mind be a part of nature?
MAHARAJ: Because nature is in the mind; without the mind where is nature?
QUESTION: If nature is in the mind and the mind is my own, I should be able to control nature, which is not the case. Forces beyond my control determine my behaviour.
MAHARAJ: Develop the witness attitude and you will find in your own experience that detachment brings control. The state of witnessing is full of power, there is nothing passive about it.”5
Not only are the twin worlds of mind and matter intrinsically linked together, but the world of matter always derives its nature and character from the underlying cast of mind. It is the mind which both creates form and then determines the relationships which bind these forms together.
The world is not created according to some divinely ordained set of rules. The entire universe manifests according to that structure of belief which we ourselves impose upon it, and each one of us is free to change that structure as and when we wish.
Every object that exists within time and space can be linked together in any way we choose. That is the message of the mystics.
“The relation between space and objects and between time and events is according to your estimate of them; there is no intrinsic relationship between them.”6
“Whatever propositions are made of logic are no (true) propositions, for they stand in no intrinsic relation to my inner light.”7
Our experiences in life are invariably determined by those patterns of belief which characterise our particular description of the world. We have seen how, in the western world, our experiences are dominated by the scientific description of the universe. Although this scientific overlay of thought normally defines the character of our experiences in the world, we are not bound by this scientific code of thought.
If we choose to vary our description of the world, we will find that our experiences will vary in unison with this new description. If we choose to define the world in a way that is in conflict with the scientific description of the world, we will find that our experiences will equally be in conflict with scientific opinion. We will then discover that we are able to do what science deems impossible.
Evidence of the truth of this assertion surrounds us on every side. Yet we hardly dare to look at it for fear that it should undermine our carefully reasoned state of mind. Perhaps nowhere has this subtle marriage of mind and matter been demonstrated more dramatically in recent years than in the strange saga of “radionics”.
In the early years of the twentieth century, at a time when the Italian physicist Guglielmo Marconi was experimenting with the transmission of long-wave radio signals, a young Californian physician named Albert Abrams made a strange discovery. While he was examining a patient who was suffering from a cancerous growth on his lip, Dr. Abrams found that a particular area of the patient’s abdomen produced a dull sound when struck by his fingers.
What made this discovery even more mysterious was that this dull sound was only detectable when the patient was facing west. Because of the limited direction in which this anomaly occurred, Abrams speculated that he was dealing with an unusual electrical phenomenon, perhaps linked in some way with the earth’s magnetic field.
Intrigued by this curious effect, Abrams conducted numerous tests with other patients who were suffering from other forms of disease. He found that each type of disease was characterised by a similar dull percussive response on a specific part of the abdomen. These results led Abrams to develop an unusual theory about the nature of disease.
Since all matter was then known to be composed of energy, Abrams suggested that all bodily tissue gave off certain “radiations” of a frequency which was specific to the organ concerned, and that these radiations could be monitored by the use of suitable electrical equipment.
To this end Abrams designed a special apparatus which he called an “oscilloclast”, a type of variable electrical resistance-box that he developed in conjunction with a leading expert in radio waves. By varying the resistance of this instrument, Abrams claimed to be able to assign a value in ohms to the emanations given off by various organs, and so identify the radiations associated with each organ.
In this way he developed a catalogue of frequency radiations emanating from all parts of the human body. In experimenting with patients suffering from different diseases, Abrams found that diseased tissue also gave off these subtle radiations, but did so at vibratory rates which differed from those of healthy tissue.
Abrams therefore advanced a novel theory of the treatment of disease. He claimed that diseased tissue could be cured by subjecting it to healing vibrations which were precisely attuned to those radiations which he had found to be compatible with those of healthy tissue. By simply calibrating his oscilloclast to the correct rate of vibration, Abrams claimed to be able to heal diseased tissue.
Treatment involved attaching an electrode to the affected area of the patient’s body, and then applying current to the oscilloscope at the required vibratory rate. In the diagnosis of disease, Abrams later found that it was not even necessary to obtain a sample of diseased tissue, as a single drop of the patient’s blood would do as well.
Although Dr. Abrams was able to support his claims with documented evidence of successful cures, his novel theory of disease incurred the wrath of the medical profession. The formidable voice of the American Medical Association condemned radionics as “based on voodoo” and pronounced it “claptrap invented by quacks for the desperate and the gullible”. 8
Far from eradicating these unusual practices, however, this fusillade of criticism served only to publicise and promote them. One of those who took up the torch of radionics was a young man by the name of Curtis Upton. Although Abrams had confined his practice to the treatment of disease in people, it occurred to Upton that these discoveries might also be used in the treatment of diseases in plants and crops.
With the help of an electronic engineer, Upton designed his own version of an oscilloclast by substituting a radio frequency transmitter. And instead of using the vibratory rates in ohms which Abrams had devised, Upton used samples of certain chemicals and other “reagents”, which he found by trial and error.
Instead of a drop of blood which Abrams had used for diagnostic purposes, Upton took a leaf from the diseased plant and sprinkled on it a quantity of the appropriate chemical or reagent. Although the treated leaf might be many miles away from the diseased plant, Upton found that he was able to cure at a distance by means of his radio transmitter.
Upton found, in fact, that he could use his apparatus in two different ways. He could either stimulate the growth of a plant, in which case he would put a leaf on the input plate of his machine, and switch on the transmitter which had been set to a prescribed frequency that promoted growth. He could also use his machine to remove infestations of beetles or unwanted insects by treating a leaf of the affected plant or crop with an appropriate pattern of radio waves.
Upton found that after these treatments the insects had either been killed or else had moved away from the affected area. He then went on to make an extraordinary discovery. Instead of having to rely on actual leaves from diseased or pest-ridden crops, he found that he was able to treat a large area of crops simply by taking an aerial photograph.
What he did was to mark out a designated area in a field with white sheets. When photographed from the air these white sheets would appear on the photographic negative as black areas. Upton then cut away and burned all parts of the photographic negative which did not need to be treated.
After radionic treatment, he found that only that area marked by white sheets had benefitted. Everything outside this area remained unchanged. So confident was Upton of obtaining beneficial results, that he made it his practice not to charge for his services unless he was successful.
Another person who successfully carried on the ideas of Albert Abrams was Thomas Hieronymus. Hieronymus also adapted Abrams’ oscilloclast to his own ideas, this time utilising vacuum tubes for amplification and condensers for tuning. He applied for a patent for his unusual machine and was granted one by the United States Patent Office in 1949.
In his application for this patent, Hieronymus noted that it was based on the manipulation of energy radiated by known elements of matter. Although he was unable to say precisely what these radiations were, he thought that they were probably of an electrical nature. In 1956, Hieronymus presented a copy of his patent to John Campbell, who was a trained scientist, and editor at that time of Analog magazine.
At the suggestion of his friend Arthur Young, Campbell made a simplified model of the apparatus designed by Hieronymus. But instead of incorporating vacuum tubes and condensers, he merely drew a circuit diagram of the patented machine, with printed symbols in place of the component parts. To his utter amazement, Campbell found that this symbolic design achieved similar practical results to that of the actual apparatus used by Hieronymus!
It is hardly surprising that conventionally trained scientists and physicians found the extravagant claims of radionics impossible to swallow. Not only did they contravene the accepted understanding of physical science, but they also contradicted existing theories of medicine as well. To top it all, they flatly confounded all common sense.
While Abrams claimed to be able to intercept electrical “radiations” given off by human tissue on his oscilloclast, physicists could detect no trace of these radiations on their own sophisticated electrical equipment. Accepted physical theory did not even provide for the existence of such radiations.
Besides, the oscilloclast which Abrams had concocted was a rudimentary piece of electrical equipment which seemed hopelessly inadequate to achieve the type of results which he claimed to have obtained.
The idea that diseased tissue could be cured by means of radio waves was ridiculous enough, but that the diagnosis of such diseased tissue could be made from a single drop of blood seemed patently absurd. The ludicrous nature of the entire rationale of radionics was further compounded when Upton claimed to be able to cure plant diseases and destroy insect pests at a distance by the use of radio waves.
Credibility was strained even more when he claimed that he could eradicate these pests by simply treating an aerial photograph of the plants in question. There seemed little doubt that the entire subject belonged to the nether world of mumbo-jumbo when John Campbell announced to the world that he was able to achieve radionic healing by using a symbolic drawing of Hieronymus’ patented machine.
Because the need for a physical machine in obtaining these cures was seen to be unnecessary, the ideas on which these machines were based now seemed to be effectively demolished.
Yet there was one fact which no amount of medical or scientific contumely could deny, and that was that these methods worked. All of these people were able to achieve genuine results, in spite of their illogical theory and their hopelessly inadequate machines.
It was only much later that investigators into the claims of radionics began to recognise that a subtle interaction was taking place between the minds of the operators concerned and the physical effects associated with them.
This suggested that the weird contraptions invented by various practitioners were in fact incidental to their claims, and that since what was most likely occurring was a direct interaction between mind and matter, the machines themselves were ultimately not needed.
For this reason, the way in which these interactions came to be rationalised and explained was equally irrelevant. As Edward Russell has pointed out:
“Young, therefore, was probably the first to realize – and Campbell the first to demonstrate – that mind and pattern are the key to radionics, and that the type of instrument used is of secondary importance because the instrument only serves to focus the thoughts of the operator”. 10
This secondary importance of the role of the equipment involved has also been emphasised by researcher James Beal:
“The machines perform no understood function by themselves, based on our present understanding in physics. They appear to have been developed over the years by their inventors in a deductive fashion and definite relationships seem to exist between shape, materials used, texture, arrangement of components, and size of components. Persons using this equipment appear to act as receivers of information on the subconscious level.”11
Just how effective each practitioner was clearly depended upon the calibre of their minds. Those who doubted the entire theory found that they could get no results at all, while those who had some facility in this field found that they could achieve modest results, albeit with the aid of a machine.
Finally, there were certain exceptional people found that they could not only get positive results, but that they could even dispense with the need for any form of machine altogether.
To the intuitive investigator, it seemed evident that the mind was capable of influencing matter in ways which defied the accepted laws of science. The fact that it did so, however, did not so much deny the validity of these laws, as to suggest that they were actually mind-made, and that having been made by mind, they could be re-made whenever conditions were appropriate.
Another example of the power of the mind to influence matter was exhibited by two Americans who claimed to have invented what they called “free-energy machines”. Unfortunately, John Keely and Edwin Babbitt took their secrets with them to the grave. However, another American was sufficiently intrigued by their claims to conduct experiments of his own. His name was Henry Moray.
In his youth Moray was inspired by the work of the extraordinary American-Croatian genius Nikola Tesla, and especially by his claims of energy sources that were infinitely greater than those that had already been discovered. After completing his schooling at Salt Lake City, Utah, Moray pursued his interest in electrical engineering and obtained his doctorate from the University of Uppsala in Sweden.
Soon after his return to the United States he succeeded in designing a “free energy” device that was capable of generating considerable amounts of electrical energy. One prototype, which weighed just sixty pounds (27 kilograms), was able to produce 50,000 watts of energy.
Because his device incorporated the use of a cold cathode tube, which was known to be incapable of generating electricity, it was immediately dismissed by other scientists as fraudulent. Moray was denied a patent by the U.S. Patent Office because he was unable to identify the source of energy utilised by his machine.
Although Moray successfully demonstrated his device before numerous other scientists and engineers, and on one occasion even took his equipment several miles into the country so that he could not be accused of surreptitiously using a hidden source of energy, Moray’s invention continued to be ignored by science. When he died in 1974, his dreams of tapping a vast reservoir of unknown energy for the benefit of humanity had proved a dismal failure.
The tragedy of Henry Moray was that there was no room to accommodate him at the inn of modern science. His ideas remained outcast, since they were unable to be incorporated within the dominant scientific paradigm of his times. Fortunately for humanity, Moray’s ideas have continued to survive via his book “The Sea of Energy in which Earth Floats”, awaiting the day when science is finally ready to embrace a new view of reality.
It is not difficult to see the parallels here between the responses of the medical fraternity to the claims of radionics, and the reaction of the scientific community to the free energy devices created by Keely, Babbitt and Moray. In both cases, startling new ideas were advanced which were completely at odds with the accepted paradigm of science.
The fact that these pioneers could point to successful practical results did not prevent them from being cast out as heretics for having had the temerity to challenge the accepted scientific way of thinking.
The problem which confronted Moray, just as it did Albert Abrams and others before him, was that they were unable to incorporate their theories into the established paradigm of their peers. Yet all these men were profoundly scientific in their methodology and embarked upon an empirical search for substantiation of their hypotheses according to the established protocols of science.
That they were condemned was not because they were poor scientists, but because their results conflicted with what accepted thinking had decreed. The fundamental difficulty which confronted such inventive men as Moray, Abrams and Hieronymus, was that they were unable to explain why they had obtained their results.
Based on their intuition, each had proceeded in a certain way and had achieved certain practical results. In order to gain the acceptance of their peers, however, it was necessary for them to explain how their results had been obtained. Since these fell outside of the existing paradigm of thought, this was a task which clearly lay beyond them.
The true explanation of such enigmatic phenomena as radionics and free-energy machines rests with the insights of the mystics. Since, they avow, the universe is not some vast objective reality that exists outside of ourselves, but is a subjective creation in consciousness, there can be no a priori rules which govern the functioning of the universe.
What we find therefore is what we seek. And what we seek is determined by what we believe. Where thought is sufficiently strong it inevitably comes to imprint itself on physical reality. How it does so does not require adherence to some consistent set of rules, for each obtains results according to their predetermined beliefs.
Abrams obtained radiations from human tissue because he believed it was possible to do so. Scientists and conventional medical practitioners find no evidence of these radiations because they have been taught to believe they do not exist. Yet if they could only be persuaded to change their way of thinking, they would undoubtedly find evidence to support them.
The world is full of examples of people who do things that defy conventional scientific thinking. The fact that they do so is not only a tribute to their faith, but also proof that the universe is not bound by scientific law, as will be seen in the following instalment.
Continued in Part Three
References:
5 “I Am That”, Conversations with Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, translated by Maurice Frydman, Book I, Chetana, Bombay, 1973, p. 214.
6 “Tripura Rahasya”, translated by Swami Saraswathi, Sri Ramanasramam, Tiruvannamalai, 1962, p. 103.
7 Yoka Daishi, “Song of Enlightenment”, Verse 33, Quoted in “Manual of Zen Buddhism”, by D.T. Suzuki, Rider, London, 1983, p. 97.
8 Joseph Goodavage, “The Incredible Hieronymus Machine”, in “Future Science” edited by John White and Stanley, Krippner, Anchor, New York, 1977, p. 390.
9 Edward Russell, “Radionics – Science of the Future”, in “Future Science”, op.cit., pp. 366-385.
10 Ibid., p. 371.
11 James Beals, “Fields within Fields”, quoted in “Future Science”, op.cit., p. 340.
Allan, Our Magical World, February 21, 2019, 2:08 pm
We live in a universe of awesome majesty and size. Within this age-old cosmos, isolated galaxies pursue lonely paths through the desolate void of space. Set against this primeval darkness, these wandering galaxies shine with the light of a myriad glowing suns.
Within again these systems of solar light, tiny planetary satellites revolve. The earth, which is but a microcosm of this universal scheme, is our island home in space. Yet we who inhabit this world are dwarfed by its immensity and grandeur.
Its splendour has been the subject of epic tales of wonder, and its beauty the source of endless songs of praise. Our poets in every generation have set to rhyme the nature of this beauty, while our composers have sought to express the music of the spheres. Our lives in fact are daily acts of worship within this panoply of form.
But what lies behind this mystery of form? What secret ingredient lends its perfume to the petalled rose, or yields magic to a morning sunrise? What vital essence permeates an ice-clad peak, or animates the fury of the storm? What motivates our world of heat and light and power?
Our search for the meaning of these mysteries, and an understanding of the true nature of this world, has led us on an extraordinary journey. When we began our quest into the reality of the objective world, we used as an illustration the example of an oak tree.
Standing tall in our world of common experience, this oak tree appears to have undoubted existence and reality. Not only do we see it as an object separate from ourselves in space, but each one of our senses yields specific information about the tree which contributes to our overall evaluation. Thus, we are able to see its stature, feel its strength, taste and smell its texture, and hear it creaking in the wind.
Based on all these impressions that are conveyed to us by our senses, we naturally assume that the oak tree has an objective existence and material reality. We consider it to be a part of nature, part of the real world we see around us.
In reaching this conclusion we are joined by numerous other people who share our view, for in comparing the information which they receive from the tree, we find that their sensory impressions coincide exactly with our own. This leaves us in no doubt that the tree exists as part of a real, physical world that is experienced equally by ourselves and others.
This reality seems unquestioned, and hardly worthy of further examination.
Yet when we begin to analyse the nature of the world around us, this simple viewpoint of reality undergoes a disturbing transformation. When we examine our oak tree in the cold light of scientific understanding, we find that the tree itself is composed of long, wooden fibres which are densely packed together.
Upon closer study, these wooden fibres are found to consist of tiny cells which are in turn composed of specific molecules. These molecules are not solid bits of matter, however, for they themselves can be broken down into constituent atoms. Even these atoms are not basic indivisible units of matter, for they have been found to consist of yet smaller particles which are composed of energy.
Our oak tree thus resolves itself into complex patterns of energy that are constantly in motion. Not only is this energy in motion, but it continually sparkles into existence and vanishes out of existence again into nothing.
Our scientific investigation into the nature of the tree tells us that our oak tree is in fact pure energy, which emerges out of a residuum which physicists have called the quantum field. Yet there is nothing in these various patterns of energy that distinguishes them as our oak tree, for the particles which make up the tree are no different from the particles which make up all the other objects in the world.
Far from clarifying the nature of material objects, therefore, science seems to have robbed them of their meaning. Our tree no longer has form, objectivity or strength, for all of these features have disappeared upon examination into the simple movement of energetic particles.
Equally, the perfume that is exuded from the flower, or the song that can be heard in the murmuring of the surf cannot be found within the movement of the particles themselves, especially as they are held to move according to the random laws of chance.
Nature as illuminated by science turns out to be a meaningless affair. Those writers, poets and composers who have gloried in nature have responded to something that resides uniquely within themselves, for it is to be found nowhere within the scientific explanation of the world. As the British philosopher and mathematician Alfred North Whitehead observed:
“Nature gets credit which should in truth be reserved to ourselves; the rose for its scent, the nightingale for his song and the sun for its radiance. The poets are entirely mistaken. They should address their lyrics to themselves and should turn them into odes of self-congratulations on the excellency of the human mind. Nature is a dull affair, soundless, scentless, colourless, merely the hurrying of material, endlessly, meaninglessly.”1
The world of nature which surrounds us in such rich profusion carries no meaning until it is revealed in consciousness. It is only when the image of the oak tree appears in consciousness that we become aware of it and can tell of the impressions within consciousness which it engenders. These impressions appear to be derived through the agency of our physical senses.
When we investigate the process whereby exterior sensations are converted into interior impressions in consciousness, we find ourselves confronted by yet another difficulty. We discover that we are not able to determine precisely how sensory signals, in the form of electrical impulses, are converted into images in consciousness. Furthermore, we are unable to account for the origin and existence of consciousness itself, nor for its characteristic feature which is called the mind.
The idea that there exists an objective world outside of ourselves that is revealed to us via our senses is nothing more than an article of faith. It is so because we believe it is so.
No evidence has hitherto been led to justify this claim. What we have done has been to point to these images in consciousness as evidence of their objective reality. In other words, we have taken the existence of our sensory perceptions of matter and form outside of ourselves as proof that this is indeed so.
But there can never be any object in nature that exists outside of consciousness. As nuclear physicists have now conceded, if there actually is an objective, physical world which exists “out there” in space independently of consciousness, then they can say nothing about it, for all their conclusions are based upon information that resides in consciousness.
The fact that different observers happen to agree upon the nature of their observations is not in itself proof that these observations have an objective nature. It merely confirms that different people share similar perceptions in consciousness.
Mystics of every age have taught that all experience is mind-made, and as such can never be separated from the consciousness of the individual experiencer. The idea that what is contained within consciousness is representative of an actual outer world is therefore considered to be illusory.
The reason why the world is described by mystics as an illusion is not because it does not exist, but rather because what is acknowledged to exist is not representative of an outer reality. According to these mystics, there can never be an object without an accompanying observer, and correspondingly, that there can never be an observer without a world to interact with.
The fact that consciousness may sometimes appear to be blank, or devoid of images, does not detract from this intrinsic duality, for blankness is merely another form of image. Furthermore, as they point out, the idea of individual personality is itself illusory, for it is born of this duality.
It is the interaction with “objects” in experience which builds up the idea of personality. The personality is thus a residue of images and events which are retained in memory. It is nothing more or less than the sequential record of experience, and each personality becomes coloured by that experience.
This experiential sequence progresses from “birth” through to “death,” and forms a perceived lifetime of experience which is then attributed to that personality. All experience takes place within a faculty of expression in consciousness called “mind”. Upon investigation, the mind is found to be the sum of the contents of consciousness, which are thoughts.
These thoughts arise spontaneously in consciousness and are projected outwardly in the form of an outer world. The world, therefore, is a product of individual consciousness, and is projected by that consciousness. The world does not impinge on consciousness from without as the senses suggest. Instead, it is projected outwardly by consciousness, just as cinematic images are projected on a screen.
That the senses are not simply windows onto an objective and physical world is evidenced by our experience in the waking state of various forms of suggestion. Simply by means of suggestion, it is possible to make the eye see sights that are not part of the commonly accepted world, or hear spurious sounds, or vary the normal functioning of the senses.
The best example of the power of suggestion occurs in hypnosis. While hypnosis is usually regarded as a sleep-like condition, practitioners such as Kreskin emphasize that hypnosis is not a trance-like state in which normal waking consciousness is superseded.
Unless a specific suggestion of sleepiness is given, the subject continues to relate to his or her environment as if nothing unusual had occurred in their normal waking state. As Kreskin points out, the power of suggestion can cause the mind to project new images which are at complete odds with normal waking reality.
“Using only suggestion, tapping nothing but waiting imagination, I’ve had subjects seeing flying saucers or shivering in polar cold within two minutes, and audiences of six hundred dancing Irish jigs.”2
These experiences are by no means illusory to the people who experience them, for they remain adamantly convinced that these events formed an unbroken extension of their normal waking state, and that they “really” happened.
The basic challenge of what we take to be normal waking reality is this. If everyone projects a world of his or her own making, then how is it that different people agree on what they see and sense?
If, for example, a friend of mine should happen to visit my home, they will experience it in the same way I do. And if we both go to a place that neither of us has ever been before, we will find that we experience this new environment in precisely similar ways.
The answer to this conundrum is that everyone who shares a common experience of reality, has learned to construct that reality according to a similar pattern of ideas.
This construction begins shortly after birth and continues throughout adolescence and is usually fully developed by the time the child reaches puberty. The basic purpose of our cultural education is a deliberate process of ensuring that we do, in fact, succeed in creating a precisely similar world.
Our parents are our initial tutors, but this education is later continued by society at large. At stake is our ability to participate in a world of common experience. Not all children complete this course of education satisfactorily. When they fail, they are invariably branded as suffering from some or other pathological state of mind.
Membership of this common world can also be lost, often as a result of sudden emotional shock, causing the individual to substitute a new world scene, which is then interpreted by others as a form of insanity. This educational conditioning of mind is neatly summarised by Carlos Castaneda in speaking of his mentor, Don Juan:
“He pointed out that everyone who comes into contact with a child is a teacher who incessantly describes the world to him, until the moment when the child is capable of perceiving the world as it is described. From that moment on, however, the child is a member.
“He knows the description of the world; and his membership becomes full-fledged, I suppose, when he is capable of making all the proper perceptual interpretations which, by conforming to that description, validate it. For Don Juan, then, the reality of our day-to-day life consists of an endless flow of perceptual interpretations which we, the individuals who share a specific membership, have learned to make in common.” 3
Not only is our present waking condition the product of a process of conditioning, but this conformity is maintained moment by moment. Our world is not an enduring physical construct which existed long ages before we were born and will continue aeons after we are dead. Instead, it is a series of separate perceptions, created moment by moment, which are strung upon the thread of memory to provide congruence and consistency.
Just as separate frames of a cinematic image blur together to create the impression of an unbroken sequence, so do our momentary perceptions combine to form an unbroken sense of personality. Our world then is not the product of long evolutionary growth. It is a thing of momentary fragments. It is in this sense that the world is referred to by the Buddha as a “flickering lamp” and a “flash of lightning in a summer cloud”.
Having learned to project a common world in consciousness, we then seek to interact with this world according to the promptings of our personal desires. The actions born of these desires impact on others, just as the actions of others affect us. Of course, we only influence, and are in turn affected by, those who share our state of consciousness and our composite worldview.
Those who inhabit other states of mind are immune from our actions, and we theirs. Because every action, like every ripple in a pond, extends outwards to affect the entire content of consciousness, however weakly, we cannot talk of any one event as being the result of any one single cause.
Whatever happens in this constructed world of ours occurs as a result of the combined interaction of all desires, just as a pond reflects at any one time the combined result of all disturbances. Our actions, therefore, not only affect ourselves, but reach out to the furthermost stars in our heavens. It is for this reason that Nisargadatta Maharaj has said:
“Like everything mental, the so-called law of causation contradicts itself. Nothing in existence has a particular cause; the entire universe contributes to the existence of even the smallest thing; nothing could be as it is without the universe being what it is. When the source and ground of everything is the only cause of everything, to speak of causality as a universal law is wrong.”4
While the manifestation of the apparent universe is a product of its constituent thoughts and desires, the actual conditions of life experienced by any individual will always be dominated by his or her thoughts. If the world is a projection of the mind, and if the mind is the sum of a person’s thoughts and desires, then it is these very thoughts and desires that are the major determinants of that person’s experiences in life.
Now the thoughts that come to influence our lives most strongly, are those thoughts which are most firmly imprinted in consciousness. Once we have understood this fundamental truth, we see why it is that so much emphasis has always been placed upon the nature of belief. Our beliefs are those thoughts which we have come to accept as being true, usually by virtue of our education and cultural conditioning.
It is our beliefs which form our basic concepts of the world, and it is these beliefs that determine the way in which it manifests.
According to our beliefs, so are our experiences in life. Those thoughts which are reinforced by constant repetition form a powerful force and draw into manifestation their counterpart in matter. As we have seen from the teachings of the Sages, the creative power of thought rests upon certain requirements. In order for thought to influence matter or circumstance, they must first be clearly defined.
Thoughts which are vaguely formulated, or which are themselves counteracted by conflicting thoughts, usually in the form of doubts and fears, lack creative power. Their creative nature depends upon their clarity as well as the force with which they are held. This force is based upon the strength of desire.
Where the desire to experience a particular objective is strong, and the equivalent thought form is resolutely held in mind, circumstances within our world conspire to bring about the fulfilment of that desire.
It follows that faith is a necessary partner is this process. Faith is the capacity to hold onto a particular belief in the absence of physical evidence, in the confident expectation that the object of desire will subsequently manifest in reality. As the thirteenth century mystic St. Thomas Aquinas has confirmed: “The light of faith makes us see what we believe.”
Two other factors contribute to the efficacy of our thoughts. They are will and emotion. Will is a particular cast of mind. It is a characteristic which reinforces desire despite the presence of contrary conditions. It reveals itself in the capacity of the mind to overcome these limitations. It is the will to succeed. Where the will is strong, the power to create is equally strong.
Finally, any thought can be empowered by its association with emotion. Those thoughts which are supported by highly charged emotions become powerful forces for change. The Sages have taught that the world of our experience is not the creation of some divine being or supreme power, nor are we the victims of destiny or chance.
They have assured us, based on the conviction born of personal experience, that we are the masters of our souls and the architects of our lives. We are free to spin whatever cosmic web of thought that we desire. These Sages require only that we take responsibility for our lives, and not blame our limitations on others or on a punitive God. Our world is thus the true haven of our dreams.
We are free to make of it a heaven or a hell.
Continued in Part Two
References:
1 Quoted in “Introduction to Comparative Mysticism”, by J. De Marquette, Philosophical Library, New York, 1949, p. 15.
2 Kreskin, “The Amazing World of Kreskin”, Avon, New York, 1974, p. 124.
3 Carlos Castaneda, “Journey to Ixtlan”, Simon and Schuster, New York, 1972, p. 9.
4 “I Am That”, Conversations with Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, translated by Maurice Frydman, Book I, Chetana, Bombay, 1973, p. 10.
Allan, Our Magical World, February 8, 2019, 1:10 pm
There is a symbol that stares at us through the hazy mists of antiquity. Its origins lie lost in the antediluvian world. It is a symbol which has been renewed in meaning from one culture to another, and from age to age. It has formed a powerful source of fascination for the human mind. This symbol is the maze.
At first glance, the maze seems to be nothing more than an intricate pattern of concentric lines. However, on closer examination, this convoluted pattern has been formed from a single unbroken line. This meandering line starts at the circumference of the circle, and after a series of tortuous turns arrives at the centre. From there it proceeds back towards the outer fringe, as depicted below.
The Chartres Labyrinth
The labyrinthine features of the maze were adopted by the early Christian Church, and this symbol was incorporated into the foundation of some of its grandest structures. Perhaps the largest of these labyrinths, shown here, is set out in the nave of Chartres Cathedral. It measures some forty-two feet (13 metres) across the floor.
Another classic example of this symbol can be found carved in stone on the walls of the cathedral at Lucca in Italy. Other examples of labyrinths can be found in cathedrals at Amiens, Bayeux, Sens and Poitiers in France. While these symbols were most commonly portrayed in the form of a circle, they were also constructed in rectangular or octagonal forms.
The symbol of the maze did not originate with the early Christians, however, but was derived from earlier sources dating back to the ancient Egyptians. The maze was also an integral part of Greek culture. According to Hellenistic mythology, the hero Theseus killed the legendary beast called the Minotaur that lurked within the labyrinthine tunnels of Knossos in Crete.
Throughout the centuries, the intricate meanderings of the maze have come to represent in symbolic form the deepest truth of the human evolutionary adventure. The maze is, in fact, a mandala (esoteric symbol) of the cosmic web.
The maze is a symbol of the universe, that wondrous artifice of thought which we have learned to spin. The world which we have taken to be a solid, separate and objective mass is, in truth, a subjective phenomenon – a stream of images displayed upon the screen of consciousness.
The universe of ours is moulded by experience and varies with experience. When we examine our subjective states of experience, we classify them into dreams, visions, hallucinations and the like. Each one of these states is a montage of images that is projected by the mind of each individual and is unique to that individual.
My dream is unique to me. It is not shared by others even though it seems to be populated by a host of other living forms. In a similar way we do not share our visions or drug-induced hallucinations. The content of each visionary experience is determined by the content of each mind, and represents a creative interplay of those thoughts, memories, expectations, desires and fears which characterise each individual mind.
Our worlds of visionary experience are not fixed worlds. They do not operate according to fixed laws of behaviour. The experiences of our dream worlds are infinitely plastic and can be moulded into unlimited panoramas of expression.
The true nature of our waking world is challenged by the examples of our dreams and other visionary hallucinations, which are direct subjective creations of our minds. In contrast with these subjective experiences, we have become conditioned into believing that our waking experiences are unique, and that they alone represent the real world.
We have been taught to believe that this world of objective form exists independently of our minds and operates according to pre-ordained laws. Yet our dreams and drug hallucinations do not defer to some divine creator. We alone are the creators of our dreams.
The creatures that inhabit our dreams are not the product of some pre-ordained system of evolution. They do not slowly evolve over aeons of time into the form in which we experience them in the dream. They are in fact momentary projections in consciousness, sustaining their existence with the unfolding saga of the dream.
When we wake, our dream worlds resolve themselves again into consciousness. They do not continue to undergo some separate existence from our minds, until such time as we choose to revisit them.
We are the creators and destroyers of the universes of our dreams. In a similar way, each one of us spins a web of thought, sustained by belief, which becomes for us our waking world of “reality”.
We learn to project our worlds according to certain patterns of belief that are common to our culture. In this way we come to share worlds which are common to those who think like us. Having created this subjective world of expression, we imagine that all people who inhabit our world share similar worlds which have the same content as our own, and which function in similar ways according to similar sets of rules.
This actually is the case for those who think exactly like us. But there are numerous other people who do not share our culture or our beliefs and who do not think as we do. They create for themselves very different worlds of expression. These other worlds are inhabited by different sorts of beings and operate according to different sets of rules.
The fundamental truth is that there is no objective universe out there in space. And the universe that we experience is experienced differently by different people. There is no single universe that is common to all souls.
Among those who create worlds of richer experience than our own are those people we call psychics. These “sensitives” create worlds for themselves which are not only far more vivid in terms of colour and intensity but are also populated by a far more diverse range of beings. They interact with ethereal beings that are invisible in our world.
As much as we might like to share their window on a wider world, we find that we are unable to do so, for as long as we hold steadfastly to our foundations of belief – those fundamental principles of thought which have given our world its distinctive and definitive character. Once we choose to change these underlying tenets however, we find that our world becomes transformed in harmony with these changes.
Each one of us lives a life within that web of expression that we call the universe – our waking world of projection. When we die this experience of interaction with form does not end. The experience of being continues, and the sense of identity remains, albeit on another plane of consciousness.
These after-death experiences draw their character from those actions which we have initiated during our waking world of life and are shaped by our motives and desires. If we sow pain in our worldly state of consciousness, we reap pain in the after-death state. If we generate joy on the earthly plane, we experience the delights of the heavenly realm.
Our after-death experiences in consciousness thus come to reflect a balance, or karmic character which yields to each the due reward of those seeds of action which were sown during the pre-death state. Our lives are comprised of a sequence of experiences in consciousness.
In the unfolding dream of consciousness, we therefore vacillate from “living” state to “death” state, and back again to the “living” state. This cycle continues endlessly, for as long as we continue to be the initiators of our actions. Within each incarnation, we spin a web of thought which is in harmony with our beliefs.
None of these webs are permanent and none of them are perpetuated. At the end of each incarnation we withdraw the threads of each web which we have so laboriously spun, back into our own source of consciousness, only to repeat this process in another cycle of rebirth.
No matter how grand our universe of expression, and no matter how satisfying our experience may be, we always remain bound by the limits of the web that we have spun for ourselves. Every web that we spin is a product of our beliefs, those thoughts which have become deeply imprinted on our minds.
Yet by changing the nature of these thoughts we can enlarge or reduce our webs. We can also refine them or make them coarser. The contents of our living experiences are dependent on the webs which we have spun. The finer the web that we create, the more delicate will be the creatures of consciousness that we will find manifested therein.
If our webs are coarsely spun, with large spaces between the strands, the subtler manifestations of consciousness pass through these spaces. It is not that we are prevented from experiencing them. It is just that our webs are too coarse to reveal their presence. The remedy is to refine our thinking, and to re-make our webs in more subtle ways so as to trap these desired experiences.
The maze that appears on the floor of Chartres cathedral symbolically depicts the web of thought that represents our world. It is composed of a single strand that leads outwards, by complicated convolutions, to the circumference of the web.
This web can equally well be unravelled, by pursuing the thread back to its point of origin.
There is but a single way to overcome the limitations of the web. This way is shown by the outline of the maze. It is the secret of its symbolism and the reason for its enduring charm. The web must consciously and painstakingly be unravelled, by steadily following the thread back to its source.
The Sages have consistently taught that the way to overcome the limitations of our worldly web is by retracing our thoughts back to their origin in consciousness. It is by steadily pursuing our thoughts to their source that we unravel the web of our own creation, and so free ourselves from the limits of the web.
The mystery of the maze hides another profound secret. When the thread that creates the maze is followed to its source, it ends in the emptiness of the Void. The heart of the labyrinth yields nothing but emptiness. Yet it is that emptiness which is the plenum of all created life.
To reach the fountain of Supreme Truth, it is necessary to transcend the Void, that Ungrund of outer darkness which shields the inner light. Those who finally reach this inmost Sanctuary, have to pass through that ring of darkness which St John of the Cross has called “the dark night of the soul”.
Those who persist in their efforts to cross over to the farther shore, however, find a joy that is beyond all telling. It is living at its most abundant, unlimited and without end.
The idea that there can be life beyond the nihilism, emptiness and darkness of personal extinction, defies the intellectual mind. We simply cannot comprehend life other than through our customary conscious experience.
The difficulty which confronts the mind is that it attempts to form a concept of illimitable experience. This attempt is doomed to failure. The limited mind is quite unable to conceive of an experience that is without any form of limitation. All words fail in their efforts to describe it.
No concept, no matter how subtle, can define it. Yet the desire to eat of this divine confection is countered by the fear that we might not like its taste. Anxious to forestall this possibility, we attempt to derive beforehand an idea of what it is we may finally hope to achieve.
Even though we can acknowledge the limitation of the mind, we nevertheless resolutely seek to reduce Reality to corporeality, and so dress the illimitable in clothes of thought, before deciding whether it really is worth striving for.
Having severed the knot of identity which strings images together in consciousness, the Sage does not react to these images from the standpoint of personality. They come, and they go, and there is no desire to link successive images. Yet from the viewpoint of the observer, the Sage continues to act and speak just like a normal, rational human being.
The Sage encompasses all consciousnesses and all worlds, and yet it is not limited by their content. The Sage experiences things as others experience them. The Sage feels and shares the thoughts and feelings of others as if they were his or her own experience. Yet the Sage remains beyond the reach of all experience. Being at the heart of all experience, the Sage is all-knowing.
Again and again we try to look into the mind of the Sage to see as he sees, and to try to grasp the action of his mind. What we fail to recognise is that the Sage is truly mindless, and does not evaluate the images of perception, which do not remain stuck in memory upon the screen of consciousness.
Jesus promised all those who truly sought the deathless state, which was likened to a jewel beyond value, that their wish would be fulfilled. But the price that would have to be paid for this supreme gift was personal sacrifice – the voluntary dissolution of the ego.
Jesus coerced no one. He merely invited those who wished to be like him to adopt the path which he had followed. He was the Way, and his life was the Truth. His Way remains equally valid to this day and has been trod alike by every Sage.
The idea of giving up personal identity, of surrendering individual desire, is a prospect which fills us all with horror. What lies beyond appears as forbidding as the grave, shorn of all laughter, fun and joy, and of every quality which makes our lives worth living. The Sage coaxes us to trust, and not to fall prey to these fears.
He who would save his life, declared Jesus, would lose it. But he who was prepared to sacrifice his own life would gain all things, in a life of boundless joy. This is the acid test of the mature seeker – the willingness to sacrifice the known in the anticipation of the unknown.
We shrink from this call to impersonality, fearing in this sacrifice the loss of personal identity, which is the vital core of our being.
Of all the preoccupations of the mind, the most persistent and captivating is the idea of personality. At each moment of our lives we are involved in a constant search for satisfaction according to the dictates of this identity. We are all obsessed with the idea that we are bound to a particular body that was born in time, and will in turn, succumb to death.
The Truth cannot be grasped by the conscious mind. Every attempt to encompass it must inevitably fail. Yet the earnest desire to experience it creates the conditions which allow it to suddenly shine forth.
If there are few who experience this fullness of Reality, it is because there are few who are willing to lay down the burden of their lives. They would rather strive to improve their temporal condition than abandon it completely.
The Sage is immersed in this Reality and is anxious to reveal the way to overcome all suffering. The Sage sees no difference between this Reality and other persons. All are rooted in the one Reality. Because he knows this Reality, he is ever free from the limitations of unreality.
Those of us who have mistaken this illusory unreality for reality, continue to be trapped in its limiting web. The Sage points out the nature of the web that imprisons us. It is then up to us to extricate ourselves from its cloying strands.
For many, the effort to understand and learn dwarfs their analytical powers. They instinctively resent the mental struggle that is necessary to seek out the origin of their selves. Yet for them, burdened by the weight of many sorrows, there is still hope and the promise of salvation. Enlightenment can still be gained, but only if they truly want it above all things.
The choice is always ours. We are always free to abandon the ways which have led us into pain, sorrow, illness and despair. But it is only when we have truly come to see the folly of our ways and long for release that we are ready to turn within and awaken to our Reality.
We first have to be convinced of the need for change. All too often we confess that we are simply unfitted for this task.
But, for as long as we remain dominated by the desire to experience, we are obliged to keep on spinning. And it is this process of spinning that binds us to the unending cycle of life and death. Birth leads to death which leads again to rebirth.
Whatever the fruits of our spinning, they are lost each time we die, and we start each life anew with nothing save the desire again to experience. Once again, we laboriously spin our cosmic web which is the arena of our desire.
For as long as we choose to spin, we are bound by the limits of our web. It is only when we have become satiated with the chore of spinning that we are finally ready to begin to unravel the web that we have spun.
Only then do we begin our journey back to the centre of the maze, by steadily unravelling the luminous thread of the “I am”. And only when we have succeeded in pursuing it to its source, do we rediscover our true nature, and the fact that we were never bound.
We are free to spin for as long as we choose to experience. We are under no duress to change. There is no timetable to our lives. We have all eternity to spin.
Yet in the course of spinning, there will come a day for each one of us when we will long to be free of our cosmic web. No skill or expertise in spinning will then satisfy this yearning. The pangs of this desire will prompt us to unravel the web that we have spun, and voluntarily destroy the personality which we have built.
In the course of this unravelling, we will have to face the death of our individual personality. Yet it is a death which leads to a glorious resurrection. We will be reborn into a world of immortality, beyond the clasp of pain and the trammels of time and space.
The moment we choose to don this cloak of bliss depends on us. We can do it now, or we can leave it for a billion lifetimes hence.
Yet whatever our condition, whatever heaven or hell we have personally constructed for ourselves, we are destined to be free. No amount of spinning can ultimately deter us from this goal. We will be free because we are already free. We have only to shed the blinkers from our eyes.
The morning of this awakening advances on us NOW!
Allan, The Mystery of the Maze, January 24, 2019, 2:09 pm
This is a tale of two clerics. Although they were born and raised on opposite sides of the world, their lives were fated to become intertwined in a way that neither of them could possibly have imagined, for they have both become key players in the fulfilment of Bible prophecy.
Fethullah Gulen
The name of the first cleric is Muhammed Fethullah Gülen. Gülen was born in the tiny village of Korucuk, not far from the Turkish city of Erzurum. His actual date of birth however, is uncertain. While some say that he was born on 10 November 1938, others contend that this should be 27 April 1941.
According to his biographer, the reason for this difference is that his parents waited for three years to register his birth. Critics however, say that the earlier date was deliberately chosen to coincide with the death of Mustafa Kemal Atatürk, the founder of modern Turkey.
The Early Years
His father was an Imam, an Islamic leader of a mosque according to the Sunni tradition, while his mother was a teacher of the Quran in the village in which they lived. Although he lacked a formal education, the young Gülen was given a religious education when his family later moved to Erzurum.
It is said that he gave his first sermon at the age of 14, and that he was particularly attracted to the teachings of a Kurdish Sunni Muslim theologian named Said Nursi, who taught that modern science and logic was the way of the future, and that science should be taught in all religious schools.
Having completed his religious education, Gülen went on to become an Imam like his father. In 1966, he moved from Erzerum to a mosque in Izmir, a city on the eastern shores of the Mediterranean Sea. It was here that he soon captivated congregations with his inspiring orations.
While his sermons were devoted mostly to matters of the Islamic faith, he nevertheless urged his listeners to embrace capitalism and to combine their education with social activism.
Because the city of Izmir consisted primarily of Muslims who were drawn to western ideas, his teachings soon attracted millions of followers, both within the country and abroad. These teachings were the foundation of what became known as the Gülen movement.
The Gülen Movement
Also known as Hizmet (the Turkish word for “service”), the Gülen movement became a transnational Islamic social movement that was founded on the principles of peace within a civil society, as well as universal access to education based, as we have seen, on modern science and logic.
Over the years the Gülen movement has founded schools, universities, student organizations, radio and television studios and newspapers, and its members include students, teachers, businessmen, academics, journalists and other professionals.
By the year 2017, it was estimated that over a million Turks had been educated in Hizmet schools and universities, including the son-in-law of Recep Erdogan, the current president of Turkey. These schools can be found today in more than 160 countries all over the globe.
Because this movement is not a centralized organization, but rather a set of loosely organized networks of people inspired by Gülen, it is difficult to say accurately how many people may have been involved. But a 1997 estimate stated that up to four million people had been influenced by his ideas.
Gülen continued to perform his clerical duties up until 1981, when he retired from his formal duties as an Imam. For the next twenty years or so he devoted himself to giving sermons in various Turkish cities, as he travelled around the country spreading his ideas.
Moving to America
Early in 1999 however, Gülen developed serious health problems and went to the United States for treatment. Following his recovery, he applied to become a permanent resident in the United States. Although ultimately successful, his application for a Green Card was mired in controversy.
Gülen initially applied for permanent residence on the basis that he was “an alien of extraordinary ability” specializing in the field of education. This application was rejected by the U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Service on the grounds that he had no degree and had published no academic works.
Yet despite the objections of the FBI, the State Department and the Department of Homeland Security, his application was finally approved as a result of personal letters of recommendation written on his behalf by three former operatives of the CIA.
Gülen subsequently retired to a 25-acre wooded estate known as the Golden Generation Worship and Retreat Centre, which was run by members of his movement that was located a few miles from Saylorsburg, a tiny village in Pennsylvania. He has remained there to this day.
Having never married, he continues to lead a spartan and reclusive life. His living quarters consist of two small rooms, one of which has a mattress on the floor, a prayer mat, a desk, bookshelves and a treadmill. Nearby is a hall which residents use as a mosque.
Today Gülen spends his time writing and studying Islamic scripture. He also gives speeches that are broadcast to members of the movement around the world, as well as occasional interviews with journalists and media outlets that are not affiliated with the Hizmet movement.
One might have imagined that over time the name of Fethullah Gülen would have faded into obscurity, especially in the country of his birth. Instead his name has been reviled and he has become the central figure in a brutal reign of terror that has manifested on the other side of the world.
The Emerging Tyrant
Gülen had always professed his support for a Turkish state that promoted a tolerant form of Islam emphasizing altruism, education and hard work. For this reason, he was an early supporter of the Justice and Development Party (AKP) founded in 2001 by Recep Erdogan.
However, things began to change in 2013 when the AKP was accused of a massive corruption scandal involving both Erdogan and his son, who was living in Italy at the time while studying for a PhD at the Bologna campus of America’s Johns Hopkins University.
Turkish prosecutors named 14 people, including several family members of cabinet ministers, of bribery, fraud, money-laundering and corruption, accusing them of being involved in a scheme designed to bypass United States sanctions on Iran.
It was at this time that five audio recordings appeared on YouTube in which Erdogan appeared to be telling his son to hide very large sums of money. Although Erdogan later acknowledged that the voice was his, he claimed that the recordings had been tampered with to include false information.
Erdogan adamantly insisted that neither he nor his son were involved in any wrongdoing. Instead, he maintained that these accusations were instigated by the Hizment movement, and that it was Fethullah Gülen himself who was to blame for spreading these malicious rumours.
The Abortive Coup
It was in the aftermath of this uproar that the ruling party announced that Erdogan would resign as Prime Minister and stand for the office of President in the upcoming elections. And in August 2014 he was elected with a majority of 52% of the popular vote.
Erdogan had already begun to reveal strong authoritarian tendencies before he was elected President, but it was his response to the attempted coup just a few years later that completed his transformation from pragmatic politician to yet another ruthless dictator.
On 15th July 2016, while President Erdogan was on holiday at Marmaris, a tourist resort on the shoreline of the Turkish Riviera, a group of military officers launched an attempted coup. Fortunately, Erdogan was able to fly back to Istanbul in time to quell this rebellion.
No sooner had this insurrection been suppressed when Erdogan again blamed Fethullah Gülen for instigating this attempted coup. What made this accusation so surprising to outsiders was that Gülen was living in Pennsylvania at the time and had remained there since 1999.
Undaunted by this absurdity, Erdogan immediately turned his wrath on all those who he claimed were followers of the Gülen movement in Turkey. What followed was nothing short of a nation-wide pogrom directed at anyone deemed to be an enemy of the state, as defined by Erdogan himself.
Calling this attempted coup “a gift from God”, Erdogan initiated a state-wide purge designed to cleanse the nation of any sympathizer of the Hizmet movement, by dehumanising its prominent members and placing them in custody. He even freed existing prisoners in order to make room for them.
To date Erdogan’s government has dismissed more than 150,000 judges, teachers, police and civil servants. On April 18, 2018, the Turkish Interior Minister announced that 169,013 people had been the subject of legal proceedings, and that 77,081 had been imprisoned.
The Failed Abduction
Not content with directing his wrath at citizens within his own country, Erdogan also directed his agents to target and abduct others who were living outside of the country. His reach even extended to a Turkish educator who had been living in Mongolia for the past twenty-five years.
Although the Turkish government insists that it only extradites suspected Gülenists with the permission of the foreign governments involved, this was clearly not the case with educator Veysel Akcay, who ran a network of international schools associated with the Gülen movement.
Early one morning in July 2018, Mr. Akcay was approached by three masked men near his apartment building in the capital, Ulan Bator, when he was bundled into a Toyota minivan and taken to the airport. A short time later, a Bombardier jet operated by the Turkish Air Force landed there.
Mr Akcay was lucky. As word leaked out about his abduction, his friends and family congregated at the airport. Later that afternoon, the Mongolian government ordered the plane to be grounded. Mr. Akcay was released, and the jet fled back to Turkey without him. But others have not been so fortunate.
Earlier in 2018, Turkey’s National Intelligence Organization (MIT) announced that six Turkish nationals had been captured in Kosovo and had been flown back to Turkey on the same day. This was confirmed by The Turkish Foreign Minister who said that over 100 people had been abducted abroad.
Naturally, the concern within the Hizmet movement was whether Gülen himself would be abducted from his retreat in Pennsylvania. And according to a report in The Wall Street Journal on November 10, 2017, an attempt was made to do so shortly after President Trump was elected.
The alleged plan involved now disgraced former National Security Advisor to the President Michael Flynn and his son. According to this report, Flynn was to be paid 15 million dollars to forcibly kidnap Gülen and fly him in a private jet to the Turkish prison island of Imrali.
According to former CIA Director James Woolsey, this was “a covert attempt in the dead of night to whisk this guy away”. For his efforts, which fortunately did not come to fruition, General Flynn and his son have since become subjects of a criminal investigation by Special Counsel Robert Mueller.
The Second Cleric
Andrew and Norine Brunson
And that brings us to the second cleric in this convoluted story. His name is Andrew Brunson. Brunson hails from Black Mountain, a small town located on the outskirts of the Pisgah National Forest in the American state of North Carolina, where he was born in 1968.
After leaving school, Brunson attended Trinity Evangelical Divinity School just north of Chicago, where he gained a Master of Arts degree in 1991. He then went on to become a pastor in the Evangelical Presbyterian Church, where he expressed an interest in serving the church abroad.
It was in the Biblical town of Smyrna, now known as the Turkish city of Izmir, that the lives of these two clerics first became intertwined. For two years after graduating from Trinity, Brunson and his wife Norine moved to Turkey where he served as pastor of the Resurrection Church in Izmir.
For the next 23 years, Brunson continued to live in Izmir where he raised three children while ministering to a small Protestant congregation of about two dozen people. Having lived there happily for so long, he finally applied to the Turkish government for permanent residency in 2016.
On the morning of 7 October 2016, Brunson and his wife were summoned to the Police station in Izmir. Thinking that this was in connection with their residency application, both went along willingly. But when they got there, Andrew and Norine were taken into custody.
To their surprise and dismay, they were told that they had engaged in missionary activities that were “against national security”, and that because of this they and their family would be deported. Although Norine was released thirteen days later, Andrew remained in prison.
On 11 December 2016, he was moved to a counterterrorism centre and charged with being a spy with links to the outlawed Kurdistan People’s Party (KPP), as well as being a member of FETO, the Fethullah Gülen Terrorist Organization, as President Erdogan liked to call it.
In short, it soon became apparent that Brunson had become enmeshed in Erdogan’s web of terror following the abortive coup. Because Brunson was an American citizen, his wife Norine made repeated appeals to the Trump administration to intercede on his behalf.
In March 2017, then Secretary of State Rex Tillerson visited Turkey where he met with senior officials, including Erdogan himself. He also had a 20-minute meeting with Norine, who expressed her gratitude on Facebook for the chance to discuss her husband’s incarceration.
Although a State Department spokesman would not confirm whether Tillerson had discussed the case of Andrew Brunson in his talks with Turkish officials, there was at least one good outcome from his visit. On 25 July 2018, Brunson was released from prison and held under house arrest.
Presidential Fireworks
After Rex Tillerson had returned to the United States following his visit to Turkey, the US position regarding the continued captivity of pastor Brunson was clearly expressed by John R. Bass, the US Ambassador to Turkey, who had this to say on the matter:
“He appears to be held simply because he’s an American citizen who as a man of faith was in contact with a range of people in this country who he was trying to help, in keeping with his faith”.
And Mike Pompeo, who had replaced Tillerson as Secretary of State, followed this up with a statement of his own. “We have seen no credible evidence against Mr. Brunson and call on Turkish authorities to resolve this case immediately in a transparent and fair manner”.
It did not take long for President Trump to weigh in with a tweet of his own.
“Pastor Andrew Brunson, a fine gentleman and Christian leader in the United States, is on trial and being persecuted in Turkey for no reason. They call him a Spy, but I am more a Spy than he is. Hopefully he will be allowed to come home to his beautiful family where he belongs!”
Trump then followed this up with a tweet that was copied to Erdogan’s personal account, saying: “A total disgrace that Turkey will not release a respected U.S. Pastor, Andrew Brunson, from prison. He has been held hostage far too long”.
Trump went on to say that the US would impose “large sanctions” on Turkey if they did not comply. This threat triggered an immediate response from the Turkish authorities. The Turkish Foreign Minister Mevlut Cavusoglu issued a tweet of his own, saying:
“No one dictates to Turkey. We will never tolerate threats from anybody. Rule of law is for everyone; no exception”.
A spokesman for the Foreign Ministry, Hami Aksoy, said that the American threats were “unacceptable”, and that “it is impossible to accept the U.S. Administration’s threatening messages, which totally disregard our alliance and friendly relations between our countries”.
Never one to back away from a fight, President Trump followed this up by demonstrating that his words were no idle threat, and by issuing the following tweet on 10 August 2018:
“I have just authorized a doubling of Tariffs on Steel and Aluminum with respect to Turkey as their currency, the Turkish Lira, slides rapidly downward against our very strong Dollar! Aluminum will now be 20% and Steel 50%”.
President Erdogan responded by announcing that pastor Brunson would not be released, and that countervailing tariffs would be levied on a variety of US imports, including cars, tobacco and alcoholic drinks, and that Turkey would in future boycott all American electronic goods.
All of this prompted Asli Aydintasbas, a fellow of the European Council on Foreign Relations, to wonder where this outburst between two combustible presidents would lead:
“The combination of the personalities of Mr. Erdogan and Mr. Trump leave everyone guessing as to the outcome. It is possible that, in seven or eight months, Brunson will be sitting in his home in North Carolina, Atilla will be back in Turkey, and Trump will be raving about Erdogan on Twitter once again.”
Ms. Aydintasbas was referring here to a proposed deal to exchange Andrew Brunson for Mehmet Hakan Atilla, a Turkish banker who had been convicted by an American court and was now in a US prison. However, she went on to warn:
“But it is also possible that Turkey will become the next Venezuela, clashing with the West and dealing with a dire economic downturn. No one can be sure.”
West Versus East
The North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) was founded shortly after the end of the second world war. It was founded at a time when the cold war was at its peak, and the Soviet Union was swallowing up surrounding countries and subjecting them to communist rule.
NATO was a defensive pact signed by twelve countries. It was formed to defend themselves against future Soviet aggression. Article Five of this treaty stated that an attack on any single member state would be regarded as an attack on them all and would be met with armed force if necessary.
Although the original pact involved the United States and Canada, together with ten allied countries in western Europe, it has grown over the years to embrace 29-member states. All of them are located in the west, with the exception of one country, and that is Turkey.
Turkey joined NATO in February 1952. Its membership was of primary importance because of its location. It not only flanked the Soviet Union, but it also controlled access to the Black Sea where the Soviet navy was based, through the narrow strait known as the Dardanelles.
Over the years Turkey has remained a staunch member of NATO, and at one stage even considered applying for membership of the European Union. The Incirlik Air Base on its southern border provided NATO with a vital launching pad for its bombing attacks on ISIS in Syria in 2016.
Outside of the United States, Turkey has by far the largest number of active troops among all the member nations that make up NATO today. In fact, its army is greater than that of the UK, France, Germany, Italy and Spain combined. It continues to be a crucial bulwark against Russian aggression.
You would think that President Trump might have stopped to consider the likely consequences before launching his economic sanctions against the Turkish government, simply to secure the release of Protestant pastor Andrew Brunson. Instead, it has merely strengthened their resolve to defy him.
For whatever the fate of these two clerics may happen to be, the outcome of this contest of wills is bound to be the same. It will drive Turkey away from the West and into the arms of the Russians, exactly as the Old Testament prophet Ezekiel predicted over two thousand years ago.
Allan, Signs of the Times, September 7, 2018, 10:53 am
Q: How have comets affected the earth in the past?
A: Many comets have passed close to the earth within the recorded memory of your ancient people. All of them have produced dramatic effects upon the surface of the earth, including hurricanes, earthquakes, tidal waves and volcanic eruptions.
Although the sight of a comet in the night sky may be rare today, there was a time in your past when new comets appeared every few days. Some of them were even bright enough to be seen during the day. In the early days of the Roman Empire more than fifty comets were seen in a single year.
Most of the comets that have passed close to the earth have been smaller than the earth. Some of them have been equal in size like the comet in the days of Moses, while some have been even larger.
When these gigantic comets have passed close to the earth the gravitational interaction between these bodies have caused mountains to rise, land masses to sink below the waves, and entire seas to be displaced. They have even changed the orbit of the earth itself.
Q: How has the orbit of the earth changed?
A: The length of your year has not always been as it is now. It has changed many times in the history of humanity on earth.
These changes were a constant source of alarm among early societies as they not only changed the times of the seasons, but they also made it necessary to alter the calendar itself. This was why ancient man was so obsessed with observing the motions of the sun, the moon and the planets.
According to your present calendar the earth takes just over 365 days to travel around the sun. But there was a time not that long ago when the year was 360 days. Not only is this not generally known by your astronomers, but recorded evidence bearing this out has been ignored by your scholars.
References to a year of 360 days in length can be found in the ancient records of India, Persia, Babylon, Chaldea, Assyria, Egypt and China. The early Greeks and Romans also wrote about a time when the year lasted 360 days, as did the Incas and the Mayas.
Scientists and scholars of today prefer to believe that the astronomical records of these ancient societies were wrong, rather than consider the possibility that the present orbit of the earth might not be as stable as they have been taught.
In yet earlier times the orbit of the earth around the sun was shorter still. In fact, it has changed many times. Not only has the path of the earth around the sun changed as a result of close encounters with comets, but these encounters have also led to changes in the axis of the earth.
Q: What do you mean by a change in the axis of the earth?
A: If you look up at the sky at night you will notice that there is a point in the sky around which all the stars seem to move.
In the northern hemisphere this point is close to the star called Polaris in the constellation of the Little Bear. In the southern hemisphere there is no actual star at this point, but it is close to the group of stars that form the Southern Cross.
Your astronomers believe that the axis of the earth has not changed since the planet was created. But less than 4,000 years ago the axis of the earth was different from what it is today, and the northern axis of the earth pointed towards the constellation of the Great Bear.
This shift caused the earth to tilt on its axis. Lands that once were at the top of the world were suddenly displaced to more temperate regions, while lands that previously enjoyed a mild climate suddenly found themselves moved into the polar regions.
This sudden change in the axis of the earth took place within a matter of hours. That is why the carcasses of animals like woolly mammoths, that once lived in temperate regions of the world, have been found buried under polar ice with food that only grows in temperate climates still undigested in their stomachs.
This shift in the axis of the earth was so swift that these animals did not even have time to digest their food before they became victims of the cold.
Your scientists do not think such rapid changes in the axis of the earth are possible, as they believe that this would lead to the immediate extinction of all life on earth. Yet such a change has not only happened, but it has happened within the recorded history of mankind.
Not long after Moses had led the children of Israel out of Egypt, the same comet that was the cause of the plagues returned to trouble mankind again. This time the comet caused the entire earth to tilt on its axis. This shift in the axis of the earth was not only witnessed by people at the time, but they also lived to tell the story.
The description of this event was recorded in the Book of Joshua:
“And it came to pass, as they fled from before Israel, and were going down to Bethhoron, that the Lord cast down great stones from heaven upon them unto Azekah, and they died: they were more which died with hailstones than they whom the children of Israel slew with the sword.”
“Then spake Joshua to the Lord in the day when the Lord delivered up the Amorites before the children of Israel, and he said in the sight of Israel, Sun, stand thou still upon Gibeon; and thou, Moon, in the valley of Ajalon.”
“And the sun stood still, and the moon stayed, until the people had avenged themselves upon their enemies. Is not this written in the book of Jasher? So the sun stood still in the midst of heaven, and hasted not to go down about a whole day.” (Joshua 10: 11-13)
So according to the story told by Joshua, at a time when the earth was once again being bombarded by fiery meteorites, the sun stood still for a period of “about a whole day”.
On the other side of the ocean, the people of the Yucatan had a tradition that was recorded in the “Annals of Cuauhtitlan”. According to this tradition, there was a great catastrophe in the distant past that caused a prolonged period of darkness, and a night that did not end for eighteen hours.
Q: Will there be another change in the axis of the earth?
A: Yes. It is necessary to bring about a correction in the axis of the earth, so that it can fulfill the promise of the new golden age on earth. The present axis of the earth is out of alignment with the forces radiating from the great Central Sun around which your solar system revolves.
Once the poles of the earth have been correctly aligned, this will allow the incoming forces from the Central Sun to be balanced directly over the receiving centers of the earth.
When this change takes place those who are on the spiritual path of life will be infused with healing energies that will radiate throughout their physical bodies. This will bring a greater sense of understanding of their true purpose in life, and a greater sense of kinship with those who share the path with them.
This change in the axis of the earth will also lead to dramatic changes on the surface of the earth and in the heavens. As recorded in the Book of Revelation, the coming golden age on earth will bring “a new earth, and a new heaven”.
Those who fear that the cataclysms caused by the close encounter with this comet will lead to the destruction of all life on earth need not worry. This will not be the end of the world. But it will be the end of the “old world”.
It will also be the beginning of a “new earth”. The earth will be “made new” by the changes caused by the comet. The death throes of the dying age will be the birth pangs of the glorious new age that has for so long been predicted.
Because the axis of the earth will have changed, those who look into the skies in the new age will see a “new heaven”. They will see changes in the stars because when the poles shift, the polar star changes with it, as well as the positions of the constellations of the zodiac.
Q: What will happen when the poles shift?
A: There will be dramatic changes in both the Arctic and Antarctic regions of the world when the earth tilts on its axis, as well as in many other parts of the world. These changes will take place suddenly, as the American psychic Edgar Cayce foretold in 1934.
Once the axis of the earth shifts and the earth begins to tilt, the continent of Antarctica will move into a more temperate latitude from where it is today. Antarctica will once again become a habitable land in the New Age that is about to unfold on earth.
Antarctica was not always buried under the ice. It was once the home of a thriving culture before the last axis shift. The same catastrophe that caused the mammoths to be displaced from their temperate lands to the frozen regions of the north, caused the people of Antarctica to be buried under ice at the bottom of the world.
Explorers who visit the land that was once known as Antarctica in the coming age will no doubt be surprised to find evidence of previous human habitation, as well as the ruins of great civilisation boasting magnificent cities and temples.
When Antarctica moves to a more temperate latitude similar changes will be taking place in the northern hemisphere. The land of Canada will shift to a more southerly latitude, and those parts of Canada that now lie buried under ice will become places of great beauty in the coming age.
Q: What other changes will take place on earth?
A: The entire surface of the earth will be changed. The shapes of the continents themselves will change. Some land masses will sink below the seas. Others will rise from the deep. The earth will be transformed when the seas rage and the mountains again “skip like young lambs”.
To understand why these changes must take place and why certain lands will be affected more than others, it is necessary to remember what “karmic cleansing” means and why it happens.
When thoughts of negativity lead to acts of violence and death, these negative vibrations become linked with those places on earth where these deadly acts occurred.
In the higher dimensions of life this negativity becomes imprinted on these places, and this negative influence remains for long periods of time. These negative vibrations then continue to harm the people who live there until they are removed.
People who are psychically gifted will know from personal experience how certain places like ancient battlefields still harbour powerful negative influences. The purpose of karmic cleansing is to purify these places so that the negative influences associated with them are permanently erased.
When these negative vibrations grow to the point where they affect large parts of the earth, they can only be removed by means of global transformation. Only by means of global cleansing can those people who inherit the “new earth” live free from the negative influences of the past.
Nature has many ways to cleanse the earth. In past ages it has used the forces of fire, wind, water and ice to purify the earth. But the most common way is by water.
When parts of the land become sufficiently contaminated by the negativity caused by continuing acts of violence, hatred and oppression, these lands are cleansed by sinking beneath the waves. It is the action of water over many thousands of years of time that gradually washes away the mental stains of the past.
Sometimes this cleansing process can be achieved by burying the land under ice for long periods of time, or by means of hurricanes or through the purifying effects of fire. In the coming cleansing that is about to take place on the earth, all of these forces will be used.
The agent for all the changes that will take place on earth will be the comet referred to in the Book of Revelation as “Wormwood”. The asteroid that emerges from the tail of this comet will be the “great mountain burning with fire” that will plunge into the sea. The devastation caused by these two bodies will create “a new earth and a new heaven”.
Q: How big will the “great mountain” be that falls into the sea?
A: Although the comet that is coming will be as large as the earth, the rock that will fall into the sea will be tiny by comparison. Yet it will still be large enough to cause great devastation on the earth. In the Book of Revelation, John calls this asteroid a “great mountain”.
“And the second angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea.” (Revelation 8: 8)
By an interesting coincidence, Nostradamus used the same words that appear in the Bible (great mountain) in a quatrain that he wrote about a future asteroid that would strike the earth.
“The great mountain, seven stadia round,After peace, war, famine, inundation.It will spread far, drowning great countries,Even those of great age and mighty foundations.” (Century One: 69)
Nostradamus gives the size of this “great mountain” as “seven stadia round”. The “stadium” was a unit of measurement used by the Greeks and Romans. “Seven stadia round” would make this asteroid nearly a mile wide.
An asteroid of this size traveling at a speed of many thousands of miles an hour would cause global devastation, especially if it were to crash into the ocean.
Note: Those readers interested in learning more about this asteroid and where it will strike, should refer to Part Six of The Day of the Lord.
Allan, Questions and Answers, August 24, 2018, 9:49 am
Q: Could this comet have also caused the parting of the Red Sea?
A: Yes. The comet that was responsible for the plagues that descended on Egypt, causing Pharaoh to order the Israelites to be set free, also produced the miracle that saved them from Pharaoh’s charioteers that had been ordered to pursue them.
These charioteers caught up with them on the shores of the Red Sea.
It may seem strange that a body of water that is today coloured blue-green should be called the “Red Sea”. But when Moses arrived at the shore of this sea, the waters actually were red, due to the red dust of the comet, which is why it became known as the Red Sea.
The parting of the Red Sea not only saved the children of Israel by providing them with a way of escape from the advancing forces of Pharaoh, but it also led to the complete annihilation of Pharaoh’s charioteers, which must have seemed like a divine miracle at the time.
For it was at this very moment that the earth and the nucleus of the comet reached their closest point. Being of a similar size to the earth the comet had an enormous tidal effect on the sea below. It caused the waters of the Red Sea to be temporarily drawn back, exposing the seabed below.
This temporary parting of the waters of the Red Sea allowed the fleeing Israelites to cross safely over the exposed seabed before the tidal effect collapsed, causing the waters to rush back and drown the Egyptian army as they tried to cross.
The plagues described in the Book of Exodus were not just confined to Egypt and the Red Sea. They affected the entire planet. The events that happened on the earth at the time of the exodus of the Israelites from Egypt were also recorded in the Old Testament of the Bible in Psalm 77.
“Thou art the God that doest wonders: thou hast declared thy strength among the people.
Thou hast with thine arm redeemed thy people, the sons of Jacob and Joseph. Selah.
The waters saw thee, O God, the waters saw thee; they were afraid: the depths also were troubled.
The clouds poured out water: the skies sent out a sound: thine arrows also went abroad.
The voice of thy thunder was in the heaven: the lightnings lightened the world: the earth trembled and shook.
Thy way is in the sea, and thy path in the great waters, and thy footsteps are not known.
Thou leddest thy people like flock by the hand of Moses and Aaron.” (Psalm 77: 14-20)
While this shaking of the earth was taking place in Egypt, accompanied by thundering and lightning and “arrows” raining down from the skies, similar events were taking place elsewhere, as recorded in other ancient records like the Babylonian Epic of Gilgamesh, and the Pahlavi Texts of ancient Persia.
Q: Why should a comet have come along at just the right time to save the Israelites?
A: All of history unfolds according to a plan, just like the great cosmic plan that is now unfolding on the earth. The events that affect the history of nations are as much a part of destiny as the events that guide the lives of individuals.
The day when Moses was drawn to the burning bush on Mount Horeb and heard a voice telling him of his destined path was one of these moments. So was the coming of the comet at just the right moment to rescue the children of Israel out of Egypt.
The events that happened some 3,500 years ago find an echo in the events that are destined to unfold on the earth in the coming years. For the place where Moses led the children of Israel is the same place where the final events that mark the ending of the present era on earth will unfold.
Once again, these events will be heralded by fire in the sky. For just as a comet saved the Israelites in the days of Moses, so another comet will return as a harbinger of the new golden age on earth. This new comet will be the cause of the karmic cleansing that will transform this planet.
Although this is not yet known to your astronomers, a comet similar in size to the earth is now heading towards your sun from the direction of the star Vega.
After this comet passes around the sun its path will cross the orbit of the earth. This close encounter will once again bring cataclysmic changes in its wake. But it will also bring salvation to the people of the Promised Land, as has been foretold by your prophets and recorded in the Book of Revelation.
Q: What does the Book of Revelation say about a comet?
A: In his Book of Revelation, the disciple John described a series of visions that he experienced showing the events that would occur on the earth during the days leading up to the return of Jesus. They involved seven angels and seven trumpets. As he wrote:
“And I saw the seven angels which stood before God; and to them were given seven trumpets.” (Revelation 8:2)
John then described what would happen when the first angel sounded his trumpet.
“The first angel sounded, and there followed hail and fire mingled with blood, and they were cast upon the earth: and the third part of trees was burnt up, and all the green grass was burnt up.” (Revelation 8:7)
Once more we have a familiar story. Just as happened in the days of Moses a very large comet will approach the sun. When this comet passes around the sun and begins its journey back into space, its path will cross the orbit of the earth.
And once again the tail of the comet will be in front of the nucleus of the comet, due to the forces generated by the sun.
Because this comet is composed of iron, its dust will also be coloured red. When this red dust reaches the atmosphere of the earth it will fall to the surface in great quantities. When these red dust particles mix with water, it will look like blood and become thick and muddy and be harmful to drink.
As the head of the comet comes closer to the earth the particles in the tail of the comet will grow larger. The red dust will give way to gravel particles. When these gravel particles reach the outer atmosphere of the earth they will become white hot with friction.
These glowing particles will strike the ground in a shower of fiery meteorites. These meteorites will appear like “hail and fire mingled with blood”.
This fiery hail will devastate the entire surface of the planet. It will not only set fire to the grassy plains but will burn up the forests as well. The damage caused by this shower of meteorites will cause “a third part of them to be burnt up”.
Then the second trumpet of the Book of Revelation will sound.
“And the second angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea: and the third part of the sea became blood; and the third part of the creatures which were in the sea, and had life, died; and the third part of the ships were destroyed.” (Revelation: 8:8-9)
When the second angel sounds his trumpet, a burning meteorite from this comet will enter the atmosphere and plunge into the sea. The destructive impact of this asteroid will be immense. It will set off a chain of tidal waves that will swamp coastal cities all around the earth.
The devastation caused by this impact in the sea will kill “a third part of the creatures in the sea”. It will also create havoc with the shipping fleets of the world, as they are smashed by tsunamis that crash into ports and harbours around the world. “A third part” of all the ships in the sea will be destroyed.
“And the third angel sounded, and there fell a great star from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of the rivers, and upon the fountains of waters; And the name of the star is called Wormwood: and the third part of the waters became wormwood; and many men died of the waters, because they were made bitter.” (Revelation 8: 10-11)
The third trumpet refers to the comet itself, which the Bible calls “Wormwood”. It will appear in the skies of earth “burning as it were a lamp”. And it is the dust in the tail of this comet that will contaminate the waters of rivers, lakes and reservoirs.
And just as in the time of Moses, those who try to drink the water contaminated by dust from the comet will find that it not only has a bitter taste, just like the wormwood plant, but that it will also prove fatal as well. Many people will die from drinking poisoned water.
“And the fourth angel sounded, and the third part of the of the sun was smitten, and the third part of the moon, and the third part of the stars; so as the third part of them was darkened, and the day shone not for a third part of it, and the night likewise.” (Revelation 8: 12)
As the nucleus or head of the comet makes its closest approach to the earth, the enormous dust cloud that surrounds it will blot out the sun, the moon and the stars for a period of three days and three nights, just as occurred in Egypt in the time of Moses.
“And the Lord said unto Moses, stretch out thine hand toward heaven, that there may be darkness over the land of Egypt, even darkness which may be felt. And Moses stretched forth his hand toward heaven: and there was a thick darkness in all the land of Egypt three days.” (Exodus 10:20-22)
The sights that will be seen in the heavens as this comet approaches the earth will be so alarming that they will cause everyone’s hearts to quake in fear. Entire nations will be gripped with terror. As described by Jesus in the gospel of St. Luke:
“And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring; Men’s hearts failing them for fear, and for looking after those things which are coming on the earth: for the powers of heaven shall be shaken.” (Luke 21:25-26)
As a result of this close encounter with this comet, there will be cataclysmic changes upon the face of the earth. The shapes of the continents themselves will be changed as existing lands are swallowed up and new lands rise out of the ocean. Entirely new mountain ranges will be created.
It will be like the time of Moses, when “the sea fled, the mountains skipped like rams, and the little hills like lambs”.
Allan, Questions and Answers, August 10, 2018, 10:35 am
The key to understanding the coming karmic cleansing of the earth lies hidden in the past. For the same source that caused the devastation of the past will return to fulfill its appointed purpose in the future that is about to unfold upon the earth.
Q: What do you mean by this?
A: The things that are about to happen on earth are directly linked to events that occurred some 3,500 years ago. This was the time when the Hebrew people were being held captive as slaves in the land of Egypt.
The book of Exodus in the Bible tells the story of how Moses was drawn to the sight of a burning bush. When he approached it, he heard a voice that identified itself as the God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob. This voice told Moses that he had been chosen to lead the children of Israel out of Egypt.
Q: What does this have to do with coming events?
A: When Moses confronted Pharaoh and demanded that he let the people go, Pharaoh refused. Moses then told him that if he did not set the captives free, a series of plagues would afflict the land of Egypt.
The ten plagues that descended upon the people of Egypt are described in the following verses of the Book of Exodus:
“Behold, I will smite with the rod that is in mine hand upon the waters which are in the river, and they shall be turned to blood. And the fish that is in the river shall die, and the river shall stink; and the Egyptians shall lothe to drink of the water of the river.” (7:17-18)
“And the lord spake unto Moses, go unto Pharaoh, and say unto him, Thus saith the lord, let my people go, that they may serve me. And if thou refuse to let them go, behold, I will smite all thy borders with frogs: And the river shall bring forth frogs abundantly.” (8:1-3)
“And the Lord said unto Moses, say unto Aaron, stretch out thy rod, and smite the dust of the land, that it may become lice throughout all the land of Egypt.” (8:16)
“Thus saith the Lord, let my people go, that they may serve me. Else, if thou wilt not let my people go, behold, I will send swarms of flies upon thee, and upon thy servants, and upon thy people, and into thy houses.” (8:20-21)
“For if thou refuse to let them go, and wilt hold them still, behold the hand of the Lord is upon thy cattle which is in the field, upon the horses, upon the asses, upon the camels, upon the oxen, and upon the sheep: there shall be a very grievous murrain.” (9:2-3)
“And the Lord said unto Moses and unto Aaron, take to you handfuls of ashes of the furnace, and let Moses sprinkle it toward the heaven in the sight of Pharaoh. And it shall become small dust in all the land of Egypt, and shall be a boil breaking forth with blains upon man, and upon beast, throughout all the land of Egypt.” (9:8-9)
“And the Lord said unto Moses, stretch forth thine hand toward heaven, that there may be hail in all the land of Egypt, upon man, and upon beast, and upon every herb of the field, throughout the land of Egypt.” (9:22)
“And Moses stretched forth his rod toward heaven: and the Lord sent thunder and hail, and the fire ran along the ground; and the Lord rained hail upon the land of Egypt. So there was hail, and fire mingled with the hail, very grievous, such as there was none like it in all the land of Egypt since it became a nation.” (9:23-24)
“And the flax and the barley was smitten: for the barley was in the ear, and the flax was bolled. But the wheat and the rye were not smitten: for they were not grown up.” (9:31-32)
“If thou refuse to let my people go, behold, tomorrow will I bring the locusts into thy coast. And they shall cover the face of the earth, that one cannot be able to see the earth: and they shall eat the residue of that which is escaped, which remaineth unto you from the hail, and shall eat every tree which groweth for you out of the field.” (10:4-5)
“But the Lord hardened Pharaoh’s heart, so that he would not let the children of Israel go. And the Lord said unto Moses, stretch out thine hand toward heaven, that there may be darkness over the land of Egypt, even darkness which may be felt. And Moses stretched forth his hand toward heaven: and there was a thick darkness in all the land of Egypt three days.” (10:20-22)
“And the Lord said unto Moses, yet will I bring one plague more upon Pharaoh, and upon Egypt; afterwards he will let you go hence: when he shall let you go, he shall surely thrust you out hence altogether.” (11:1)
“And Moses said, thus saith the lord, about midnight will I go out in the midst of Egypt: and all the firstborn in the land of Egypt shall die.” (11:4-5)
“And it came to pass, that at midnight the Lord smote all the firstborn in the land of Egypt, from the firstborn of Pharaoh that sat on his throne unto the firstborn of the captive that was in the dungeon, and all the firstborn of cattle.” (12:29)
“And Pharaoh rose up in the night, he, and all his servants, and all the Egyptians; and there was a great cry in Egypt; for there was not a house where there was not one dead.” (12:30)
“And he called for Moses and Aaron by night, and said, rise up, and get you forth from among my people, both ye and the children of Israel; and go, serve the Lord, as ye have said. Also take your flocks and your herds, as ye have said, and be gone.” (12:31-32)
Q: What happened in Egypt to cause all these plagues?
A: The answer lies in the sequence of the plagues themselves. The first plague was “blood” falling from the sky which polluted the rivers and the drinking water. This was followed by an outbreak of frogs, lice and flies. Then came the “murrain”, which was an infectious disease that killed the livestock.
The sixth plague was a strange dust that caused boils and blisters to break out on the skin of people and animals. Then came thunder and hail, and fire that ran along the ground, destroying the crops in the field. This was followed by a vast swarm of locusts that destroyed the crops that had survived the hail.
Finally, there came a strange darkness that covered the entire land of Egypt. It not only darkened the sky, but it was a darkness that could be felt as well. According to the Bible, this darkness lasted for a period of three days.
The final plague caused Pharaoh to decide to release the slaves. It was a disaster that struck in the middle of the night, causing death throughout all the land of Egypt on a scale that left no family untouched, from the house of Pharaoh to the captives in their dungeons.
Most Biblical scholars interpret the story of the plagues of Egypt as a series of miracles performed by Moses and authorized by God as part of his plan to deliver the children of Israel out of bondage in Egypt.
These scholars have probably never considered the possibility that the plagues that descended upon Egypt might not have been supernatural miracles at all, but rather the natural consequences of a close encounter between the earth and a large comet.
Q: How could a comet cause all these different plagues?
A: Comets are bodies of rock and dust that orbit the sun. When a comet approaches the sun, the core or nucleus of the comet becomes heated by the sun and releases streams of incandescent gas and dust.
The pressure of the solar wind causes streams of gas and dust to form a tail behind the nucleus of the comet. This luminous tail can extend many millions of miles into space, depending on the size and nature of the nucleus of the comet.
Due to the pressure of the solar wind, the tail of a comet always points away from the sun. So once the nucleus has passed around the sun and begins its journey back into outer space, the tail of the comet now goes in front of the comet and not behind it.
Q: How does this explain the plagues at the time of Moses?
A: The comet that approached the earth at the time of Moses was very large, and had an extremely long tail consisting of gas, dust and other particles. Because the nucleus of the comet contained iron, the dust in the tail of the comet was red in colour.
As this comet was heading away from the sun it happened to cross the orbit of the earth. Because the tail of the comet was now travelling in front of the nucleus, the first sign that people living on the earth had of the approaching comet, was a stream of tiny particles of red dust entering the atmosphere.
As these red dust particles descended upon the earth, they turned the surfaces of rivers, lakes and seas red in colour. This made it seem like the rivers and the drinking water were turning into “blood”. It was these red dust particles that polluted the water and made it unfit to drink.
This contaminated water then caused the fish to die. Their dead carcasses then began to decompose causing the rivers to “stink”. To escape from the foul water, the frogs abandoned the rivers and made their way onto the land and into the houses of the Egyptians, causing the second plague.
As the earth continued to pass through the tail of the comet, the red dust that now coated the surface of the planet caused an infestation of lice, followed by immense swarms of flies. It also caused a variety of skin irritations, boils and blisters that afflicted people and animals alike.
The lice and flies then combined to spread the outbreaks of disease that infected the Egyptian cattle, horses, camels, donkeys, sheep and goats, causing large numbers of them to die.
As the earth plunged deeper into the tail of the comet, the particles of reddish dust now gave way to gravel particles. These incandescent particles fell to earth in a dense shower of burning meteorites that looked like hail but were hot like fire. When they landed they “ran along the ground”.
These flaming meteorites not only struck people and animals, but they devastated the crops as well. This fiery hail “smote every herb and broke every tree in the field”. Although standing crops like flax and barley were damaged, others like wheat and rye were unaffected because “they were not grown up”.
The remaining crops were then eaten by an enormous swarm of locusts brought on by a “the strong east wind” that was so large that it darkened the sky. When the locusts were done, “there remained not any green thing in the trees, or in the herbs of the field, through all the land of Egypt.”
The ninth plague was a thick darkness that engulfed the whole of Egypt for three days. The source of this darkness was the Coma, or inky, black, gaseous envelope that surrounded the nucleus of the comet, that caused the air to become so thick that breathing became laboured and the very air itself seemed to stick in the throat. This was a darkness “that could be felt”.
The final plague came in the middle of the night, causing death and destruction throughout all the land of Egypt. Your Bible scholars have long wondered what this agent of death might have been, even though the answer can be plainly seen in the words of Psalm 77.
“The voice of thy thunder was in the heaven: the lightnings lightened the world: the earth trembled and shook. Thy way is in the sea, and thy path in the great waters, and thy footsteps are not known. Thou leddest thy people like flock by the hand of Moses and Aaron.” (Psalm 77: 14-20)
This instrument of death was a mighty earthquake which shook the entire land of Egypt. It was caused by the gravitational pull of the huge nucleus of the comet passing close to the earth. But why did this earthquake appear to act selectively, by harming the Egyptians and sparing the Israelites?
Because the houses of the Egyptians were made of heavy blocks of stone, this earthquake in the middle of the night caused all of their stone houses to collapse, crushing many of the people who were sleeping inside. According to the Bible, only the homes of the children of Israel were spared.
The reason why the plague of death “passed over” the children of Israel was because, being slaves, they did not live in houses made of stone, but in dwellings made of mud and reeds. Their houses were able to withstand the shaking of the ground, allowing them to be spared.
Allan, Questions and Answers, July 26, 2018, 9:53 am
A: Yes, they did. But the records of these civilizations have been lost, or rather, they have been hidden until that time when you are ready to learn the true history of life on the earth. When this moment comes, you will find that the actual history of humanity is very different from what you have been taught in your schools and universities.
Q: How does this vary from what we know today?
A: Your understanding of history is based on three assumptions. The first assumption is that the solar system has always existed in its present form, and that the number of planets and their orbits around the sun have always been as you see them now.
The second assumption is that the earth has evolved in a uniform way, and that the geological changes that have taken place have done so by means of small changes over vast periods of time. Also, that the forces that have changed the surface of the earth in the past are the same forces that operate on the earth today.
The third assumption is that humanity has evolved on this planet from original cave-dwellers in Africa to the sophisticated culture that exists on earth today in a linear growth from the simple to the complex, and that your modern technological civilization is the highest form of culture that has ever existed on the earth.
Because all these assumptions are incorrect, the history of humanity that is taught in the schools of the new age will be very different from what is taught today.
Q: Why are these assumptions incorrect?
A: These assumptions are incorrect because your knowledge of history is so short, and because your scholars have allowed their preconceived ideas to blind them from recognizing the evidence of the past that still survives on earth.
The records of these ancient civilizations still exist, and they will be rediscovered in the coming age. When they are, they will become the basis for a new understanding of history.
This problem of the ignorance of history is not new. It has affected many civilizations in the past. In fact, this ignorance has helped to shield societies from the horrors of the past, allowing them to develop without the psychological trauma which the memory of previous catastrophes would inevitably have produced.
Q: Why have catastrophes happened in the past?
A: These catastrophes have occurred whenever societies have reached a level of development where they have become a threat to themselves and to other forms of life on the planet. This is what happened to the people of Tolemac. It has also happened to many other cultures as well.
Q: How have ancient cultures been destroyed?
A: All cultures on the earth develop in similar ways, and go through similar stages of growth, maturity and decay. Some cultures last for relatively long periods of time, while others disappear after just a few centuries. The reasons for these variations depend on the nature of the people involved and the character of their societies.
Their destruction may be the result of conquest and war, or through such circumstances as famine or disease. In other cases, societies may be destroyed by various forces of nature such as hurricanes, earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, tidal waves and floods. They may even be destroyed by asteroids or comets.
In different ways, so many ancient civilizations have met their end.
Your historians know of many ancient civilizations. In Europe and Asia there have been the empires of Rome, Greece, Troy, Persia, Assyria and Chaldea. Africa has witnessed the great dynasties of the Pharaohs. India has seen the Mauryan and Gupta empires. There were the Shang, Zhou and Qin dynasties of China.
In central America there have been the Mayas, Olmecs, Aztecs and the Toltecs. In South America, the Inca empire stretched from Ecuador to Chile. All of these great kingdoms, dynasties and empires have now vanished from the world stage, only to be replaced by the dominant countries that you see on earth today.
But there have been other empires in the distant past that are not known to your historians. These empires have passed away seemingly without trace. They were the empires of Atlantis, located on islands in the Atlantic Ocean beyond the Pillars of Hercules, Paititi in central America, and the continent of Lemuria in the Pacific Ocean.
These lost civilizations had a history that extended back hundreds of thousands of years. The history and records of these lost civilizations have been secretly hidden in places of safekeeping, and their hiding places will be revealed in the coming age to allow humanity to learn the true history of their past.
Q: Where are these ancient records kept?
A: When the ancient priests of Atlantis and Lemuria knew that their islands were destined to sink beneath the sea, they made elaborate plans to preserve the records of their history, culture and scientific achievements in secret places where they would be protected for future generations in the coming golden age.
Some of these records have been saved in retreats in remote mountain regions. Some have been buried in secret chambers below the ground. Others have been preserved in tunnels deep below the surface of the earth, as was the case with the civilization of Paititi.
Q: Where was the civilization of Paititi?
A: While the lost civilizations of Atlantis and Lemuria live on in legend, little is known today about the civilization of Paititi, which existed in South America in the Amazon basin of Brazil. Although this civilization co-existed with its more famous neighbours in the Atlantic and Pacific oceans, it was in some ways even more advanced.
The great cities of Paititi were more imposing, and their system of construction using huge blocks of stone was unequalled in the ancient world. Their sacred science enabled their builders to cut vast blocks of stone by means of rays of light, and then position these stones, some of which weighed hundreds of tons, by means of the harmonic frequencies of sound.
It was in this way that they created monuments of gigantic size that can still be seen on earth today.
It was this secret knowledge that was given to the people of Atlantis, who used it in the construction of their own cities. Before the civilization of Paititi was finally overcome by disaster, their scientific knowledge was passed on to a select few. These few became mentors to the peoples of Tolemac, and it was this knowledge that enabled the Tolemac culture to reach unrivalled levels of accomplishment.
The civilization of Paititi differs from those of Atlantis and Lemuria in one significant way. Whereas the islands of Atlantis and Lemuria were both destroyed by earthquakes and sank below the waves, the cities of Paititi have never been under water.
Their cities remain relatively intact, while their records are preserved in underground libraries that still survive to this day. They are protected by the dense Amazonian jungle that now shields them from modern eyes. Tantalizing rumors of lost cities have drawn explorers into the interior of Brazil for centuries.
The Spanish conquerors heard of these legends of vast hoards of gold that were said to exist in a lost city of Thirty Citadels that lay hidden somewhere in the impenetrable jungle of the Mato Grosso. They braved many perils in their quest for these cities, and the blazing crystals of white light that were said to shine within them.
Although they searched the jungle for many years, their efforts were in vain. Modern explorers have been equally unsuccessful. Until that time when the world is ready to rediscover their lost science, their secrets will remain protected by poisonous reptiles and hostile Indian tribes, who are the modern guardians of this ancient knowledge.
The builders of Paititi also built a system of tunnels that honeycomb the region. These tunnels were not only used for transport and communication, but also for storing their precious objects and artifacts. When the earthquakes that will herald the coming of the new age cause large sections of the earth to be displaced, they will cause these tunnels to be revealed.
Those who venture into these tunnels will find a treasure beyond description. Not only will there be statues, artifacts and objects of solid gold, but examples of the tools that allowed the builders of Paititi to perform their amazing technical feats. In that day, mankind will lose its hunger for gold.
What awaits them on that morning of discovery will be a treasure more precious than gold or jewels. Hidden within these tunnels will be keys to the understanding of the deepest secrets of the universe. Mother earth will finally bring forth from her womb the knowledge that she has carefully guarded for thousands of years.
Q: What happened to the ancient knowledge of Atlantis?
A: When it became apparent to the Hierophants of Atlantis that their culture was doomed, and that their islands were about to sink beneath the waves, their sacred records, technology and artifacts were taken to various places of refuge where they would be preserved until humanity would once again be worthy custodians of this knowledge.
One of the main refuges they chose was in the land you call Egypt, close to the Nile delta.
Your historians have often wondered how the civilization of Egypt came to flourish at such a high level of accomplishment without any apparent evidence of previous development in the region. It was as if the culture of the Pharaohs appeared suddenly and in full bloom. Few historians today realize that this culture came from Atlantis.
To protect the sacred wisdom of Atlantis, these Hierophants used the knowledge of construction gained from Paititi to create massive stone edifices that would be capable of resisting the ravages of nature for thousands of years. An example of this was the Great Pyramid, accompanied by the Sphinx.
The secret records of Atlantis were hidden beneath the Sphinx as well as inside the pyramid itself. Although a few of the chambers inside the pyramid are known to your historians, other secret rooms have not yet been found. They will remain hidden until the Great Day of Telling, at the start of the golden age.
The American seer Edgar Cayce predicted that a “Hall of Records” would be found beneath the Sphinx. Inside this hall of records would be found tablets, artifacts and gold related to the lost civilization of Atlantis. He predicted that these records would also include a detailed history of human life on earth.
While many people today know about this prophecy, all attempts to find this buried hall of records have so far failed. Once again it will take the intervention of natural disasters in the form of gigantic earthquakes to reveal these secret hiding places to the world.
Q: What happened to the ancient knowledge of Lemuria?
A: Lemuria was a vast continent in the Pacific Ocean that existed for many hundreds of thousands of years. It was the motherland of human civilization, and lasted longer than any other. But even this golden age of humanity finally fell victim to the forces of evil and was destroyed.
When the time came for the people of Lemuria to face the same consequences of their actions that confront men and women today, the continent on which they lived broke up over many years into several smaller islands. But as the destruction continued, there came a day when the last of these islands was swallowed up by the sea.
Whereas the initial destruction of Lemuria began about 30,000 years ago, the final portion of the land submerged about the same time as the destruction of Atlantis about 12,500 years ago. While Atlantis and Lemuria were breaking up, other catastrophes were taking place all over the earth.
It was at this time that the Andes mountains in South America were being created, as well as the Sierra mountains of North America. Cities that once were located by the sea were suddenly thrust thousands of feet above sea level. One of these was a colonial port which had previously enjoyed a mild tropical climate.
Within the space of a few hours the entire city was lifted to a height of some 12,500 feet, where it survives to this day on a desolate wind-swept plain. Modern historians call the ruins of this city by the name of Tiahuanaco. It is located near Lake Titicaca which was also created at this time.
It was here, high in the Andes mountains near the newly formed lake, that the Guardians of Wisdom from Lemuria brought their records and their sacred technology. They created a refuge in a remote mountain valley where their lost wisdom could be preserved. The centerpiece of this retreat was the legendary golden Sun Disc of Mu.
Back in the motherland, this Sun Disc had been held by ropes of purest gold in a temple dedicated to the Divine Light. This circular golden disc was not made of ordinary gold. It was made of transmuted gold which gave the disc a translucent appearance. It almost seemed as if you could see through it.
Like the Ark of the Covenant that was created many thousands of years later by the Israelites, the Sun Disc of Mu was not just an object of beauty and veneration. It was also a scientific instrument. When this disc was struck, it produced various harmonic vibrations which could be used for various purposes such as healing.
These vibrations could also be used to allow trained people to leave their physical bodies and travel in cosmic space. It was in this way that the priests of Lemuria were able to communicate with the inhabitants of the stars. But if used in a negative way, this disc was also capable of generating devastating earthquakes.
The Incas who came to Peru established an advanced and highly spiritual civilization on top of the ruins of what once had been the great colonial empire of Lemuria. The remnants of their fortresses that were built from gigantic blocks of stone can still be seen today at places like Ollantaytambo and Sacsayhuaman.
The Incas built their own cities and temples on top of these megalithic ruins, including their capital city Cuzco. They also discovered and rebuilt the ancient network of tunnels that had been built in ancient times to link these fortresses together.
The central focus of Inca worship was the temple in Cuzco that was dedicated to the Sun God Inti. They called this temple Coricancha, or Garden of Gold, as it contained life-sized statues of people, animals, plants and flowers that were made of solid gold. The walls and floors of this temple were also covered in sheets of gold.
The Incas knew of ancient legends telling how selected guardians had removed the golden Sun Disc of Mu shortly before the doomed continent of Lemuria was destroyed and brought it to a place of safety somewhere in the Andes mountains. But although they searched for this Disc for many years, they were never able to find it.
However, once their spiritual evolution had progressed to the point where they could use it for the benefit of all the people, as it had originally been used in the motherland of Lemuria, this golden Sun Disc was presented to the ruling Inca by the guardians. It was installed in the Temple of the Sun in Cuzco.
This disc was hung from golden cords attached to niches in the walls that can still be seen to this day. However, once the Incas realised that the Spanish conquistadors were motivated by the lust for gold, this Disc was taken through underground tunnels beneath the Coricancha to a place of safety, along with all their other sacred relics.
Although the Spanish invaders succeeded in ransacking the Temple of the Sun, they could never find its golden treasure. Since that time, many others have searched in vain for its fabled wealth. They will continue to remain hidden until such time as the world has been cleansed of its evil, and is ready to rediscover them.
When that day dawns, men and women of earth will once again witness this golden Disc as it reflects the glorious rays of the morning sun, and listen to its tones of exquisite harmony, as once again it draws toward it all those in search of understanding of the Everlasting Light of true spiritual awareness.
Allan, Questions and Answers, July 12, 2018, 1:57 pm
Q: What will the records of these ancient civilisations reveal?
A: When the records of these ancient civilizations are finally revealed in the coming age, they will tell a very different story of the history of the earth than is understood today by your scientists and historians.
Not only do your historians have no knowledge of Paititi, Atlantis or Lemuria, or of the even older civilizations that preceded them, but your scientists are unaware of the catastrophes that destroyed these civilizations and ravaged the earth in the past.
The students of your schools and universities are taught that the earth is a stable planet that has slowly evolved over long eons of geological time. They are also taught that the earth has always followed a stable orbit around the sun. These comforting ideas are about to be rudely shattered.
The historical records of the ancients will tell a history of the earth that has been repeatedly devastated by cataclysm. Although some of these disasters have been caused by tidal waves, floods, earthquakes and hurricanes, many others have been caused by fire in the sky.
Q: What do you mean by fire in the sky?
A: When the true history of the earth is told, there will be some disturbing changes to the traditional ideas held on earth today. These ancient records will reveal:
That the rotation of the earth around the sun has been repeatedly disturbed within the recorded history of humanity.
That the axis of the earth has changed from time to time.
That the length of the year has not always been the same.
That the sun has not always risen in the east. During some of the past eras on earth it has risen in the west.
That the cause of many of these changes has been the influence of comets and asteroids.
Ancient man was acutely aware of just how fragile life on earth has been, for the descriptions of past disasters were not only part of their literary record, but some of the events described in their sacred books had occurred within the living memory of those who had written about them.
It is very different today. Modern scientists and historians have been lulled into a false sense of security due to the relative stability of the earth over the last two and a half thousand years.
So even though many ancient books speak clearly of devastating events that occurred in the past, historians of today dismiss them as mere allegories, rather than descriptions of events that actually happened to the earth.
Q: What are some of these ancient books?
A: The ancient books of China (Shu-king Chronicles), India (The Puranas, Vedas, Visuddhi-Magga), Persia (The Zend-Avesta), as well as the inscribed tablets of the Sumerian culture (Epic of Gilgamesh), speak of tumultuous times on earth. The Popul-Vuh of the Mayas echo these stories.
The Psalms of the Bible are filled with descriptions of past global catastrophes, as can be seen from the following examples:
“Then the earth shook and trembled; The foundations also of the hills moved and were shaken, because he was wroth. There went up a smoke out of his nostrils, and fire out of his mouth devoured: coals were kindled by it. He bowed the heavens also and came down: And darkness was under his feet. And he rode upon a cherub, and did fly: Yea, he did fly upon the wings of the wind. He made darkness his secret place; His pavilion round about him were dark waters and thick clouds of the skies. At the brightness that was before him his thick clouds passed, hail stones and coals of fire. The Lord also thundered in the heavens, and the Highest gave his voice; hail stones and coals of fire. Yea, he sent out his arrows and scattered them; And he shot out lightnings, and discomfited them. Then the channels of waters were seen, And the foundations of the world were discovered at thy rebuke, O Lord, at the blast of the breath of thy nostrils.”
(Psalm 18: 7-15)
“God is our refuge and strength, A very present help in trouble. Therefore will we not fear, Though the earth be removed, And though the mountains be carried into the midst of the sea; Though the waters thereof roar and be troubled, Though the mountains shake with the swelling thereof.”
(Psalm 46: 1-3)
“The Lord reigneth; let the earth rejoice; Let the multitude of isles be glad thereof. Clouds and darkness are round about him: Righteousness and judgment are the habitation of his throne. A fire goeth before him, and burneth up his enemies round about. His lightnings enlightened the world: The earth saw, and trembled. The hills melted like wax at the presence of the Lord.”
(Psalm 97: 1-5)
“When Israel went out of Egypt, The house of Jacob from a people of strange language; Judah was his sanctuary, and Israel his dominion. The sea saw it and fled: Jordan was driven back. The mountains skipped like rams, and the little hills like lambs”.
(Psalm 114: 1-4)
World-wide catastrophes that cause hills to melt like wax and mountains to skip like rams are not the sort of things that are taught in modern history. Devastation on that scale would require forces far greater than simple earthquakes or volcanic eruptions, fearful though these may be.
Q: Has the earth been affected by comets in the past?
A: According to the wisdom of the ancients, the earth has repeatedly been affected by close encounters with comets. The comets that have appeared in the skies of earth over the last thousand years or so have been distant and have produced little more than night-time illumination.
Modern humanity has lost its fear of comets. But in the centuries before the birth of the Christ, comets appeared much more frequently in the skies of earth. Some of them were extremely large, and some of them passed extremely close to the earth.
These close encounters with comets devastated the landscape of earth. They caused seas to rise and fall, new mountains to form, and entire continents to sink below the waves. One of these encounters became the foundation of the Greek legend of Phaeton.
According to this legend, Phaeton the son of Helios, the Greek god of the Sun, asked his father for a favour. To prove his manhood, the young Phaeton asked if he might be allowed to drive his father’s sun-chariot across the sky for just one day. Helios granted his son this request.
But as the young Phaeton took hold of the reins, he could not control the powerful steeds that pulled the chariot of the sun. The chariot plunged out of control. It came too close to the ground, causing the sun to scorch large parts of the earth.
Realizing the danger of the situation, Zeus, ruler of the gods, hurled a thunderbolt at Phaeton, killing him instantly, thus sparing the people of earth from complete destruction.
This story of Phaeton remains one of the best-known legends in ancient mythology. Although modern scholars treat the story as a fanciful myth, few of them grasp the truth that lies behind the legend, that in earlier times the earth had a close encounter with a large comet.
As the orbits of these two bodies passed close to one another, the tremendous electro-magnetic forces generated between them caused a mighty thunderbolt to strike the earth. It was this that gave rise to the legendary story described by the Greeks.
Q: Why did ancient societies focus on eclipses and solstices of the Sun?
Ancient man knew that encounters with comets in the past had led to changes in the axis and rotation of the earth, as well as its orbit around the Sun and the resulting changes in the length of the year. They therefore constantly watched the heavens for signs of any new cosmic intruders.
Modern historians wonder why so many ancient cultures all around the world held ceremonies associated with specific times of the year, such as eclipses and solstices. They still do not realize that these ceremonies provided these societies with vital clues about their future safety and survival.
Archaeological ruins can be found all over the planet of temples and stone monuments that are aligned with the cardinal directions of the earth. These sites have also been traditionally linked with ritual ceremonies held at the time of winter and summer solstices.
One of the best examples of these can be found at the citadel of the ancient Incan fortress of Machu Picchu. The Incas referred to this as the Intihuatana rock, which in the local Quechua language, meant “the hitching post of the Sun”. Archaeologists today still do not understand the meaning of this term.
As the time of each solstice approached, the Incan priests observed the path of the Sun as it tracked across the sky by means of the shadows cast by the Sun on these stones. They carved special niches in these stones to show the points at which the Sun’s movement should begin to reverse itself.
So as the day of the summer or winter solstice approached, the Incan priests watched anxiously to see if the shadow cast by the Sun reversed its path across the sky on the appointed day of the solstice, and that it did indeed remain “hitched to its post”.
For if the movements of the Sun did not match the times of these solstices, the priests would know that the orbit of the earth had changed, and that devastating events might soon occur upon the earth. They also knew that the seasons and the times for planting crops would be changed as well.
Similar systems can be found in other societies that lived on earth at that time. Each had their own way of tracking the movements of the Sun and the planets, and each successive solstice was approached with a similar sense of dread, in case the portents in the Sun should be unfavourable.
However, a favorable result would be cause for great celebrations among the people, as it meant that they were safe for the time being from heavenly upheaval leading to destruction on the earth, and that their seasons for planting crops remained unchanged.
Although societies like the Aztecs and the Maya held similar ceremonies for the same reason, they considered the Sun to be a war-like deity that needed to be constantly appeased, and that the way to protect the earth from the ravages of cosmic intruders was to conduct regular human sacrifices.
The tragedy of these gruesome rituals was that once they had been found to be effective on one occasion, they were considered necessary for all future occasions. So their ceremonies became bloody sacrifices involving virgins or young men of prowess, as well as captives from military campaigns.
Similar rituals were held in Europe at places like Stonehenge and Woodhenge. These circles served a similar purpose, and that was to plot the path of the sun according to its previously recorded movements, to ensure that there was continued stability in the heavens.
In ancient Egypt, tall stone obelisks were used to track the path of the Sun at times of the midsummer and midwinter solstice. The shadows cast by these obelisks were used to check whether there had been any changes in the movement of the Sun which might lead to imminent earth changes.
The true meaning of these ancient stone monuments will never be understood by scientists and historians, until they come to realise that the earth has suffered repeated catastrophes caused by comets and asteroids that have happened to cross the orbit of the earth in the distant past.
Unfortunately, scientists of today remain convinced that the earth has always followed its existing course around the Sun, and that the length of the year has always been the same, and that human civilisations have never been destroyed by encounters with celestial objects from space.
They would do well to remember the words recorded by Plato in his work titled Timaeus, that were told by an old Egyptian priest to the Greek philosopher Solon:
“There have been and will be many different calamities to destroy mankind, the greatest of them by fire and water, lesser ones by countless other means”.
“Your own story of how Phaeton, child of the sun, harnessed his father’s chariot, but was unable to guide it along his father’s course and so burnt up things on the earth and was himself destroyed by a thunderbolt, is a mythical version of the truth that there is at long intervals a variation in the course of the heavenly bodies and a consequent widespread destruction by fire of things on the earth”.
Allan, Questions and Answers, June 25, 2018, 1:31 pm
Answer: We are your elder brothers on the Path of Returning to Everlasting Light.
Q: Why are you here?
A: Where you are today, we were yesterday. Where we are today, you will be tomorrow. The earth on which you live was also our Mother. She nurtured us until we were ready to claim our Cosmic Birthright.
Your earth was once our home. We too once greeted the dawn with gladness and watched the sun gild the morning sky. We too once walked the sands of earth and felt the tropic breezes on our cheeks. We too once looked at the evening sky and gazed with wonder at the stars.
Because we once lived on this earth, and are bound in love with those who live on it now, we have undertaken a vow to return to you at this time, to share our story with you, and to help those of you that would listen.
Q: How can you help us?
A: We can help you by describing the last days of Tolemac, and by explaining the words of your clear-eyed men and women of history and your Holy Books of prophecy.
Q: What happened during the last days of Tolemac?
A: Before your recorded history, in lost legends of time, there existed a land that was home to a great culture known as Tolemac. It was located in what is now Central America. In its culture, Tolemac represented the flower of human learning.
In art, music and literature, it led the world. Its stone cities were of surpassing beauty. In technology, its scientists used knowledge that even today is unknown to your civilization.
Yet despite our great accomplishments over many centuries, with the passage of time our men and women grew corrupt and began to follow the left-hand path of life. As has been the case with so many other cultures that have lived upon the earth, the people of Tolemac began to pursue pleasure and indulgence.
Economy gave way to excess and honesty gave way to expediency. Our merchants became motivated by avarice and greed. Those in authority used their power to exploit and oppress others.
Our wise men tried to stem this tide of corruption, but their voices were stifled. Our arenas were used for public games where those who lost were put to death. Our priests turned to superstition and magic to mislead the people.
Our sacred ceremonies became debased and were turned instead into mass orgies involving human sacrifice.
It was at this time that our elder brothers came to those few who would listen, to warn them of coming catastrophes. Although our holy books had warned us of the consequences of our corrupt way of life, most people refused to listen.
Those few who had the courage to confront those in authority were publicly tortured and killed.
Inevitably, there came a time when the people of Tolemac had to face the consequences of their actions. Great earthquakes fractured the land and hurricane winds destroyed their dwellings. Finally, there came the Great Day of Telling that had been predicted by our elder brothers.
Whereas the great civilization of Lemuria had taken many years before it was destroyed, and Atlantis had sunk beneath the waves within the course of a single night and a day, the final destruction of Tolemac took just thirteen hours. Entire cities were swallowed up by the ocean.
Today the ruins of the cities of Tolemac lie on the seabed off the island you call Cuba.
Although your holy books have often spoken of the events that are about to unfold upon the earth, and your own prophets have warned you of the times that are to come, their words are not easy to understand. Only those with special training and insight can understand their meaning.
We are here to tell you about these things in simple words, so that everyone, no matter how degraded they may seem to others, will be able to understand what is happening to the earth and why these things are happening at this time.
Q: What is happening to the earth?
A: We want you to know that everything that is now happening on your planet is part of a plan. This is the great Cosmic Plan that will lead you into the coming golden age.
The moment is at hand when the earth will take the greatest evolutionary step that humanity will ever witness. Never again in the history of earth will there be changes as profound as those which now await you.
For you have reached that point in your history when many will face the same conditions that occurred on that far-off day in Tolemac, when the earth shook, the waters rose, the land fell, and the people cried out in disbelief and fear that they would be destroyed.
We want you to go forward to meet these changes with joy and understanding, rather than in fear and denial.
For if you surround yourselves with love, and consciously project this love to others, these changes will not harm you. But if you surround yourself with fear, you will attract the very thing that you fear, and it can destroy you.
The evolution of life is a journey that spans many lifetimes. It is a journey towards ever higher levels of consciousness, until the soul at last reaches the Divine State. This is the purpose of all human living and the meaning of the great adventure that is life.
Every person living on the earth today is on that Path of Returning to Everlasting Light. This Light is the divine light that shines within every person as well as every living creature on the earth. This divine light is your most precious possession.
It is the “I Am” sensation that is always with you in the center of your being.
If you could learn to meditate, and focus your attention on this “I Am” sensation for extended periods of time, you would find that it would draw you in. Your consciousness would then be flooded with the light of the divine and you would experience a peace that passes all understanding.
You would then not only discover your own divine nature, but would know that all of creation is divine, and that you are one with all life. This has been the teaching of your holy books and the testimony of your holy men and women throughout history.
Q: What does this have to do with the age of Aquarius?
A: The ancient priests of Tolemac knew that space was not empty but was filled with dynamic fields of energy. They knew that as the solar system moved through space, it would be impacted by these different fields of energy. They also knew that these fields of energy would change with every passing age.
They knew that the energy fields through which the solar system would pass during the age of Aquarius would be totally different from those it had passed through in the previous age of Pisces.
These new fields of energy would not only affect those people living on the earth at that time, they would also influence the events that would happen to them.
When the earth entered into the age of Aquarius, our priests knew that the whole of the solar system would be changed by these new frequencies of energy, and that these changes would affect the earth as well as the entire solar system. In fact, it would do more.
Not only would the solar system be subjected to cosmic radiation of a much higher frequency, but the earth itself would be totally transformed by the higher energies coming from the space into which it was now moving.
This increased rate of vibration will profoundly affect everything in the solar system, whether it be physical, mental or spiritual. It will not only transform the earth, it will also bring about a new golden age of humanity.
Q: What will this golden age be like?
A: The new age that is about to unfold on earth will be beautiful beyond telling. It will not just be an age of harmony and beauty on the earth. It will be an age when men and women will come to know their true calling. They will not just be custodians of the earth, but of all intelligent life as well.
There is life and intelligence in all forms, as ancient man knew. Man is not the only thinking being living on the earth. All forms of life, including elements and minerals, fishes, animals and birds have inherent intelligence. Man is their keeper and their elder brother.
When only love is manifested on your planet all things caused by negation will pass away and earth will once again become a place of surpassing beauty. Nature will no longer need to defend itself against the harsh thoughts of mankind. The cactus and the rose will lose their thorns.
Your weather will be completely changed. When peace reigns in the hearts of men and women, the earth too will reflect this harmony. Gentle showers of multi-coloured rain will fall only as needed. The wild storms of the past will never trouble you again.
Because there is life and intelligence in every element, people will learn how to create tools and machinery that utilise this intelligence. So, if part of a vehicle or equipment should happen to be damaged, it will automatically repair itself.
The art of healing will also be transformed. Physicians will use colour, sound and light to heal their patients. Using specialized equipment, doctors will not only be able to repair damaged organs. They will also be able to heal broken bones instantly, and even grow new human limbs.
Your cities will be transformed. No longer will they be built in haphazard fashion as before. Future cities will be built in harmony with the forces of energy that flow through the planet, to take advantage of locations where these energy centres exist.
When your cities are properly aligned, you will be able to draw on natural sources of energy to provide heat, light and power. Because this source of energy will be free for all to use, every person will be able to light and heat their homes as they wish.
Knowledge and wisdom will make great strides in the coming age. The true history of your planet will be revealed at last. Those same disasters that caused earlier libraries and treasures to be hidden, will now cause them to be found. The lost records of Atlantis, Lemuria and other civilisations, will be rediscovered.
Those who survive to inherit the new world that is about to flourish on the earth will come to know a life that is beyond the imagination of modern man. But first they will need to prove that they are worthy. They will need to survive the Great Initiation spoken of in your holy books.
Allan, Questions and Answers, June 14, 2018, 3:44 pm
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac, which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. Welcome to this Podcast Allan. I’m delighted to be able to chat to you again.
It’s my pleasure Mark.
Mark: So much has happened since our last Podcast just a few weeks ago about climate change, that I feel like I owe you an apology.
Why is that Mark?
Mark: Well I started off that discussion by asking you whether you really believe that the changes that are taking place in the earth’s climate today are as serious as you make them out to be?
And now, as a result of the devastating hurricanes of the last few weeks, it is obvious that our weather is a far greater hazard than I had ever imagined. So I am sorry that I doubted you.
Well I certainly don’t derive any satisfaction from it all Mark. The graphic scenes shown on TV lately have been absolutely devastating, and my heart goes out to all those who have had to live through these experiences, not only in the United States but in the Caribbean as well.
It’s not just the fact that so many people have been caught up in these disasters. What makes it worse is that for many thousands of those who have lost everything, their time of tribulation predicted in the Bible has already begun, for they will never regain what they have lost.
And it is not as if these extreme hurricanes are rare events that only happen once or twice a century. There now seems every likelihood that these extreme weather events will continue to happen, not just with increasing frequency, but with increasing ferocity. So things may get even worse.
What made hurricanes Harvey, Irma and others so devastating was their size as well as their windspeed. Harvey dumped more rain on the state of Texas than any other hurricane in recorded US history, while Irma was so large that it ultimately covered the entire state of Florida.
And the key factor in both these cases was heat, because the oceans that spawned them were hotter than ever before. Hurricane Irma was formed in tropical waters off the coast of Africa, and from there travelled west into the Caribbean where sea temperatures were 90 degrees or more.
And hurricane Harvey continued to rotate around the Texas coast for days on end, sucking up moisture from the equally hot waters of the Gulf of Mexico, and then dumping it on the city of Houston, which then experienced record floods.
As climatologists are now discovering, the earth’s circulation system is getting hotter, with predictable consequences. As the climate warms, so evaporation rates go up which then leads to increasing precipitation. More moisture is drawn up into the clouds, which then falls as rain.
But not all places are being affected equally. Although the overall temperature of the air may be getting warmer, it is not uniform in the way it affects the planet, since the hotter air over the land is not evaporating as much moisture as the air over the oceans.
So while the humidity on the land rises, often creating intolerable living conditions for people living in those parts of the world as it does so, this does not necessarily lead to rain. Instead, these places often experience extended droughts, as we are already seeing in different parts of the world.
So the reality is that hurricanes like Harvey and Irma may not just happen once or twice in a lifetime. Instead they may become routine in years to come. And the periodic droughts that scour the land may soon turn entire food-growing areas of the world into dustbowls.
And this of course just brings us back to the same basic equation. The earth and the oceans are getting hotter because the sun is getting hotter. And as we discussed in our previous Podcast, the sun is getting hotter because of increased cosmic radiation coming from beyond the solar system.
Mark: When you put it like that, I can see why you wrote in your Blog that the earth is threatened with extinction. But I still can’t get my head around the idea that the entire history of mankind could suddenly come to an end.
Surely you don’t think that our entire civilization might become extinct, after thousands of years of progress, from cavemen up to the scientific age in which we live today?
Actually Mark, I do. And the reason I say that is because it has it has happened before. And not just once, but many times. This may come as a shock to many people. Entire civilizations have disappeared without trace. After all, we have only to look at the Bible to find evidence of this.
In the 7th verse of chapter 6 of the book of Genesis, we read how the Lord said: “I will destroy man whom I have created from the face of the earth, both man, and beast, and the creeping thing, and the fowls of the air, for it repenteth me that I have made them.”
And what strikes me as particularly pertinent is the reason the Bible gives why God did this. “And God saw that the wickedness of man was great in the earth, and every imagination of the thoughts of his heart was only evil continually”. Ring any bells Mark?
While most people tend to treat the Biblical account of a world-wide flood as a fanciful legend, more and more evidence is emerging to suggest that this is exactly what took place many thousands of years ago. This evidence is now being found in every corner of the world.
Our scholars and scientists are taught that the first stirrings of civilization began in Mesopotamia some six thousand years ago, and yet we find megalithic structures all over the world that were obviously built many thousands of years before that.
Elsewhere on my Blog I have referred to the work of Boston geologist Robert Schoch indicating that the body of the sphinx in Egypt shows signs of erosion that could only have been caused by prolonged exposure to water. He believes that the sphinx is at least 11,000 years old.
Even Darwin was confronted with evidence of global catastrophe when he wrote in his Journal of Researches: “Certainly, no fact in the long history of the world is so startling as the wide and repeated exterminations of its inhabitants. What, then, has exterminated so many species and whole genera?
“The mind at first is irresistibly hurried into the belief of some great catastrophe; but thus to destroy animals, both large and small, in Southern Patagonia, in Brazil, on the Cordillera of Peru, in North America up to Behring’s Straits, we must shake the entire framework of the globe.”
Despite clear fossil evidence of animals, both large and small, that had been wiped out from Southern Patagonia all the way up to the Bering Straits, Darwin could not bring himself to believe that “the entire framework of the globe” could have been shaken by a world-wide catastrophe.
Yet if he had continued his journey to Easter Island in the central Pacific Ocean, he would have seen huge stone effigies called Moai that were buried up to their necks in sand, that was clearly deposited by some ancient flood long after these statues were carved.
And then there are the ancient megalithic ruins of Gobekli Tepe in Turkey, and Puma Punku in Bolivia. Both of these sites were also covered by soil that had been deposited over them at some time in the distant past, indicating that they too had once been overcome by a giant flood.
All of this points to the fact that some unimaginable disaster engulfed the world about 13,000 years ago, leaving nothing but stray stone remnants of the cultures that had created them, and of whom we know virtually nothing. However, later cultures did leave some tantalising written records.
Mark: What sort of records are you referring to?
The idea that the earth has undergone a succession of catastrophic upheavals was not limited to the Jews, the Greeks and the Egyptians. In central America, the Maya had legends of their own describing times when the earth was convulsed by cosmic encounters.
While these stories vary in the number of ages that have come and gone, they all agree that at periodic intervals various disasters have assailed the earth causing widespread destruction. The agents of this destruction have been earthquakes, hurricanes and floods, as well as “fire from the sky”.
The Chinese believed that there had been ten different ages from the beginning of the world up to the time of Confucius. They referred to these vanished ages as Kis, and their ancient encyclopedia described these past eras in the following words:
“In a general convulsion of nature, the sea is carried out of its bed, mountains spring out of the ground, rivers change their course, human beings and everything are ruined, and the ancient traces effaced”.
The sacred Hindu book Bhagavata Purana called these past ages Kalpas or Yugas, and indicated that there had been four previous ages of mankind, and that each of these different ages had ended as a result of a different kind of catastrophe.
The ancient Buddhist scripture called the Visuddhi-Magga, which was written about 430 BC, described these different kinds of catastrophe as follows: “There are three destructions: the destruction by water, the destruction by fire, and the destruction by wind”.
Even the Greeks had an extinction story of their own. According to their mythology, Phaeton asked his father Helios, the sun god, if he could drive the chariot of the sun across the sky. Unfortunately, he drove it too close to the earth, causing his father to kill him with a thunderbolt.
In a passage recorded by Plato in his essay entitled Timaeus, when the Athenian statesman Solon visited Egypt some six hundred years before the birth of Christ, an elderly priest said to him:
“Oh Solon, Solon, you Greeks are all children, and there is no such thing as an old Greek. You are all young in mind. You have no belief rooted in the old tradition and no knowledge hoary with age. And the reason is this. There have been and will be many different calamities to destroy mankind, the greatest of them by fire and water, lesser ones by countless other means.
“Your own story of how Phaeton, child of the sun, harnessed his father’s chariot, but was unable to guide it along his father’s course and so burnt up things on earth and was himself destroyed by a thunderbolt, is a mythical version of the truth that there is at long intervals a variation in the course of the heavenly bodies and a consequent widespread destruction by fire of things on the earth”.
But that’s not all Mark. Another famous Greek, this time Herodotus, who has been called the “Father of History”, visited Egypt for himself and recorded his own conversations that he had with various Egyptian priests. This is what he wrote in his Second Book of History:
“The priests asserted that within historical ages and since Egypt became a kingdom, four times in this period (so they told me) the sun rose contrary to his wont; twice he rose where he now sets, and twice he set where he now rises.”
Mark: Well done Allan, I must congratulate you on your knowledge of ancient literature. I had no idea about all this.
Well Mark, I have to concede that everything I know about this comes from Immanuel Velikovsky. He was the great Jewish scholar who devoted years of his life to researching the historical texts of many ancient cultures, and they tell a very different story from what we are taught today.
But the reason I bring this up is because there appears to be a sinister parallel between what was recorded in ancient times, and what we are observing in our skies today. Not only is something very strange happening to our sun, but to the axis of the earth as well.
For if those Egyptian priests who spoke to Herodotus were correct, and the sun actually did change its course and rise in the west instead of the east, this could only mean that, at some point within the living memory of humanity, the earth flipped upside down. And not once, but several times!
In other words, the earth turned on its axis by 180º – something that modern astronomers believe to be impossible. But just suppose that those ancient Egyptian priests were correct and the earth did flip on its axis. And if it happened then, could it also happen now?
As every child is taught in school today, the earth does not spin vertically on its own axis. It tilts to one side, and it is this tilt that accounts for the different seasons that we experience on the earth. And for the last several thousand years, this angle of tilt has remained pretty much the same.
Today the earth’s axis is tilted roughly 23.5 degrees from the plane of its orbit around the sun. So from the point of view of people on the earth, the sun appears to move between the tropic of Cancer in the north, and the tropic of Capricorn in the south.
However, this angle of tilt does change slightly over time, and over a period of about 41,000 years it varies between 22.1 and 24.5 degrees. However, this tiny correction could never cause the sun to appear to change its course and rise in the west instead of the east, as the Egyptian priests claimed.
But this is where things become, as I say, a little sinister Mark, because I keep coming across reports that suggest that the axis of the earth may be changing. And although these changes may be small for now, they could become a lot greater in the days to come.
Mark: What sort of changes are you talking about?
Well Mark, you won’t find any mention of this in the press, and certainly nothing about it in any scientific reports. But people who have lived in the same location for many years are beginning to report things that don’t seem quite right.
As I have mentioned before, if you want to know what is really going on in the world today, it is often more instructive to listen to ordinary citizens than the Government. And the best place to do this is to check out the comments on YouTube videos dealing with changes in the sun.
I have made a habit of doing this ever since I became interested in the subject of axial tilt. Here are a few examples of what people have been reporting lately about changes they have noticed in the path of the sun. I am quoting them exactly as they were written.
I’m in Upstate N.Y. I’ve lived in the same home for 45 years. My kitchen windows face due north. The Sun now sets shining into my north facing windows. Noticed it last year a little, but now it’s very noticeable!
I’m in Southern Michigan and have been noticing the changes in the sun location as well as the stars. The Earth is tilting to the South. That would likely be the reason for the melting of the North Pole as well. Not necessarily global warming, but a global shifting of the poles.
Down in New Zealand (North Island) it is the same – rising in north-east and setting NNW! Back room gets no sun as it is lying south! Solar panels were put up in 2015 (Dec) and don’t make power like they used to, even with it being winter! Nothing normal. Blinds on the east were made to shade – sun doesn’t shine on true east now!
I live up in Northern Michigan on Torch lake, and things are way off. It’s been very cold and way too much precipitation. My north deck now gets sun all day. We also had to move our solar panels from the south side of our house to the north side. Things are definitely changing.
I live in NW Indiana and I have followed the signs of the times and events of the days for several years now. I am certain that the sun is setting much farther north than in years past.
Am in Lower Michigan Battle Creek area. The Sun surely has been rising and setting so far North that the North side of my house now gets sun on it. I usually have to power-wash the moss off it because the sun never hit it. Not this year.
Here in UK Somerset we used to watch the sunsets from our back garden for as long as I can remember, but now the sunsets are only visible from the front of the house [north]!!
This is true for me too. I’m in Grandview Missouri. I’ve noticed that sun is setting way far to the north, like in northwest instead of west.
The Inuit in the Arctic have been saying this for the last few years. I watch the sun set into the Pacific Ocean from Costa Rica and the sun now sets a solid 30 degrees further north than it did 10 years ago. At its most northern set on the June 21st solstice it would set into the ocean from off the point of Playa Coyote. Now when it sets on this date it now touches the horizon on land a full 30 degrees further north than it used to.
Mark: This does sound suspicious Allan, but we can’t draw any significant conclusions from a few comments on YouTube.
Quite right Mark. However, if these comments indicate that the sun really is following a different path in the sky, then it could only be because the axial tilt of the earth is changing. And there does seem to be scientific evidence that this is happening.
About a year ago, NASA scientists reported that the axis of the earth appeared to be shifting. According to University of Tasmania geodesist Matt King, NASA found that the axis had shifted dramatically from its long-term path, first in 2005, and then again in 2012.
These scientists concluded that the reason for this was that global warming was causing hundreds of billions of tons of ice to melt, particularly in Greenland and the Arctic ocean, and that this loss rate was two to three times more than it had been between 2003 and 2009.
This differential in the weight of ice at the geographical North and South poles was causing the axis of the earth to wobble. And although the extent of this wobble was still relatively small, no one could predict what might happen in the years to come.
I am reminded here of an episode I heard on the popular late-night radio talk show “Coast to Coast AM” several years back, in which listeners were invited to submit examples of any dreams or visions they had about the future. George D. in Vancouver, B.C. had this to say:
“I see the obliquity of Earth’s axis changing due to the melting of polar ice, shifting trillions upon trillions of tons of earth’s mass towards the equator, which causes the continental plates to shift”. He then went on to add:
“An abrupt ending to Mid-Eastern wars and current global conflicts occurs – due to massive earthquakes as the continental plates shift from their present location. Many nations and islands will be obliterated. Food shortages and lack of fresh water will escalate, affecting all people on earth”.
Remember, the authorities are not telling us what is really going on. As I have pointed out on my Blog, they routinely understate the intensity of UV radiation so as not to alarm the public. Could something similar be happening with changes in the axis of the earth?
But if you don’t mind Mark, I’d like to go back to the beginning of my article on climate change titled “An Inconvenient Truth”. I quoted the words of Richard Leakey, the renowned Kenyan paleoanthropologist, who had this to say about the environmental crisis facing the world.
Mark: Certainly. What did he have to say?
“If you look at the fossil record, the thing that strikes you is that extinction is the most common phenomena. Extinction is always driven by environmental change, and environmental change is always driven by climate change.”
Leakey went on to say that, according to the fossil record, over 95% of all the species that have ever lived upon the earth have become extinct. And the cause of all these deaths has been a succession of what he calls “extinction level events”.
So according to Leakey, while climate change may signal impending changes on the earth, it is the actual “extinction level event” that leads to all the casualties. And most often, these extinction events are caused by “fire from the sky”.
And this is where Bible prophecy comes in. For the Bible not only predicts the climate and environmental changes that we are seeing on the earth today, but it also describes an extinction level event that would destroy a large proportion of life on this planet.
In the 8th chapter of his Book of Revelation, St. John wrote:
“And the third angel sounded, and there fell a great star from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of the rivers, and upon the fountains of waters; and the name of the star is called Wormwood; and the third part of the waters became wormwood; and many men died of the waters, because they were made bitter”.
And ever since that time, Biblical scholars have debated what it was that St. John was describing. The key for me Mark, is the fact that he describes this “great star from heaven” as “burning like a lamp”. In other words, it was glowing in the sky before it fell to earth.
This description makes it likely that Wormwood is a comet, especially since this interpretation is shared by mystics like Nostradamus, Edgar Cayce, Mother Shipton and St. Hildegard. And if it is a comet, it would also explain all the other plagues described in the Book of Revelation.
Finally Mark, it is worth noting again the words of Jesus regarding events that will take place in the skies above the earth during the period leading up to his return, as recorded in chapter 21 verses 25 and 26 of St. Luke’s gospel.
“And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations, with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring; Men’s hearts failing them for fear, and looking after those things which are coming on the earth; for the powers of heaven shall be shaken”.
The part that really stands out for me in this quotation is the reference to “men’s hearts failing them for fear”. What do you suppose Jesus was referring to that would cause men’s hearts to fail them with fear? Maybe the following story will provide us with a clue.
Remember when I referred to the radio talk show “Coast to Coast AM” earlier, in which listeners were invited to call in about any dreams or visions which they had about the future. Well, there was another caller from Canada named Lawrie. This is what he had to say.
“Back in 1995 I had this dream of this big huge planet-like sphere in the night sky and it was pulsing and very bright. We knew it was the end of our world as we know it.
“It was kind of scary, yet most amazing and we were in awe, and this entity was so huge and powerful that you just accepted it. The whole event was so real. It’s like the whole world came together to look up at this thing and we all realized that there was no stopping this”.
Mark: That certainly is an interesting story. But I still can’t accept that the world as we know it might be coming to an end. And even if it is, I have a simple question. Why us, and why now?
Well Mark, I should make it clear that the world itself is not ending. It will carry on. But our cycle of civilization is definitely coming to an end. And out of the ruins of our civilization there will arise another that is more glorious than anything we can imagine.
But in answer to your simple question, I have a simple answer. It’s about time. That might sound trite, but it goes to the heart of why these events are happening at this time. Anyway, I will explain what I mean by that comment in more detail during our next conversation.
Mark: I appreciate everything that you have discussed today, and look forward to hearing your answer to my question. You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.
Allan, AUDIO, Signs of the Times, The Tilting Axis, September 18, 2017, 11:31 am
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac,which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. So Allan, let me start by welcoming you to this Podcast. How have you been keeping?
Pretty well thanks. Keeping myself busy doing research and writing various articles that appear on my Blog. As I am sure you are aware Mark, we are certainly living in turbulent times.
Mark: I’m glad you mentioned that. I just finished reading your Blog dealing with climate change, and my head is still spinning from some of the issues that you raised. Can we spend some time talking about them?
Certainly Mark. Where would you like to begin?
Mark: Well I guess my first question is, do you really think that the changes that are taking place in the earth’s climate are as serious as you make them out to be?
Absolutely Mark. But before we get into that we need to be clear about the fact that there are two completely different scenarios that are unfolding at this time. The first is what most people on the planet THINK is going on, and the second is what is REALLY going on.
Let’s start off by talking about what people THINK is going on. As I pointed out in my Blog, the world owes a tremendous debt of gratitude to Al Gore. He was the first prominent American to publicize the problem of climate change in his documentary entitled An Inconvenient Truth.
Up until 2006 when his movie was released, the attitude of the public was that climate change was a problem that was too big for any individual to solve, and therefore needed to be dealt with at government level by those countries that were the biggest polluters.
Although Rachel Carson can probably be called the true founder of the environmental movement through the publication of her book Silent Spring in 1962, it was Al Gore who focussed public attention directly on the problem of climate change.
He personalised this issue by pointing out that every individual contributed to this problem, and therefore bore a moral responsibility for changing their own behaviour in ways that would reduce their carbon footprint, and thus improve their own environment.
And since that time, an entirely new movement has emerged, and that is the so-called “green” revolution. Now I am not referring to the global movement of the 1960’s that was designed to increase agricultural production as a way of dealing with the threat of widespread famine.
I am talking about the growing movement, particularly within Western societies, towards “clean and green” technology, as well as a desire to align activities according to the needs of the environment, rather than at the expense of the environment. Much of this can also be attributed to Al Gore.
His view, which has subsequently been adopted by 195 countries that were signatories to the Paris Accord in November, 2016, is that burning fossil fuels have led to a dramatic increase in carbon dioxide in our atmosphere, and that this is to blame for the “greenhouse effect” that is heating the planet.
Today most climatologists believe that humanity is to blame for global warming, and that unless we change our behaviour, the world is going to get hotter and hotter. The unfortunate truth is that while they are correct about the consequences, they are completely wrong in their diagnosis.
Mark: So are you saying that these scientists don’t understand the real cause of climate change?
Exactly. But what is worse Mark, is that because global warming is NOT caused by human activity, NOTHING that these scientists do to reduce the use of carbon fuels is going to have the slightest effect in improving the situation on the surface of the earth.
That doesn’t mean that greenhouse gases don’t pose a problem for society. They do. They pollute the atmosphere and cause all sorts of diseases and lung problems. For these reasons alone it is worth limiting the use of carbon-based fuel. But this has nothing to do with global warming.
The fact is that greenhouse gases are a POLLUTION problem. And while anything that we can do to improve the environment by reducing the amount of pollutants in our air and water is admirable, this by itself will do nothing to solve the problem of global warming.
The sad fact is that most people are completely unaware of the true cause of climate change. And the reason this is sad Mark, is because the authorities who know that mankind is not to blame, also know that if the truth ever became known, it would cause widespread panic all over the world.
That is why the Secret Government has gone to such extreme lengths to keep the truth hidden. They know that international efforts like the Paris Accord help to deflect public attention away from the real cause of climate change, as well as what they themselves are doing about it.
Mark: So tell me Allan, what is the real cause of climate change?
Well Mark, the reason why I devoted so much space to this in my Blog, is because I feel strongly that no matter how bad things may happen to be, we all have an inalienable right to know what is REALLY going on in the world, even if certain authorities would prefer to hide the truth from us.
Obviously, they have their own agenda, which is to preserve law and order and prevent mass panic. And while one cannot argue against this, I feel an equally strong case can be made for making the truth available to all those who seek, so that they can make an informed choice about how to respond.
This is where the rubber meets the road. If I tell you what I know and you start sharing this information with other people, then before long the news will spread and the authorities will have no way of controlling the outcome. Hence their determination to hide the truth at all costs.
So by talking about this on a public forum Mark, we will inevitably attract the attention of those whose task is to silence whistle-blowers. And as I have already shown on my Blog, the consequences of doing so can be deadly.
But the reason that I am doing this now is because it fulfills ancient Bible prophecy. When the disciples asked Jesus what signs would signal the time of his return, his reply was recorded in verses 25- 26 of chapter 21 of the gospel of St. Luke:
“And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations, with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring; Men’s hearts failing them for fear, and looking after those things which are coming on the earth; for the powers of heaven shall be shaken”.
Jesus made it plain that when the time of his return drew near, there would be “signs in the sun”, and that is exactly what we are experiencing at this time. For according to the anonymous whistle-blower that I quoted in Part Four of my Blog, these changes began to be noticed some seventy years ago.
As far back as the 1940’s, certain physicists and astronomers began to notice a pattern of change coming over the sun. At first these changes were hardly noticeable, but then as the new millennium drew closer, they became more and more pronounced.
From the year 2,000 onwards, the sun’s activity has become increasingly unstable, and this has led to changes on the earth that have become increasingly threatening. But these changes have not been limited to the earth. They have affected other planets in our solar system as well.
Mark: I noticed that you discussed these changes at length in your Blog.
The reason I did so Mark, was to emphasize the fact that all the planets in our solar system are being affected, although each in different ways. In the case of earth, the most dramatic sign is the change in our climate, and the steady increase in global warming.
But the sun is not just a source of heat and light. It not only affects our climate, but it also impacts almost every aspect of life on this planet. It affects human beings as well as every other species that lives upon the earth. And the changes that are occurring are truly alarming.
Climate is just one of the signs of the changes affected by the sun. Scientists have recently discovered that a new mass extinction is underway. Insect and animal migrations are changing all around the planet, as they try to adapt to these new climatic conditions.
Biological mutations have begun to erupt spontaneously within species that have no counterpart in history, and defy conventional explanation. One of the most disturbing examples of this is the discovery that human male sperm counts are dropping precipitously all around the world.
But it is not just male infertility that has been affected, but the entire division of the sexes as well. We no longer have a simple separation of the sexes into male and female, but we are witnessing an explosion of mixed genders, as can be seen from the entire LGBTQ community.
These changes are potentially catastrophic to life, and will almost certainly cause the earth’s environment to experience abrupt changes on a massive scale. Furthermore, this transformation appears to be unstoppable. It is also clear that these changes do not originate on the sun.
Because the sun is affected by this phenomenon along with all the other planets, those scientists who are in the know have concluded that the entire solar system is interacting with some previously unknown trans-dimensional energy that is coming from outer space.
In other words, these changes are being caused by radiation emanating from an area of space that we have never experienced before, as the solar system makes its slow orbit around the centre of our spiral galaxy. And this radiation is causing our sun to become more and more dangerous.
Mark: I noticed that you also wrote about how the sun was becoming hotter, and was emitting higher amounts of dangerous ultraviolet radiation.
That’s right Mark. As I indicated in my Blog, scientists working for the Secret Government have discovered that changes in the climate of our planet, as well as increasing heat on land and in the ocean, are the direct result of increasing energy levels emanating from the sun.
In a nutshell, what this means is that scientific studies have now confirmed that the sun is getting hotter, and that it is also changing colour. Whereas up until about fifty years ago the sun was known for its golden glow, it has now become a white-hot ball in the sky.
And this changing colour has been accompanied by increasing amounts of ultraviolet radiation. Again, as I discussed in my Blog, the earth is being exposed to higher amounts of UV-B and UB-C radiation, which are the most dangerous forms of ultraviolet light.
One of the foremost investigators into this increase in UV radiation is California researcher Dane Wigington. He was one of the first people to buy his own UV meters to test whether the data provided by the authorities was correct. What he found was that it was being grossly understated.
Whereas climatologists agree that UV levels of 11 on the conventional UV index pose extreme risk of harm to human beings, Wigington found that his own measurements indicated that daily levels taken where he lived often reached levels that were far higher than this.
It became clear to him that authorities were routinely underestimating the true UV readings so as not to alarm the public. And the reason they did so, was because the sun was pumping out more and more dangerous UV radiation.
While much of the sun’s ultraviolet light is blocked by the ozone layer that surrounds the earth, recent changes in the ozone layer itself meant that more and more harmful UV rays were now reaching the earth and killing off coral reefs, fishes, and many other species.
As I indicated in my conclusion, the “inconvenient” truth about climate change is that the earth is dying. It is losing its ability to sustain life. Insects are dying. Trees and plants are dying. Birds and animals are dying. And all of this information is being hidden from the public.
Faced with this terrible truth, the Secret Government has responded by instigating one of the most ambitious environmental strategies in the history of the earth. They set about creating a thermal, anti-radiation barrier in the upper atmosphere just below the troposphere.
Mark: That’s something that I wanted to ask you. Is there really a world-wide project involving “chemtrails” that has been secretly going on for years?
Yes Mark, there is. In fact, according to whistle-blowers, this programme began in the United States in 1997. Since then it has spread to all the major industrial countries of the world, and all the while news of this activity has been hidden under a cloak of secrecy.
The programme itself is designed to use high-flying military tanker jets to spread a cocktail of chemicals in the sky, in such a way as to create an aerial shield that is designed to protect the earth from harmful radiation emanating from the sun.
It did not take long for investigators to refer to this cocktail of chemicals in the sky as “chemtrails”, because although they look exactly like ordinary aircraft condensation trails while they are being sprayed, they actually contain a combination of different chemicals.
Analysis of their ingredients by private laboratories confirm that these “chemtrails” consist primarily of particles of Barium, Aluminum Oxide and Carbon Black, as well as smaller amounts of Chromium, Cadmium, Nickel, Ethylene Dibromide and radioactive Thorium.
It is also worth noting that because these particles are heavier than air, and would normally sink quickly to the ground, they are also mixed with various polymers, which help them to remain suspended in the atmosphere for longer periods of time.
It goes without saying that this toxic blend of chemicals sprayed all over the world is a double-edged sword. While it is designed as a desperate attempt to protect the earth by warding off harmful radiation from the sun, it is also bound to harm the immune systems of the sick, the elderly and the young.
It was also recognized that the presence of Aluminum Oxide particles in the air would lead to an increase in the incidence of Alzheimer’s disease. However, this was deemed to be a small price to pay for the attempt to ensure the long-term survival of our civilization.
It was also known that the presence of Aluminum particles in the soil would adversely affect crop yields. In this context, it is interesting to note that the multi-national agrochemical company Monsanto, recently began marketing Aluminum resistant seeds.
And it is not just agricultural crops that are being threatened by this rain of aluminum particles falling from the sky. In forests all around the world, this coating of aluminum particles is causing wildfires to burn hotter and become more destructive than ever before.
Anyway Mark, the question that has always baffled the public is this. At a time when classified and confidential matters are routinely leaked to the press, if there really was a secret Government programme involving chemtrails, then how could they possibly keep this secret year after year?
And the answer to this conundrum is simple. The fact is that this aerosol spraying programme is not being conducted by the regular Government, but by the Secret Government. And they know how to keep secrets. It was a trick they learned and perfected over sixty years ago.
Mark: And that brings me to the key question I’ve been wanting to ask you Allan. Who, or what, is the Secret Government that you keep referring to?
That’s a great question Mark. The usual amusing answer that security personnel like to give is this. I could tell you, but then I would have to kill you in case you turned me in for revealing classified information. Anyway, as I said, it all began soon after the end of the second World War.
In July 1947, a UFO crashed in the desert just outside the town of Roswell, New Mexico. Since that time, investigators have been divided into two camps. Some believe that this was a hoax perpetrated on a gullible public, while others are convinced that something unusual really happened.
What is beyond dispute is that when this came to the attention of President Truman, he formed a special committee to investigate the matter. It consisted of twelve people, made up of leaders of the various branches of the U.S. Military, together with a few select scientists.
When Dwight Eisenhower took over the Presidency from Truman, he expanded this original group of twelve to include laymen as well as leaders of industry, particularly those whose businesses were already involved in top-secret projects.
He also did something which changed the nature of this group from that time onwards. He initiated the concept of “plausible deniability”. This was done so that if news of their clandestine activities ever became public knowledge, he could truthfully say that he knew nothing about it.
Eisenhower arranged for their activities to be financed by a “black” budget that was classified “top-secret”. That meant that this Secret Government could do pretty much anything they wanted, without ever being accountable to Congress. And that is the way it has stayed ever since.
In time President Eisenhower came to regret his earlier decision. He realised that he had let a genie out of the bag that could no longer be constrained. And, in his farewell speech to the nation, he warned people to beware of the growing power of the “Military-Industrial-Complex”.
Because this group of twelve men initially consisted primarily of military leaders, it did not take them long to use military tactics to ensure secrecy and security. They did this by adopting a strategy that had served them well in the second World War. It was the policy of “compartmentalization”.
Operations were conducted on a “need to know” basis. Staff were only told what they needed to know for the task for which they were hired. They were under orders never to talk to others about what they did, even to those who worked alongside of them.
They were also bound by an oath of secrecy, which was policed by specially selected “guardians”, whose job it was to ensure that they never breached security. The penalties for anyone found guilty of revealing classified information were sufficiently harsh to ensure that staff never talked.
Over the years, the range of activities in which this Secret Government has become involved has grown ever larger. According to the CIA whistle-blower Kevin Shipp that I quoted in Part Three, their activities now extend to almost every agency of the Federal Government.
And as Shipp explained, these agencies require all people engaged in classified black budget projects to sign binding secrecy agreements (non-disclosure agreements) as a condition of employment, and that it is these agreements that have served as the ultimate tool in maintaining secrecy.
In addition to their ability to silence possible whistle-blowers from within, the Secret Government has also developed a slick PR campaign to deal with members of the public who asked embarrassing questions about unusual trails in the sky that were obviously not natural.
They used the same technique they had successfully developed all those years earlier when dealing with the subject of UFO’s. They would deny that any such clandestine campaign existed, and then brand all those who asked questions as cranks or “conspiracy theorists”.
“The whole thing is a hoax,” authorities would say when confronted, “and we don’t discuss hoaxes”. They simply dismissed the topic out of hand. And by treating the whole subject as a joke and by ridiculing anyone who tried to get serious answers to serious questions, even the press has been silenced.
But to cut a long story short, when it was discovered that the earth was threatened by harmful radiation coming from the sun, and that it was necessary to undertake a global aerosol dispersal programme, it was easy for the Secret Government to set this up, and ensure complete secrecy.
Mark: It still find it hard to believe that this has been going on for all these years without the public knowing anything about it. By the way, you also wrote about underground and undersea bases. What can you tell us about them?
Well Mark, this is the other side of the coin, so to speak. When it became clear that the world was being threatened by increased levels of cosmic radiation coming from beyond the solar system, scientists like Edward Teller proposed creating an atmospheric shield to protect the earth.
But the effectiveness of this was always going to be problematic. Firstly, no-one knew if this shield would actually be effective. And secondly, even if it was, nobody could predict how long it might be needed. After all, the harmful radiation coming from outer space might continue for centuries.
The most practical solution therefore, was to build underground shelters, especially since many of them already existed from the days of the cold war with the Soviet Union. Besides, new developments like the nuclear-powered subterrene enabled engineers to do in months what previously took years.
So the Secret Government began to build underground shelters all over, or should I say under, the country. Initially, these shelters were built below military bases, but later on they became associated with places with easy public access, like Denver International airport.
According to whistle-blower Phil Schneider, who was one of those employed in building these bases, a new self-contained underground base is being completed every six weeks. So as you can imagine Mark, there are now literally hundreds of these shelters all across America.
Mark: So who do you think are going to be living in these underground shelters?
Well Mark, it’s certainly not going to be you or me. They are being reserved primarily for the military, and for Federal and State officials who would be responsible for the continuation of government. Other people would be approved as needed to maintain equipment and machinery.
These people are given security ID cards which give details on how to access their nearest underground shelter, in the event of a national emergency. And as for the rest of us Mark, we would be left on the surface to fend for ourselves as best we could.
Bear in mind that these shelters would only be used if conditions on the ground became too dangerous, or if climatic conditions generated mass panic, or if the country was faced with some other calamity such as the threat of nuclear war.
Mark: Anyway Allan, before we wrap up, my final question is this. How do you think this is all going to play out? What is going to happen to our planet? Are we all going to die?
Well if I knew the answers to those questions Mark, I would probably already have a lucrative job with the Secret Government. I think it is fair to say that nobody really knows for sure, although there is certainly no shortage of people and organisations who think they have the answer.
Although I am not a prophet, I have studied Bible prophecy for many years, so I can tell you what the Bible has to say on this subject. But I’m afraid it is not going to make you feel any better Mark. In fact, the problems posed by climate change will seem tiny in comparison.
Shortly before Jesus died on the cross, his disciples asked him what signs they should look out for during the “last days” prior to his promised return. What he told them is recorded in the gospels. And then there are the writings of St. John in his Book of Revelation.
Their predictions are a case of “good news” and “bad news”. The “bad news” is that the world will shortly undergo a seven-year period of tribulation, the likes of which it has never experienced before. During this time, most of the people who are alive on the earth today will die.
The agent of this destruction, and the event that will trigger the beginning of the seven years of tribulation, will be an asteroid that will strike the earth. St. John calls this asteroid a “great millstone”, and in the 8th chapter of his Book of Revelation he writes: “And the second angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea”.
As I have pointed out in my Blog, I believe this asteroid will hit the ocean just west of Puerto Rico. The destruction caused by the impact of this asteroid will lead to the death of hundreds of millions of people within a matter of minutes, mainly due to giant Tsunamis generated by the shock waves of this impact, that will devastate coastlines and low-lying areas all around the world.
The great tribulation will end with the battle of Armageddon that is predicted to take place in the valley of Jezreel, close to the town of Megiddo in Israel. This final war will be fought between the forces of the Anti-Christ on the one hand, and the armies of the Prince of the East on the other.
But just when it seems as if the last remnant of humanity will be wiped off the face of the earth, this clash of armies will culminate in the long-awaited return of the Saviour, whose arrival will herald a new golden age, followed by a thousand years of peace, joy and tranquillity.
However, the “good news” of the Bible is that some people will be spared from these disasters. They will be miraculously taken out of their bodies to a place of safety, through a process that has come to be known as the “rapture”. These will be people whom the Bible calls the “chosen ones”.
But even those who miss out on the initial rapture will have a second chance. Those who manage to endure this time of tribulation and keep their faith intact without succumbing to the lure of the teachings of the Anti-Christ, are promised a golden crown upon the Saviour’s return.
Mark: Well Allan, I’d like to thank you for your time, and for all the provocative information you have provided about climate change. You have certainly given me plenty to think about. If there are any listeners out there who would like to know more about the things we have talked about today, feel free to check out the following link.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, AUDIO, Signs of the Times, August 11, 2017, 1:49 pm
So where has this search for the truth about global warming and climate change led us? What started off as an investigation into the science of what was going on in the upper atmosphere of our planet, has taken us on a circuitous journey to secret bases deep below the surface of the earth.
And what began as an innocent enough enquiry into a phenomenon that has captured the attention of all the countries around the globe, has led us into a dark world of government secrecy and classified information that is shrouded in deception, disease and death.
This quest for understanding has taken us from international forums where the subject is widely discussed and openly debated, to hidden chambers where evidence is officially denied as a conspiratorial hoax, and whistleblowers who speak out do so at the risk of their lives.
Yet beneath all this talk of conspiracy and denial, one truth remains self evident. The facts speak for themselves, no matter how much political spin is applied. The threat is real, and the threat is now. The evidence is undeniable, and it keeps on mounting month by month.
Our climate is changing, and changing at a pace that is beyond the control of any government, whether national or international. Extreme weather events are occurring all around the planet, threatening the existence of every species, from fish and birds to human beings themselves.
The Apparent Truth
Faced with this threat, the scientists of the world have come together to try to speak with a single voice on this matter. According to the official NASA website on Global Climate Change there is a consensus among studies published in peer-reviewed scientific journals.
According to NASA, the conclusion of 97% of climate scientists who have actively published reports on this subject is that climate-warming trends over the past century are extremely likely to have been the result of human activity, which is what activists like Al Gore have been preaching for years.
The human activities they refer to are the burning of coal and gas to generate power, as well and the use of carbon-based products to fuel our cars and machinery. It is the burning of these products that create the greenhouse gases that form the atmospheric barrier that traps heat.
And because global warming is believed to be a problem that we ourselves have caused, there has been a growing movement within the international community that has culminated in the Paris Accord on climate change, in which 195 countries have agreed to reduce their use of carbon products.
But behind this apparent unanimity among scientists and nations that human beings are the cause of climate change, and are therefore directly responsible for solving the problem, there has been another sinister and secret campaign that is based on a totally different premise.
The Real Truth
That premise, which is also supported by scientific study, holds that changes in the climate of our planet, as well as the increasing heat on land and in the ocean, are the direct result of energies that are impacting the earth from sources beyond the solar system.
And based on this premise, secret agencies around the world have joined together to embark on a two-fold campaign. One part is designed to create an atmospheric shield around the planet to protect it from incoming radiation, and the other is to build underground and undersea shelters to save a select few from destruction.
The rationale behind the extreme secrecy surrounding this campaign is simple. If the truth about global warming is that the lives of all the people on the planet are at risk, then that truth can never be made public. As the whistleblower known as “Deep Shield” explained:
“Due to the severity of the situation it is mandatory to maintain public calm for as long as possible. The Earth is dying. Humanity is on the road to extinction – without the Shield mankind will die off within 20 to 50 years.
“Most people alive today could live to see this extinction take place. This means that an announcement of the situation we face boils down to telling every man, woman and child on earth that they have no future, they are going to be killed.
“People would panic. There would be economic collapse, the production and movement of goods would collapse. Millions would die in all cities on earth, riots and violence would reduce civilian centers to rubble within days.
“Half of the population in dense metropolitan areas would try to leave the cities seeking ‘safety’ in the rural areas thinking that they would be safe.
“Those left behind in the cities would be at war with their neighbors, fighting for the remaining supplies. We would be telling the world that the world is coming to an end, and even with the Shield the chances of survival are small”.(View Source)
Increasing Cosmic Radiation
So what is the real cause of this threat? The honest answer is that we still do not know. All we can say is that the earth, as well as the entire solar system, is being subjected to significantly increasing amounts of cosmic radiation, as can be seen in the following graph taken from Spaceweather.com
As the above graph clearly indicates, in the short space of two years from March 2015 to May 2017, the amount of cosmic radiation registered by high altitude balloons in the upper atmosphere above California has increased by 13%. The website goes on to say:
“Why are cosmic rays intensifying? The main reason is the sun. Solar storm clouds such as coronal mass ejections (CMEs) sweep aside cosmic rays when they pass by Earth. During Solar Maximum, CMEs are abundant and cosmic rays are held at bay.
“Now, however, the solar cycle is swinging toward Solar Minimum, allowing cosmic rays to return. Another reason could be the weakening of the Earth’s magnetic field, which helps protect us from deep-space radiation”.
As pointed out above, the main reason that cosmic rays are intensifying is the sun. This was also pointed out by Swiss and German scientists as far back as July 2004, according to a report that was published in the British newspaper The Telegraph.
This study was based on research led by Dr. Sami Solanki, director of the renowned Max Planck Institute for Solar System Research in Gottingen, Germany. The conclusion of their study was that the earth was getting hotter because the sun was brighter than at any time in the last 1,000 years.
Although Dr. Solanki indicated that he did not know what was causing the sun to burn brighter, or how long this cycle would last, he did say that he believed that the impact of this intense sunlight on the ozone layer could be affecting the climate more than the sunlight itself.
Ozone Layer
Dr. Solanki’s comment about the effect of this intense sunlight upon the ozone layer goes to the very heart of the problem that is affecting the earth at this time. The reason is because of the nature of the ozone layer, and the function it fulfills in our atmosphere.
The atmosphere of the earth is divided into several layers. The lowest layer, called the troposphere, extends from the surface of the earth to about six miles (10 kms) in altitude. The next layer, called the stratosphere, extends from there up to about thirty miles (50 kms) above the earth.
The ozone layer consists of ozone molecules that are suspended in the upper reaches of the stratosphere. Stratospheric ozone is a naturally occurring gas that helps to filter out ultraviolet (UV) radiation emanating from the sun. It has been called the earth’s sunscreen.
So if the ozone layer is diminished for any reason, as it is now, it allows more UV radiation to reach the earth’s surface. And it is this increased UV radiation that leads to skin cancer, cataracts and other health problems. It also disrupts marine life and reduces crop yields.
But ordinary people do not need scientific studies to tell them that something is seriously wrong with our sun. They can see and sense this as they go about their daily duties. They already know that sunlight feels hotter and that it is easier to get sunburned than before.
One of the easiest ways to find out what ordinary citizens think about the sun, is to scan the comments that can be seen below YouTube videos dealing with the subject of climate change. The following is a selection of what people around the world have been saying recently.
What YouTube Viewers Have to Say
“The Sun burns like the arc from a welder machine. Prickly hot on the skin. When you go outside it’s like living in an overexposed photograph is the only way I can explain it.
“We live in Camp Verde AZ – every year up to this year we have had an increasing number of fire ants in our yard. This year we have not seen even ONE ANT anywhere in the whole yard. Looking for them, we can’t find any. How can ants just not be there anymore? Are they all hiding under ground because of the deadly UV spikes? Are they all dead?
“All I know is that the UV intensity and whiteness of the sun is relatively new, and the climate, the weather, the air quality and other things were completely different when I was a kid, and I’ve lived in the same part of the country for more than sixty years. The changes are undeniable and I do not think it has all been caused by burning fossil fuels.
“I am 48 and I can say for a FACT!! I remember the sun being softer gold with yellow tones. You could look at it for a second. This bright white sun you can’t even glimpse at is not the sun I remember as a kid.
“I’m 43. You are right on about the Sun being white. It’s been like that a few years now. I been photographing the Sun for awhile now. Pictures show a white Sun.
“I’ve been telling my friends & family for at least 5-8 years now – our sunlight seems different. It feels different on my skin. I try to explain to them that it’s subtle, but it’s certainly different.
“When I’m out in the sun, the light hurts my skin in a different way than it ever has in my entire life — I’m now 45. I explain it as though it “feels hotter” — which is a poor description, I know. But it stings in a way that it never has before — a bit more intense, I suppose. It’s so very difficult to articulate… It just feels like the sunlight is more “intense”.
“What makes me say that is the effect that it has on my sensory nerves under my skin. Of course, most people say that I’m nuttier than usual, but I certainly can & I stand by my own claims that the sunlight is different than it’s been during the first 35-38 years of my life.
“I’m from Warren county in SW Ohio. I currently live in Dayton. For the past few years I have definitely felt the sun burning my skin faster than my entire life and it seems to only be getting worse. Crazy weather we’ve been having here in Ohio.
“Something must be up. I just got mild sunburn after 30 minutes outdoors yesterday. This is Winter (Tasmania, Australia). A passer by commented to me that the Sun was too bright, too hot, and much bigger for Winter…and it was not as low on the horizon.
“Notice how the sun doesn’t have a yellow hue any more, bright white!!
“No offense sincerely, but I remember a yellow hued sun growing up. I loved to watch clouds and the sun felt warm – not burning little water blisters on my forearms. Something has affected our star.
“94º today in PA. Something definitely has been going on with the sun for years now. It doesn’t seem so hot out until you get into sunlight. Then it feels like you are being micro-waved. Strange.
“I’m sensitive to the sun. It’s definitely hotter and more intense. I can’t even go out for a minute now without getting really red.
“My dear grandson got a terrible burn today here in Maryland, even though he was covered in sun-block.
“Yes, for we who knew the benign golden Sun, it’s really sad. I can hardly see to drive when the road glares so much under this light. Maybe I need welder’s goggles, it seems to burn and leave after images. You see everybody squinting some days.
“The sun was yellow and sky blue. It was called the golden sun. Remember the children’s song: Mister sun, Mister sun, Mister golden sun, please shine down on me. The sky was also much bluer then.
“Another older guy to testify that the sun used to be yellow. It was possible to look directly at the sun for up to about ten seconds and this was intense but felt purifying. Now the sun’s so bright you’d go blind.
“Adding to an old post. Yes, I’m 57. The sun used to be yellow. As a young (and dumb) kid I used to stare into the sun to see how long I could look at it. It was yellow. The sun used to rise and set in yellow, orange, & red with the red being the color when it was closest to the horizon. Today, it is simply white and almost unbearable to the eyes.
“I think what happened is the ozone just left us, I remember it being yellow. We as kids during the 80s colored in a “Yellow sun” I noticed this shift in 2002 / 2004. Suddenly it was just this crazy white and it gets whiter every year.
The above comments made by ordinary people may seem rambling and mundane, but they go to the essence of the changes that are taking place on the sun. In fact they have unwittingly realised the true cause of global warming and the effect this is having upon the surface of the earth.
The key to understanding global warming is simply this. The earth is getting hotter because the sun is getting hotter. And the hotter the sun gets, the whiter it gets.
The changes that these viewers have described have so far eluded all those climatologists who subscribe to the greenhouse gases explanation of global warming. The truth is that climate change is not the result of people burning fossil fuels. It is because the sun itself has changed.
The Conventional Theory of the Sun
Conventional climatologists suffer from one basic defect which prevents them from understanding the true causes of the changes that are taking place on this planet, and that is their understanding (or should I say “misunderstanding”) of the nature and function of our sun.
All the leading colleges and universities around the world teach a single theory about the origin and nature of the sun, and any student who hopes to graduate and go on to enjoy a career in science is obliged to accept this theory as proven fact.
The conventional view of science is that our sun is a circular star which lies at the centre of our solar system. This star is considered to be roughly 865,000 miles (1,393,000 kilometres) in diameter, with a mass of about 330,000 times the mass of the earth.
As a result of spectrographic analysis, three-quarters of this mass has been found to consist of hydrogen, while the rest of it is made up mostly of helium. Small amounts of heavier elements such as oxygen, carbon, neon and iron have also been found.
Our sun is thought to have formed about four and a half billion years ago, and is considered to have been the result of the gravitational collapse of a large molecular cloud, and it is this cloud that ultimately became the sun with its orbiting planets.
Being at the centre of this gravitational collapse, our sun became increasingly hot and dense until it reached a point when thermonuclear fusion spontaneously occurred. It is this process of nuclear fusion, by converting hydrogen nuclei into helium, that produces its heat and light.
Charles Bruce
All remained well in this neatly organized world of accepted theory until a Scottish astrophysicist by the name of Charles Bruce arrived on the scene. In 1944, Bruce, who was an electrical researcher, astronomer, and expert on the effects of lightning, made an unusual discovery.
He found that the surface of the sun had the same appearance, temperature and spectral analysis as an electric arc. He then went on to make a bold proposition. The sun looked like an electric arc, he said, and had the same characteristics as an electrical arc, because it was an electric arc.
So what Charles Bruce theorised was that the sun was not a nuclear furnace after all. It was in fact an electrical body made up of a large number of arcs in parallel with one another. He explained that our sun, as well as every other star, was actually a sophisticated, though complex, electric light bulb.
Bruce’s idea that the source of the sun’s heat and light was the result of electromagnetic rather than thermonuclear interactions, was laughed at by all the scientific authorities of his time, just as it continues to be rejected to this day.
There was, however, one small problem, and that was that the old theory was devised by scientists before the advent of the space age. And once it became possible to send scientific probes into space to study the properties of the sun, it was clear that the accepted theory of the sun was in trouble.
The problem was that this elegant mathematical theory that had been held so fervently by so many people for so many years, was just not supported by the facts. The evidence proved that every aspect of the existing theory was wrong. In fact, it was so obvious that even a child could see it.
Ralph Juergens
The deficiencies of the traditional theory were exposed some years later when an American civil engineer named Ralph Juergens wrote an article in which he demolished the long accepted theory of the sun. In an unequivocal assessment of the situation, Juergens wrote:
“I can find no way to state this diplomatically, so let me be blunt. The modern astrophysical concept that ascribes the Sun’s energy to thermonuclear reactions deep in the solar interior is contradicted by nearly every observable aspect of the Sun.”
What incensed Juergens at the time was not only that the accepted theory of the sun as a thermonuclear reactor was unable to explain the observed features of the sun, but that the scientists who held so firmly to this theory blithely ignored these features.
The fundamental problem with the existing theory was this. If the sun truly was a nuclear reactor, converting hydrogen atoms into helium through a process of thermonuclear fusion, then there should be a simple temperature gradient between the inner and outer heat of the sun.
In other words, the sun should be hottest at its centre. And the further away one went from the surface of the sun, the cooler it should become. The problem was that the actual temperature readings on which all astrophysicists agreed showed the exact opposite.
The temperature at the surface of the sun is roughly 4,400 degrees Kelvin (7,460ºF). But about four times further away, it rises steadily to about 20,000ºK (35,540ºF) . From there the temperature jumps abruptly to two million degrees Kelvin (3,554,000ºF) in the Corona.
Based on this new data provided by space probes which was the opposite of what the traditional theory predicted, Juergens not only exposed the shortcomings of existing theory, but he went on to propose an entirely new theory of the sun that was founded on electromagnetism.
According to Juergens, the source of the energy that powers the sun comes from space beyond the sun, and this energy is electrical in nature. The sun is therefore the focus of a “coronal glow discharge” that is fed by electric currents coursing throughout the galaxy.
As he wrote in 1972, some years before his death in 1979, in an article entitled Reconciling Celestial Mechanics and Velikovskian Catastrophism:
“The known characteristics of the interplanetary medium suggest not only that the sun and the planets are electrically charged, but that the sun itself is the focus of a cosmic electric discharge – the probable source of all its radiant energy“.(See Electric Sun)
As he went on to clarify, “The sun is electrically powered – the source of the sun’s energy is coming from electric currents in galactic space.” (See Electric Comet)
Today, Juergen’s ideas have been amplified and refined by a growing body of scientists who have aligned themselves with the Thunderbolts Group. They believe that we live in an “Electric Universe”, and that electromagnetism is the fundamental source of all created life.
The Electric Sun
What ordinary people have now come to realise is that our sun has changed. It has become hotter and it has become “whiter”. And as the evidence quoted earlier shows, the earth is being impacted by ever increasing amounts of harmful UV radiation emanating from the sun.
Nevertheless, the key contribution that Juergens has made to this discussion is the idea that the sun is electrically powered, that the brightness of the sun is dependent upon its “coronal glow discharge”, and that this in turn is fed by electric currents coursing throughout the galaxy.
So the reason why the sun now appears hotter and “whiter” is because the area through which the solar system is now travelling is being exposed to more intense radiation, which has changed the sun’s electromagnetic field, and therefore its “coronal glow discharge”.
And as Charles Bruce noted earlier, just like an arc welder’s torch changes colour with the intensity of the current and glows “whiter” as it gets hotter, so changes to the “coronal glow discharge” of the sun are causing it to feel hotter and look “whiter” when we experience it on the earth.
So what common people everywhere are reporting is evidence that these changes to the sun are having devastating effects upon the earth, as evidence mounts of more and more species being harmed by the increasing levels of lethal UVB and UVC radiation.
The “inconvenient” truth about climate change is that the earth is dying. It is losing its ability to support life. Insects are dying. Trees and plants are dying. Birds and animals are dying. How long before our agriculture and crop yields are seriously affected? How much time do we ourselves have left?
This truth is inescapable. It is no longer something that we can merely shrug off as inconsequential. Not only is it a truth that none of us can avoid, but it is one that every one of us must come to terms with as we make the day-to-day decisions about the future conduct of our lives.
Unfortunately, the reality is that very few people today are equipped to handle the devastating truth that the world as we know it is coming to an end. They simply cannot bring themselves to believe that the entire human species could be threatened with extinction.
Yet the evidence is there for all to see. And it is growing more and more evident with every passing year. We are reminded of the movie A Few Good Men, in which the actor Jack Nicholson uttered that memorable line, “You can’t handle the truth!”.
The ultimate question is: Can you?
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, July 16, 2017, 1:25 pm
In the letter sent to Marjorie Tietjen quoted in Part Four, the anonymous author made the following statement in response to her query about the nature and purpose of the chemtrail jet aerosol programme that is being conducted in the skies above the United States.
“As long ago as the early 1940s, some physicists and astronomers began to notice a pattern of change coming over the sun. It did not become more pronounced until the new millennium arrived.
“During the past four years, from 2000 through 2004, the sun’s activity has become more unpredictable and more obvious. Scientists, some working for the military or the federal government, began to think the unthinkable: the sun and all the planets were beginning a massive transformation.
“This transformation is unstoppable, potentially catastrophic to life and will most certainly cause the Earth’s environment to experience abrupt changes on a massive scale”.
The author went on to say that if the secret global aerosol chemical barrier now being conducted by the military was not successful in mitigating the harmful effects of the increased ultra-violet radiation emanating from the sun, then life on the surface of the earth might soon become impossible.
And because nobody knows how long the current changes in the sun will last, there may come a time when life above the ground will be threatened with extinction, and humanity will have no choice but to seek accommodation underground in order to survive.
The spectre which this would raise for the continuation of life on this planet would be stark indeed. As the author indicated:
“Therefore, millions of people may have to spend the rest of their lives in underground cities — and perhaps their children and grandchildren. Of course, that still leaves billions on the surface of a dying planet. How long those billions will be able to survive, no one knows”.
The Response
So the test as to whether the earth truly is facing an imminent existential threat would be whether those same authorities that are responsible for creating chemtrail barriers in the sky, are also hard at work creating places of safety underground, as the anonymous source described.
“Many who read this are very much aware of the massive underground complexes that have been built in the United States and other countries since World War II.
“Much of the technology was acquired from Nazi engineering projects and during the last 60 years vastly improved upon using more advanced technology and materials.
“The original purpose of most of the underground complexes (many in hollowed out mountains or under the wasteland of parched desert terrain) was for key elements of society and government to survive a nuclear cataclysm. To an extent that is still one of the purposes.
“But all have been modified and more are being constructed around the world at breakneck speed in the event that the system phenomenon is not constrained by the aerosol chemical barrier.”
So if this author is correct, then the same Military-Industrial Complex that is responsible for the global aerosol dispersal programme designed to shield the population on earth from harmful radiation coming from the sun, should also be busy building places of refuge underground.
The question then becomes whether there is any evidence to support this claim.
But before looking for any evidence, we need to be aware that any operation by the secret government to construct underground complexes would inevitably be assigned the highest level of secrecy, and therefore demand the strictest efforts to maintain this secrecy.
So the likelihood of finding whistle-blowers willing to come forward and speak publicly about these underground bases is remote. Nevertheless, there have been a few brave souls who have chosen to research this subject, even though they risk their lives in doing so.
Richard Sauder
Dr. Richard Sauder
The most prominent researcher into the subject of underground, and even undersea bases, has been Dr. Richard Sauder. Hailing from the American state of Virginia, Richard has devoted his life to exploring unusual phenomena, especially those hidden behind an official veil of secrecy.
He was the first person to investigate underground and under-water military bases, by systematically delving into hard-to-find records of government, military and industry on the subject. He subsequently wrote three books outlining what he found.
In this book he outlined how corporate America had been working hand-in-glove with the Pentagon for decades, first planning and then constructing secret underground facilities. He revealed where these bases were located, the tunneling techniques involved, and why they were built.
His second book, published in 2001, was called Underwater and Underground Bases. In this work he revealed documentary evidence of huge, manned bases that had been built offshore, in mid-ocean, and deep beneath the seafloor. Some of which were big enough to house submarines.
This was followed in 2010 by “Hidden in Plain Sight: Beyond the X-Files”. Using a combination of archival research, on-scene-investigation and first-hand interviews, Sauder challenger the reader by asking, and then answering, such questions as:
• Where are the secret underground bases?
• How far down do they go?
• Are there bases underneath the ocean?
• Are there high-speed underground shuttle systems?
• What is going on beneath Washington, D.C.?
Washington D.C.
On the subject of the mysteries that lay beneath the surface of Washington, D.C., Dr Sauder had this to say:
“Most tourists who visit Washington, DC never suspect that a veritable labyrinth lies beneath their feet. They visit the White House without thinking of the secret, deep underground tunnels that radiate out from it to other locations in the city.
“They never suspect the elaborate, subterranean installation buried deep beneath the White House that extends down underground, level after level after level.
“They never have heard of the Top Secret plans in the 1960s to make a secret underground base 3,500 feet below ground, with high speed elevators connecting to the White House, the State Department and the Pentagon, and a high speed, deep underground shuttle connector between the base and the elevators. And that is just a fraction of the subterranean secrets that Washington, DC conceals”.(View Source)
Underground Bases
In his Blog, Dr. Sauder summarises the history of the clandestine underground and undersea construction project in the following words:
“One of the global Shadow Government’s biggest projects over the last several decades has been the construction of numerous Top Secret underground and undersea bases, as well as secret tunnels, all over the world.
“The majority of the world’s population knows very little about this ambitious program, and remains ignorant of what is happening undersea and underground. This has been going on at least since the end of World War II. A lot of it may have started with the Nazi engineers in the Third Reich, but it absolutely did not end with them.
“I provide a great deal of information about these bases in my three books. Because I passed 90% of my life in the USA, my work has a particular focus on that country.
“I reveal many of the major players in this decades-long project, many of the facilities themselves, and some of what is known about the activities that take place in them. It has to be said that a great deal still remains unknown about what is taking place underground and undersea.
“Many governments have contracted with major civil and marine engineering firms to construct massive installations underground and undersea. These bases are found in many countries, including the USA, Russia, China, Switzerland, Norway, Israel, Saudi Arabia, Australia, Canada, Great Britain and more”.
A far as the location of these underground facilities within the United States and around the world, Dr. Sauder has this to say:
“There are many secret underground bases all over the world. The Americans have numerous highly secret underground bases, including at their mysterious UFO research base in Nevada called Area 51.
“Many other nations also have secret underground bases. The Swiss Alps, for example, are said to be tunneled like Swiss cheese! The massive underground base beneath Yamantau Mountain in the southern Ural region of Russia is almost as legendary as Area 51 in the USA.
“The huge, Pine Gap underground facility in the middle of the Australian Outback is equally mysterious. Our planet is home to myriad facilities such as these.
“Many thousands, maybe even millions of people in total, are involved in building, maintaining and operating these highly secretive underground and undersea facilities – and yet the general public is kept completely in the dark as to what happens in them, or even where most of them are located”.
Undersea Bases
With regard to bases constructed underneath the sea, Dr. Sauder commented as follows:
“The technology to construct manned bases down in the bedrock deep beneath the seafloor in mid-ocean has existed for almost half a century now. In 1966 the USSA Navy’s so-called Rock-Site concept revealed that the technical expertise in the petroleum, mining and marine engineering industries made possible the construction of large, permanently manned facilities deep beneath the seafloor, hundreds of miles offshore in mid-ocean.
“In 1968 researchers affiliated with the Stanford Research Institute in California recommended constructing thirty undersea bases, at a projected cost of less than $3 billion dollars. Their report suggested that the deep undersea bases could be multipurpose facilities, for joint industrial, scientific and military use.
“A growing body of evidence indicates that such bases have been built by the Americans, and perhaps by others as well. Bodies of water such as the Gulf of Mexico, the Caribbean Sea, the North Sea, the Bay of Biscay, the Persian Gulf, the Mediterranean Sea, the South China Sea and East China Sea, the coastal waters of the continental shelves worldwide, as well as all other major seas and oceans are all candidate sites for deep, permanently manned bases.
“In fact the technology exists to conduct major industrial and military operations at extreme depths of 20,000 feet in mid-ocean. The major military agencies of the world and civil, petroleum, mining and marine engineering corporations have had the capability to construct these bases for decades.
“Reported or planned uses for these undersea facilities are as clandestine submarine bases, sonar bases, industrial mineral extraction operations (mining), alien bases, nuclear missile bases and scientific research installations. Note that all of these bases are presently clandestine and that there are likely to be other uses, perhaps even more exotic than those listed.
“Marine and civil engineering technology also permit the construction of massive bases in the world’s coastal regions that incorporate elements of both undersea and underground bases. The massive base that the Chinese military has reportedly constructed on Hainan Island is a good example.
“This huge, underground base can accommodate as many as 20 large, nuclear missile firing submarines underground beneath the island. The submarines reportedly do not surface to enter their base. They come and go from the base through multiple underwater tunnels that open directly to the deep sea and lead straight from the secret, underground submarine base.
“In the late Soviet period the Russians were also making a similar facility for their enormous Typhoon class, nuclear missile firing submarines. The Russian base is reported to be on the Kola Peninsula about 150 miles from Murmansk.
“I have been told that the USSA Navy also has built similar underground and undersea submarine bases. The Israeli Navy is reported to have such a base on the Mediterranean coast. Military marine engineering has science-fiction-like capabilities to make huge, deep, undersea and underground tunnels for submarines. Technology in the Black Budget world has far outstripped the reality that we know in our everyday lives”.
Underground Tunnels
When construction first began on these underground bases, it was recognized that none of them would be able to function effectively unless there was a network of underground tunnels to provide fast and efficient transportation between these different bases.
The United States Air Force sponsored research into deep underground construction as early as 1958. This research was carried out by the Rand Corporation. They held symposiums on construction methods and equipment, utility installation, and the use of nuclear explosions to create underground cavities.
In September 1983, Omni magazine published a story on an underground device known as a “Subterrene”. This was a nuclear tunnel-boring machine that had been developed at Los Alamos Laboratories in New Mexico.
This machine was able to penetrate rock deep below the earth and heat it to a state of molten magma, which then cooled after the machine moved on. The result was a tube with a smooth, glazed lining that enabled high-speed shuttles to link these subterranean bases with one another.
Dr. Sauder had this to say about the network of tunnels that linked these underground bases together, as well as the magnetic-levitation system that could propel transportation shuttles beneath the North American continent at speeds in excess of 1,500 mph (2,400 kms per hour).
“Others have alleged the existence of supersonic, underground magnetic levitation (maglev) trains that hurtle through a sprawling, continent-wide, deeply buried tunnel system.
“Can there be such a clandestine, subterranean train system built by the Shadow Government in great secrecy? My research answers a resounding, yes, it is very possible.
“In fact, the open record shows that just such a system was under active research and development all the way back in the 1930s, in the Third Reich of Nazi Germany.
“While it is not known if the Nazis ever built such a secret, maglev, tube shuttle, train network, the stories persist that such a system exists today, that it is very fast, very deep and very secret, for use only by the Shadow Government’s clandestine, compartmentalized projects.
“In my books, I provide documentation from the open technical literature that demonstrates a decades-long, multi-agency research effort into high speed maglev trains”.
Although Dr. Richard Sauder has been the foremost researcher into underground and undersea bases, as well as the supersonic shuttle system of transportation linking them all together, this knowledge has come at a heavy price. For as Kevin Shipp, the former CIA Anti-terrorism Specialist mentioned in Part Three warned, those who choose to reveal highly classified state secrets do so at their peril, for their very lives are at stake. (View source)
Ecuador
On June 12, 2014, Sauder sent a chilling letter to a friend indicating that he was applying for political asylum in Quito, the capital city of Ecuador. In this letter he explained his reasons for doing so.
“I am seeking political refuge in Ecuador, with support from 1) Francis Boyle (international lawyer at U. of Illinois Law School), 2, the World Service Authority in Washington, DC (founded by the late Gary Davis) and 3) the Inter-American Platform for Human Rights, Development and Democracy, here in Quito.
“The principal bases of my petition are 1) my multiple arrests and stints in jail/prison for nonviolent, anti-nuclear peace protests, most recently in 2010 in North Dakota, for which I spent 100 days in jail; 2) my years of blogging on a variety of social and political issues; 3) my two decades of research and writing about the many underground and underwater bases of the military-industrial-espionage complex; and 4) the provisions of the NDAA and the pervasive, global spying.
“I am probably on multiple watch lists because of my anti-nuclear activism, my blogging and my underground and underwater bases and tunnels research and writing. With the NDAA anyone can be abruptly killed or simply plucked off the street. You just vanish. I have noticed human surveillance of myself in Quito in recent months. I don’t know who is doing it.
“I was almost killed a year and a half ago, and spent more than four months in the public hospitals here in Ecuador. It was a close call. Some of my friends think a USA three-letter agency could have been involved. Maybe. I personally have no idea. I am still alive. (View Source)
Richard Sauder’s choice of Ecuador as a place of refuge finds an interesting parallel with another person who has devoted his life to investigating government secrets hidden from the general public. His name is Bill Ryan, co-founder with Kerry Cassidy of Project Camelot.
Together, Ryan and Cassidy recorded a large collection of video interviews with whistleblowers and other informants who were prepared to talk about a variety of secret government programmes, including DUMBs (Deep Underground Military Bases).
Both Cassidy and Ryan have since moved on from Project Camelot. But although Bill Ryan has never stated publicly that he felt that his life was in danger, it is interesting to note that he no longer lives in the United States and now makes his home in a remote corner of Ecuador.
Furthermore, it is hardly a coincidence that Julian Assange, the founder of Wikileaks, sought refuge from prosecution by living in the Ecuadorian Embassy in London, and that Edward Snowden had originally intended to travel to Ecuador to escape the U.S. authorities.
Philip Schneider
Philip Schneider
By far the most significant whistleblower to come forward and reveal inside information about the secret American deep underground network, was Philip Schneider. Schneider was a self-taught geological and structural engineer with both military and aerospace experience.
Schneider was a true patriot. However, his patriotism did not permit him to honour the non-disclosure agreement that all classified government employees have to sign. He said that his ultimate allegiance was to the Constitution of the United States, rather than to any official organization.
It was this zeal that prompted him to begin a series of lecture tours talking about government cover-ups, black budgets, black programme contractors, deep underground bases and many other projects in which he had personally been involved.
In May, 1995, he began a public lecture (show link) at Post Falls, Idaho, with the following words:
“I love the country I am living in more than I love my life, but I would not be standing before you now, risking my life, if I did not believe it was so.
“The first part of this talk is going to concern deep underground military bases and the Black Budget. The Black Budget is a secretive budget that garners 25% of the gross national product of the United States. At least this amount is used in black programs, like those concerned with underground bases.
“Presently (May, 1995), there are 129 deep underground military bases in the United States. They have been building these bases day and night unceasingly since the early 1940s. Some of them were built even earlier than that.
“These bases are basically large cities underground connected by high-speed magneto-levitation trains that have speeds up to Mach 2 (1,500 mph). Several books have been written about this activity.
“Richard Souder, a Ph. D. architect (not to be confused with Richard Sauder mentioned above), has risked his life by talking about this. He worked with a number of government agencies on deep underground military bases. In around where you live in Idaho, there are 11 of them.
“The average depth of these bases is over a mile, and they are again basically whole cities underground. They are all between 2.66 and 4.25 cubic miles in size. They have laser drilling machines that can drill a tunnel seven miles long in one day.
“The Black Projects sidestep the authority of Congress, which as we know is illegal. Right now, the New World Order is depending on these bases. If I had known at the time I was working on them that the NWO was involved, I would not have done it. I was lied to rather extensively.”
Less than eight months after saying these words, Philip Schneider was dead. On January 10, 1996, one of his friends had gone to his apartment in Wilsonville, Oregon, but got no response when he knocked on the door, even though his car was in the parking lot.
Finally, seven days later, he returned with the manager of the apartment complex and a detective from the Clackamas County Sheriff’s office. Inside they found the body of Philip Schneider. They estimated that he had been dead for five to seven days.
The County Coroner’s office initially attributed his death to a stroke. However, in the following days disturbing details about his death began to surface when it became clear that he had not in fact died from a stroke, but that he had been murdered.
A summary of these disturbing details was later revealed by his ex-wife Cynthia Drayer, in a memorandum issued on March 11, 2009, together with pertinent information about Philip’s early life, and the circumstances which had led to their separation.
Denver International Airport
Probably the best example of a secret underground military base that is hidden in plain sight can be found just outside the city of Denver. It is the site of the new international airport. Now Denver didn’t need a new airport. It already had one that had served it perfectly well from 1929 to 1995.
But in 1995 the old Stapleton airport was replaced by a new airport located some 25 miles from downtown. It was called the Denver International Airport (DIA). This new airport was not merely an enlargement of the old airport. It totally dwarfed it in size.
It is in fact twice as large as the next biggest airport in the United States, and second only to the King Fahd Airport in Saudi Arabia. It has the longest public use runway in the U.S.A., with a length of 16,000 feet (4,877 m), and a total land area of 33,531 acres, or 52.4 square miles.
The unusually large size of the new Denver International Airport may have been the first thing to arouse suspicion, but it was the enormous cost over-runs associated with this project that caused many to question its true nature and purpose.
By the time the new airport began operations, the cost of the project had exceeded its initial budget by a staggering $2 billion. Local taxpayers wondered what these inflated costs were spent on, especially as so many features of the new airport have never satisfactorily been explained.
When the airport was officially dedicated on March 19, 1994, a capstone was placed inside the terminal building displaying a Masonic symbol above an inscription referring to the “New World Airport Commission”. But no one has yet been able to identify this organization, or say what it is or does.
One of the most striking features at the entrance of this airport is the 32 feet (9.8 metre) high illuminated statue of a mustang rearing up on its hind legs that greets every visitor arriving at the terminal. It is coloured blue and has bulging veins and glowing red eyes.
Blue Mustang
If the sight of this weird creature was not enough to cause concern, then the story of its creation certainly did. For while working on this statue the sculptor, El Paso born artist Luis Jiménez, was killed when part of it fell on him and severed an artery in his leg.
Disturbing sights can be found inside the terminal building with murals showing militaristic scenes of conquest, involving swords, bayonets and machine guns. There is also a wall feature of a demonic creature climbing out of a suitcase, hardly a reassuring sight for prospective travellers.
The Suitcase Gargoyle
But the controversies associated with this airport do not end with the features inside the terminal building. There is also the mystery of the underground bunkers. When construction began, five large buildings were built on the site.
No sooner had these buildings been completed, when it was announced that they had been positioned incorrectly. And rather than demolish them, as would normally be the case, the authorities decided that they should be buried underground and used as “storage” facilities.
Since that time, a large part of previously unoccupied airport land has been used as a landfill for huge amounts of soil. Where this soil came from has never satisfactorily been explained, but it is certainly indicative of large-scale underground excavation in the area.
There are also many acres of fenced-off areas which have barbed wire pointing inwards, as if to keep things in, as well as small concrete stacks that resemble mini-cooling towers. These rise out of apparent empty ground, and could be used to vent facilities underground.
Another curiosity is that when the airport was first built, it was designed to have a sophisticated underground baggage delivery system. Yet despite the hundreds of millions of dollars spent on this system, it was announced that this had proved to be unworkable, and that it was supposedly “scrapped”.
It is also worth noting that Denver International Airport has four solar farms consisting of 42,358 solar panels spread across 55 acres, that can generate over ten megawatts of power. Some of this is used directly by the airport, while the rest is sold back to the grid.
Because the CIA has relocated the headquarters of its domestic division, responsible for operations within the United States to Denver, many have concluded that the airport could well be the hub of a vast secret network of deep underground bases linked together by tunnels.
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, July 2, 2017, 12:58 pm
In the previous instalment, I described the occasion when New York area journalist Marjorie Tietjen, who had been researching the subject of chemtrails, received a letter from an anonymous source that began with the words: “I know what chemtrails are and their purpose”.
The writer said that although greenhouse gases generated by burning fossil fuels did indeed contribute to global warming, this was miniscule compared to the real threat confronting humanity, which was the higher amount of cosmic radiation coming from outer space. He (or she) went on to say:
“We don’t know exactly the cause of the phenomenon we are fighting. We don’t know how long it will last or the peak of its intensity. We only know that the Earth, as well as all the other planets and our sun, has become enveloped in an unknown energy field that threatens all stability across the solar system and our very lives”.
In the course of this letter, the writer emphasized the following points:
• Signs that something was seriously wrong only began to be realized in the late 1960s
• These signs included insect and animal migrations, as well as biological mutations
• Climate change is not just affecting the earth. It is affecting the entire solar system
• All the planets are experiencing change, from Mercury all the way out to Pluto
• The chemical composition of the atmosphere of Venus has changed, and that change is accelerating
• Radiation emitted from the gas giants (Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune) has intensified
• Chemtrails first appeared in the sky around 1997, although tests had been carried out earlier
• This massive atmospheric aerosol spraying programme began in the United States, but now is world-wide
• Crews that do this spraying fly out of air force bases around the globe using re-fitted Lockheed and Boeing jets
• Chemtrails consist primarily of ionized barium and aluminum oxide particles, as well as carbon black
• Their purpose is to create a thermal, anti-radiation barrier beneath the earth’s troposphere
• This barrier is designed to reflect the damaging incoming radiation back out into space
• Although the aerosol being sprayed will make many people sick, the trade off is the long term survival of humanity
• The pilots who fly these aerosol spraying missions should really be considered heroes, for our continued livelihood is at risk
The scenario described by the writer in this letter sounds like it could have been lifted straight out of a science fiction novel. So the question we have to ask ourselves is: how much of this, if anything, is true? Of course, if you were to ask any conventional climatologist, the answer would be “NIL”.
But for those who care to look behind the curtain of conventional climate thinking, the answer would be very different, In fact there is increasing evidence to suggest that ALL of the points mentioned in the above letter may turn out to be true.
Most people who live on earth know that the earth spins on its axis, and that it takes 24 hours to do so. That means that it is spinning at a rate of about 1,000 miles an hour (1,600 kms per hour). But the earth also moves around the sun, and it takes a year to complete a single circuit.
But although all the planets rotate around the sun, the sun itself is not stationary. It doesn’t simply stay in one place all the time. The sun is also moving. In fact the entire solar system orbits around the centre of the Milky Way galaxy, which of course is also in motion.
Scientists have calculated that the solar system is travelling at a rate of about 828,000 kms per hour (roughly 515,000 miles per hour). Even at that speed it takes about 230 million years for the solar system to complete a circuit around the centre of the Milky Way galaxy.
So what that means is that humanity has only lived on this planet for a tiny fraction of one orbit around the centre of the galaxy, and that every day brings the solar system in contact with a new area of space. And what whistleblowers are telling us is that it is this new area of space that is harming us.
We already know that drastic changes are happening on the earth. So if what these whistleblowers are telling us is true, we should find changes happening on other planets in the solar system, as well as to the sun itself. And there are certainly indications that this is so.
Media Coverage
Back in 2007 the National Geographic News carried an article titled Mars Melt Hinted at Solar, Not Human, Cause for Warming, Scientist Says. The report indicated that data from NASA’s Mars Global Surveyor and Odyssey missions revealed that “ice caps” on Mars had been shrinking.
The scientist concerned was Habibullo Abdussamatov, head of space research at St. Petersburg’s Astronomical Observatory in Russia. He claimed that this data from Mars was evidence that global warming on Earth was being caused by changes in the sun.
Abdussamatov claimed that it was the long-term increase in solar irradiance that was the cause of heating on both the Earth and Mars. Not surprisingly, his claim went over with conventional climatologists like a lead balloon.
Colin Wilson, a planetary physicist at Oxford University said “His views are completely at odds with the mainstream scientific opinion”, while Arthur Evan, a climate scientist at the University of Wisconsin, Madison, added: “The idea just isn’t supported by the theory or observations”.
More recently (December 2015), Space.newscarried an article under the headline Entire solar system is heating up! Scientists blame solar warming. The article carried information that is sufficiently illuminating that it is worth reproducing here.
“Nothing is stable, including the solar system. New evidence suggests the solar system is moving into a new energy zone which is altering the magnetic fields of the planets.
“There is reason to believe Earth is not the only planet in the solar system undergoing climate change, meaning CO2 emissions are not the primary force responsible for the rise in global temperatures.
“Growth of the dark spots in Pluto, reports of auroras on Saturn, polar shifts in Uranus and changes in light intensity of Neptune suggests something very strange is happening in the solar system.
“Many scientists suspect that the solar system has migrated to a region of the galaxy with high energy. We have the illusion that the sun is a nebulous ball of gas fixated in the sky that the rest of the solar system dances around.
“In reality, the sun is one star among many sitting on the outskirts of the Milky Way, hurtling through space. Although the total amount of energy within the universe is conserved, pockets of energy in the Milky Way vary in intensity. The solar system may have rolled into one of these highly active regions.
Sun’s magnetic field increases in strength
“The warming of the entire solar system has been supported by some scientists. One dramatic shift that is taking place is the strength of the sun’s electromagnetic field.
“According to a study by Dr. Michael Lockwood at Rutherford Appleton Laboratory in England, the sun’s magnetic field has increased by 230 percent within the last 100 years. The energetic changes in the sun radiate outward though solar wind, thereby increasing the charge of interstellar space.
Another piece of evidence in favor of solar change is the sudden rise in galactic star dust. Ulysses, a space probe, has been monitoring the amount of star dust flowing through the solar system since 1992. The sun’s magnetic field impacts how much star dust drifts through the solar system. The magnetic field attracts more star dust as it strengthens.
The warming of Pluto
“Another affirmation of solar change comes from Pluto. Pluto resides on the icy outskirts of the solar system near a giant shell of astronomical bodies know as the Oort Cloud. Although Pluto resides in the coolest regions of the solar system, the dwarf planet is heating up.
“Specifically, Pluto’s atmospheric pressure has increased by 300 percent, which is more than any other planet in the solar system. Even more paradoxical, Pluto’s atmosphere is becoming denser as it travels farther away from the sun.
“Due to this, scientists suspect Pluto is at the forefront of a high energy region of the galaxy that the solar system is beginning to reside in.
“There is no doubt that human activity is impacting climate change. Nevertheless, there are other forces outside the solar system that are affecting climate inside the solar system. Whatever the case may be, Earth can expect a rough ride as it travels through foreign warm waters.
Once again, conventional climatologists have rejected these findings with the scorn they feel these conspiratorial theories deserve. There is, however, one fact which none of these climatologists can deny. And that is the presence of silky strands of chemtrails in the sky.
And this is where the claims of the anonymous source quoted earlier gain credence. For he, or she, is not alone in their testimony. Another whistleblower to come forward was a scientist (referred to as “Deep Shield”) living in the Berkeley/Emeryville/Oakland area of California.
Much of what he revealed matches what was included in the mysterious letter sent to Marjorie Tietjen that was quoted in a previous instalment. Again I have chosen to let him speak about issues that are relevant to this subject in his own words.
The Testimony of Deep Shield
“Most of the elements used in the spray are heavier than air, even in their powdered form they are heavier and will sink quickly. Mixing them with the polymers suspends the particles in the atmosphere high above the surface for longer periods of time, therefore in theory we do not need to spray as often or as much material.
“Since the suspended particles eventually do settle into the lowest part of the atmosphere and are inhaled by all life forms on the surface there is an attempt to counter the growth of mold by adding to the mixture mold growth suppressants – some of which may be of biological material.
“Though it would appear that the dispersal rate of the spray is fast, it is actually takes much longer to be an effective shield. There is a desired concentration being sought. One that is thick enough to stem the UV and the Infrared, while being thin enough to allow visible light through.
“A perpetual cloud cover would have disastrous effects on plant life; the food chain thus disrupted would soon collapse. The desired effect wanted is a thin cover that would theoretically create a daytime haze that allows plenty of sunlight while providing protection from UV radiation and also reflect enough infrared to maintain nominal temperatures.
“To insure that the chemicals are not tampered with, they are mixed and sprayed over random nations. This means that chemicals produced in the USA has a good chance of being sprayed over Russia, England and the USA.
“This random spray of material means that no nation would be certain that their chemicals will be sprayed over a nation which they have issues with. Russian planes may be seen in USA skies, but so too will USA planes be seen in Russian skies.
“The canisters used are sealed in a third nation that has no idea where its canister is going. Participating nations have their observers at every station where canister loading is done. All of this to insure that the shield is not used as a weapon.
“To further insure that the shield is not used as a weapon, non participant nations are sprayed by participants who must spray in order to get enough material to maintain their nations shield. It is understood that not spraying is as much a military offense as shooting at them.
“Due to the severity of the situation it is mandatory to maintain public calm for as long as possible. The Earth is dying. Humanity is on the road to extinction – without the Shield mankind will die off with in 20 to 50 years.
“Most people alive today could live to see this extinction take place. This means that an announcement of the situation we face boils down to telling every man, woman and child on earth that they have no future, they are going to be killed.
“People would panic. There would be economic collapse, the production and movement of goods would collapse. Millions would die in all cities on earth, riots and violence would reduce civilian centers to rubble within days.
“Half of the population in dense metropolitan areas would try to leave the cities seeking ‘safety’ in the rural areas thinking that they would be safe.
“Those left behind in the cities would be at war with their neighbors, fighting for the remaining supplies. We would be telling the world that the world is coming to an end, and even with the Shield the chances of survival are small.
“Look at the kinds of material being used, aluminum, barium, titanium, etc. Most are highly reflective; in some instances the material is an absorber of gasses.
“In the case of reflection the desire is to reflect X amount of heat and X amount of UV while still maintaining acceptable (nominal) levels of UV and heat reaching the planet’s surface.
“Life requires a certain amount of both UV and Heat – too much will kill – so will too little. The apparent amount looks like a lot more than what is actually being sprayed per volume of air it is covering.
“Most of the whitening of the sky is not the material per se, but the collection of water vapor, which forms into suspended ice crystals. The introduction of the material causes the water vapor to collect like rain collects on individual particles of dust.
This testimony of “Deep Shield” validates the information given to Marjorie Tietjen, and makes it clear that the underlying purpose of the global aerosol dispersal programme is to protect the earth from cosmic radiation that is impacting the earth from outside of the solar system.
Ultra-violet radiation
And the greatest threat to the survival of humanity at this time is the amount of dangerous ultra-violet radiation that is being emitted by the sun. While much of this radiation is necessary for life on earth to exist, some of it is not. In fact some of it is positively lethal.
Ultra-violet (UV) is electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength shorter than visible light, but longer than X-rays. This means that UV rays are normally invisible to humans. UV radiation is further broken down into three categories: UV-A, UV-B and UV-C.
The sun emits ultra-violet radiation at all wavelengths. Under normal circumstances, half of the solar radiation at the top of the earth’s atmosphere consists of infrared light, which we feel in the form of heat. Of the remainder, 40% is visible light and 10% ultra-violet light.
While much of this ultra-violet light is blocked by the atmosphere before it reaches the earth’s surface, some of it is not. And it is this that can cause problems for human, animal and plant life. UV-B radiation can cause damage to the DNA, while UV-C is the most dangerous form of UV.
And although the authorities vigorously deny this, and will go to extraordinary lengths to hide this knowledge from the general public, it is evident that the amount of harmful ultra-violet radiation now reaching the earth is actually killing off plants, fishes, birds and other species.
One of the foremost investigators of the escalation of ultra-violet radiation around the planet is Dane Wigington. Dane has a background in solar energy, having been an employee of the Bechtel Power Corporation, and now lives in Bella Vista, California.
Dane now spreads news of what is going on in this field through his website geoengineeringwatch.org, and issues regular videos through his YouTube channel.
It is worth noting here that Dane Wigington believes that human beings are to blame for the high levels of UV radiation. He is clearly unaware that this is a problem affecting the entire solar system, and that chemtrails are therefore a response to, rather than the cause of, the UV problem.
Farmers, gardeners and others who spend much of their time outdoors are also reporting alarming developments in the natural world, and the damage that extreme UV radiation has been causing trees, plants, insects and birds, as can be seen from the following videos.
As these videos show, evidence of damage caused by dangerous UV-B and UV-C ultra-violet radiation can be seen almost anywhere one cares to look. Other examples of this are the red stop signs that have been bleached white in states like Michigan, Wisconsin, Indiana, Texas and Alabama.
Furthermore, people report that the sun’s rays feel so much hotter than before, and that it takes far less time to get sunburned. Not only that, but the sun doesn’t even look the same. Instead of the old ball of yellow light, the sun now looks white hot – much like a welder’s arc lamp.
It is obvious that the entire cycle of life on the earth is being threatened, beginning with insects and plants. But how long will it be before we ourselves are affected? This is not a threat that looms in the distant future. It is happening now – at this very moment. We are reminded again of the words of the whistleblower.
“Terrorism, Iraq, Afghanistan, the potential threats of Iran and North Korea, nuclear conflagration — all pale when compared to the dire threat our world is facing right now. That’s right. Now. This instant — not some misty time in the far off future”.
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, June 19, 2017, 1:38 pm
Marjorie Tietjen is a freelance investigative journalist who lives in the Greater New York area. One of the things she has investigated is the subject of chemtrails. Based on her research, she wrote a short article which appeared in Rense.com entitled Blatant ABC Chemtrail Subliminals.
She began the article with a question that had been bothering her over the years. The question was this.
“What is the main purpose of the extensive chemtrail jet aerosol program and is this operation a permanent necessity? I ask myself these puzzling and frustrating questions over and over again but there seems to be no certain answer”.
In the article she went on to bemoan the fact that despite the clear evidence of the presence of chemtrails in the sky, no one ever seemed to come forward with a clear and convincing answer to the questions who is doing this – and why?And how long will they keep doing it?
One can imagine her astonishment when, on the very day that her article appeared online, she received a long letter from an anonymous source answering all her questions. As she later wrote in a post to an online forum: “I’m not sure if he/she is an insider or just a researcher”.
But whatever the origin or source of the information provided in this letter, it was evident that the author wrote with authority. He or she clearly knew what they were talking about, and the answers that were given were truly stunning. The opening line could not have been more stark.
” I know what chemtrails are and their purpose”.
The writer then proceeded to go into minute detail about the nature of the chemtrail project, what chemicals were being used, how they were used, who was using them, and then most importantly, why they were being used. The letter ended with the following chilling words:
” When you see the chemplanes and the chemtrails in their wakes, look at them not with fear and trepidation, nor with anger and enmity, but embrace them and their brave crews. They are truly fighting the odds to save us and our planet.
“Look up at the skies and say a prayer for the heroes who are among us. If they fail, we all fail and our race itself may fail. But damn it, at least we went down swinging!”
While most people would probably dismiss these words as conspiratorial propaganda, the writer then goes on to justify them by giving a detailed analysis of the development of the chemtrail programme. Because of the seriousness of the threat, I am letting his own words speak for themselves.
“Uncovering the terrible secret of chemtrails has led to many sleepless nights. What the human race faces, quite literally, is a battle for our future existence — at the very least a battle to try to retain the civilization we now enjoy.
“Terrorism, Iraq, Afghanistan, the potential threats of Iran and North Korea, nuclear conflagration — all pale when compared to the dire threat our world is facing right now. That’s right. Now. This instant — not some misty time in the far off future.
“As best as can be documented, chemtrails first appeared in our skies during 1997. But the growing awareness among certain scientific and military circles that something along the lines as chemtrails were needed to protect the human race began as long ago as the early 1980s.
“Many hypotheses exist as to why the world’s military forces (initially, primarily the United States Air Force) embarked upon this massive, well-coordinated, atmospheric aerosol spraying. Most of the hypotheses border on fringe science, complete speculation or fantastic conspiracy theories.
“These wide-ranging hypotheses span the spectrum from aerial applications in conjunction with HAARP technology being experimented with from installations in Alaska, Colorado, Utah, the United Kingdom, Costa Rica, Australia, the Antarctic and Japan (most are only familiar with the Alaskan operations as that has been heavily reported and discussed) — to wild assertions that it is some kind of “dumbing down” or “pruning” operation designed to take control of the greater populace, or de-populate the Earth to numbers that can be contained by some shadowy elite. Falling between these two extremes are those that believe that the now worldwide mission is somehow attempting to limit or forestall so-called global warming.
“Those that are aware of the aerosol spraying (which is a surprisingly small number) and believe it has to do with the climate are actually the closest to the truth. But the truth is so shocking, so unnerving, and so likely to cause huge social and economic upheaval, that it is understandable why the “powers that be” have elected to attempt this planetary rescue mission while keeping most of the world in the dark.
“Indeed, even most of the crews that fly the missions out of air force bases around the globe in specially re-fitted Lockheed and Boeing jets do not understand the true nature of their mission. The full scope of the mission is only revealed on a need-to-know basis. And what initially began as an American project has now been joined by almost every air force of every nation on Earth.
“The residue of chemtrails have been analyzed by some independent laboratories and the results have been variable, and to an extent, conflicting. Barium, aluminum oxide particles and carbon black are the primary mixture and work together to create the atmospheric barrier.
“Stories of samples from chemtrail residue analyzed by a facility in British Columbia, which is presumably licensed by the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, were said to have found (in addition to the jet fuel) numerous pathogens including: Pseudomonas Aeruginosa, which causes respiratory infection and attacks the immunization system; Serratia Marcescens, an antibiotic-resistant bacteria causing pneumonia, endocarditis and meningitis; as well as Streptomyces and various molds capable of inducing heart disease, upper respiratory and gastrointestinal ailments.
“The problem with any analysis that presumably detects pathogens in the aerosol mixture, however, is that the samples could easily have become contaminated as they were not retrieved while airborne, but harvested from the ground or near the ground.
“Some think that the chemtrail mission is directly related to the late Dr. Edward Teller’s infamous white paper advocating aerosol spraying as a means towards global climate control. Dr. Teller, known throughout the world as the “father of the hydrogen bomb,” did write such a paper and it is still downloadable from the Internet as a PDF document.
“The truth is, Dr. Teller’s paper was more of a coincidence than a primary motivator for the aerosol spraying program which had already been approved in principle by both President George H.W. Bush in 1989 and President William Clinton in 1991. In 2001, George W. Bush inherited the program and, working with virtually every government in the world, moved to institute the program on a planetary basis.
“The Earth is in danger. Real danger. No, we are not about to be invaded by bug-eyed space aliens or gigantic mutant insects erupting from their atomically contaminated lairs. The danger, however, does sound like a science fiction scenario. Unfortunately it is real. Actually, to be exact, the Earth itself is not in imminent danger — merely every form of life that currently inhabits this planet.
“When did this danger emerge? No one may ever know for certain, but the signs that something was beginning to go terribly wrong were observed by a few as far back as the 1940s. The true scope of the danger began to be realized in the late 1960s.
“Less than 15 years later the data being analyzed confirmed that the worst fears were true. At that point the only questions in many researcher’s minds was, “How much time do we have?” and “Do we have a sufficient level of technology to save ourselves?”
“In a way, we are lucky. If this crisis had emerged even 100 years ago the human race wouldn’t have stood a chance. It wouldn’t even have known what was happening to it. Even now we can understand the ultimate consequences, the effects, yet have very little knowledge of exactly what is causing the phenomenon.
“While the world is heatedly debating issues such as war and rumors of war, pollution as a cause of global warming, the merits or lack of merits of certain religions or who will win the U.S. presidential election in November, the real action is occurring almost daily at 25,000 to 50,000 feet above our heads.
“The heroes are anonymous; there are weapons sparkling pinpoints cutting through the atmosphere at 500 mph. I call them heroes because that’s what they are — men and women who are literally fighting every day in a valiant attempt to save all of our lives.
“No one knows for sure if they will succeed. If they fail, however, the consequences are almost too terrible to contemplate. Quite simply, in the worst case scenario, a mass extinction will occur not experienced on Earth for almost 250 million years.
“I do not wish to frighten anyone, nor am I a ”doom and gloomer,” for I believe that we have a good chance of making this work. Being a realist, however, I must admit there are no iron clad guarantees. Putting it bluntly, if we fail, the human race will, for the most part, cease to exist.
“Climate is just one of the changes facing our brave, new world. Scientists have recently discovered that a new mass extinction is underway. Insect and animal migrations have begun on a titanic scale. Biological mutations are erupting spontaneously that have no counterpart historically and no easy explanation.
“Most disturbing of all, it has been confirmed that human male sperm counts are dropping precipitously around the world — a trend that began to be noticed and tracked just several decades ago. Concurrent to this is the little reported fact that this trend towards infertility is not constrained to humans alone, but cuts across all mammalian species.
“The late film director and producer, George Pal, created many classic science fiction and fantasy movies from the 1950s through the 1970s. One of his earliest films was the spectacular, “When Worlds Collide,” which some who speak of renegade planets or cometary bodies rely on heavy for their “factual” source material.
“Well, rest easy, for it is very unlikely you or I will ever see the planetary impacts or close flybys (such as the much discussed “Planet X”) anytime soon. By anytime soon I mean during the next several thousand years.
“Yet, in a sense, there are worlds colliding right now. These worlds are in our solar system and include our Earth. The collisions are not of mass, but energy. Some of the energy is coming from the sun, which has become more active than at any time since the last 1200 to 1400 years.
“But other activity seems to be extra-solar in nature. Here a secret, but fierce debate has begun as to whether it is because our entire solar system has moved into a new area of space rampant with anomalous energy, or if it is cyclical in nature and energy streams between our system and another dimension have erupted once again after millions of years.
“As I mentioned previously, the debate is interesting, but the effect is what is most important. Whatever the cause, it has been agreed upon that the effect is very quickly going to change our climate radically, displace billions, disrupt food supplies, cause massive outbreaks of disease, irradiate parts of the Earth, melt the Arctic ice, turn off crucial ocean currents such as the Gulf Stream that protect northern Europe from arctic-like conditions. . . and all that is merely the precursor of the breakdowns to come.
“Mars… the ancient god of war, of turmoil, of destruction. The angry red planet. Perhaps aptly named, Mars was the first planet that gave us clues that what was happening to Earth’s climate had little, if anything, to do with fluorocarbon in hair spray or the burning of fossil fuels.
“Large, politicized organizations like The Sierra Club and Greenpeace and politicians like Al Gore may still be beating the “evil industry is causing global warming” drum, but they are ignorant of the facts.
“The handwringers over the stalemated Kyoto Protocol don’t know or understand that their rather draconian agreement could have been passed and enforced to the letter and it would make not one iota of difference to the massive upcoming climate change ahead of us. It is analogous to attempting to stop a rampaging flood with a few, feeble sandbags.
“Mars is heating up. Mars is undergoing massive climactic change, exactly as our Earth is warming. The year 2050 is about the time that NASA predicts the polar ice caps on Mars will be completely eradicated.
“Curiously, the United States Navy has embarked on a time schedule to launch its new arctic fleet by 2050. You see, the year 2050 is when they project the north pole will be divested of much of its ice and its waterways will be open to navigation.
“Mars and Earth are both losing their ice caps.
“So, the Earth is heating up. . . and it’s not caused by pollution or volcanic action. Mars is heating up. . . and it is certainly not being caused by pollution, nor even volcanic eruptions. Are these the only two planets exhibiting such anomalous climate changes?
“No. The amazing truth is every planet in our solar system is being affected, from Mercury all the way out to distant Pluto (mean distance from sun 3.67 billion miles). Astronomers first discovered that Pluto is heating up during their 2003 routine observations. The data left them scratching their collective heads. Not only was Pluto heating up, but it was getting hotter even as its orbit was taking it farther away from the sun!
“Other observations of the planets during the past decade have revealed that Mercury, the closest planet to the sun (its mean distance from the Sun is cited as 36,000,000 miles) has developed an ice cap. Think about that: it has formed an icecap. What does that mean in respect to the extra-solar energy flowing into our system? It is heating up a world like Pluto while cooling down parts of a planet like Mercury, where the average temperature has always been measured as hot enough to melt lead.
“But there is much more.
“The thick atmosphere of Venus is rapidly changing. Its chemical composition has changed remarkably in the past several years and that change is accelerating. The giant gas planets (Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune) are heating up. The radiation being emitted from them has intensified. Remarkably, even their luminosity has increased from 50% to over 300% depending on the planet. And most astounding of all, Io, one of Jupiter’s many moons, has become so hot that if it continues its temperature rise Io is in danger of melting.
“The climate change is not just affecting Earth. It is a solar-system-wide phenomenon.
“Less than eight years ago the United States took the lead and instituted a brilliant and bold project borne out of desperation: creating a thermal, anti-radiation barrier in a band of our atmosphere beneath Earth’s troposphere. Although the project itself may cause some planetary climate change, it is calculated to cause far less damage than the events that have been extrapolated to occur in our near future.
“It is a two-edged sword as the aerosol spraying will undeniably affect some individuals making them sick or otherwise affecting to an extent their immune systems and respiratory systems. The trade off, however, is long term survival of our civilization.
“The dice are rolling and no one knows if one of the most secret projects in history can protect our world from the extra-solar (perhaps extra-dimensional) catastrophes lying in wait ahead of us. It is ironic, that a project every bit as secretive as the breaking of the Nazi High Command codes, or the Manhattan atom bomb project, is visible in the skies above our heads on any given day (and sometimes any given night).
“It lends credence to the old intelligence axiom that the best way to keep something secret is by hiding it in plain sight. Obviously, hundreds of millions have seen chemtrails in the skies and have ignored them or dismissed them as simple ice-vapor contrails.
“During the past several years some of the media have raised questions about chemtrails (such as Fox News’ reports about them in 2002). But the news reports mysteriously fade away and mainstream investigative reporters and science reporters who express an interest are, for the most part, persuaded to drop their efforts to identify exactly what is going on in our skies and why.
“As long ago as the early 1940s, some physicists and astronomers began to notice a pattern of change coming over the sun. It did not become more pronounced until the new millennium arrived. During the past four years, from 2000 through 2004, the sun’s activity has become more unpredictable and more obvious. Scientists, some working for the military or the federal government, began to think the unthinkable: the sun and all the planets were beginning a massive transformation.
“This transformation is unstoppable, potentially catastrophic to life and will most certainly cause the Earth’s environment to experience abrupt changes on a massive scale. Because the sun and all the planets together are reacting to this outside phenomenon, it is beginning to be suspected that some trans-dimensional energy in this region of space is interacting with the normal activity of the sun and the planets.
“Richard C. Hoagland, among others, has been advocating such an energy transference between our universe and (for lack of a better term) a ”sister universe” for some years now. He has been all too aware of the significant changes happening with our sun and all the planets in our solar system. His latest paper discussing this phenomenon, (which he calls ”hyper-dimensional”) is “Interplanetary Day After Tomorrow?”
“Mr. Hoagland has a brilliant and highly imaginative mind. He is also a maverick. Because some of his methods are unorthodox and his insight unsettling, much of the scientific establishment tends to dismiss his ideas. The irony is, years after they dismiss his observations they often are found rushing to publish papers in peer publications exactly echoing what he often first pointed out to them. Such is the history of the established norm versus the insightful innovators.
“Hyper-dimensionalism or trans-dimensional energy transference, call it what you will, this phenomenon seems to be at the root of the system-wide disaster unfolding right before our eyes. It is only the beginning, perhaps the beginning of the end.
“H. G. Wells’ famous tale, “The Time Machine,” was spun about a nineteenth century inventor who breaks the boundaries of time and propels himself more than 800,000 years into the future only to find that the human race has split into two: the Eloi, who live on the surface of the world, and the Morlocks who are subterranean dwellers. Over the eons the Morlocks became monstrous, half-human cannibals that still controlled a rudimentary technology. The Eloi became simple, Eden-like creatures who were blissfully unaware that they were the entree of choice on the Morlock’s dinner plates.
“The road ahead of us may not produce such a gruesome schism, but the human race may indeed be forced into a scenario similar to that envisioned by Mr. Wells’ scientific fantasy.
“Many who read this are very much aware of the massive underground complexes that have been built in the United States and other countries since World War II. Much of the technology was acquired from Nazi engineering projects and during the last 60 years vastly improved upon using more advanced technology and materials.
“The original purpose of most of the underground complexes (many in hollowed out mountains or under the wasteland of parched desert terrain) was for key elements of society and government to survive a nuclear cataclysm. To an extent that is still one of the purposes.
“But all have been modified and more are being constructed around the world at breakneck speed in the event that the system phenomenon is not constrained by the aerosol chemical barrier, or the changes of the solar system last much longer than what is hoped. I say “hoped” because although there are numerous hypotheses, no one really knows how long this change will last or if, indeed, it may become permanent.
“Therefore, millions of people may have to spend the rest of their lives in underground cities — and perhaps their children and grandchildren. Of course, that still leaves billions on the surface of a dying planet. How long those billions will be able to survive, no one knows.
“The future “Morlocks” will be tasked with furthering the research so one day mankind can safely regain a foothold on the surface, while the “Eloi” will have to fend for themselves. Seeing the impact that the extra-solar changes could bring to this planet if the aerosol spraying program fails, it seems more likely that the ”Morlocks” will remain human, while the “Eloi” surface survivors (if any) could mutate into the monsters.
“I have traveled around the world and lived in many different American cities. Currently, I reside in the Southwest. I watch the chemplanes fly in from Edwards Air Force base in California, desperately performing their mission. Although most of the crews are not aware of it, the success of their mission holds the fate of the human race in their hands.
“Several months ago I met a flight engineer who is a regular crew member aboard a re-fitted U.S. Air Force Boeing aircraft that is part of the aerosol mission out of Edwards. I will call him “Roger Anderson,” although that is not his real name.
“He is a friend of a friend of mine who works in chemical engineering. Anderson was quite frank with me after I divulged to him all I knew at that point about the history and mission of chemtrails. We were sitting in the corner of an almost deserted BBQ restaurant in the city of Simi Valley, California (a restaurant, by the way, often frequented by men who work at Northrop’s Skunkworks on Project Aurora, if that rings any bells with you).
“Anderson confirmed the true mission objectives and protocols and laughed when I brought up some of the half-baked conspiracy theories out there. He shook his head and found it fascinating that people could believe that the government would purposefully try to make people sick on a worldwide scale. After all, he pointed out, we’re all breathing the same air — whether you are a farmer in Iowa, a mechanic in Texas or a politician in Washington, DC.
“When I pressed him about the long term health effects from an aerosol spray that always contains at its base carbon black, ionized aluminum particles and barium, he admitted it will make some people ill. But he went on to argue that the alternative is much worse if just left to follow its own course without at least the attempt of human intervention. Based on what I have personally learned from my own research and contacts with government scientists these past few years, I had to agree.
“So what comes next? Will we reach the apex of drama as depicted in that old British science fiction film, ”The Day the Earth Caught Fire,” where actor Leo McKern, portraying the editor of a London newspaper, holds up two possible headlines for the morning edition: ”Earth Saved. Billions Give Thanks,” or ”Earth Doomed. People of the World Pray.” The film ended with that scene and the viewer was left to their own imagination as to which scenario ensued.
“We are in that same predicament. We don’t know exactly the cause of the phenomenon we are fighting. We don’t know how long it will last or the peak of its intensity. We only know that the Earth, as well as all the other planets and our sun, has become enveloped in an unknown energy field that threatens all stability across the solar system and our very lives”. (View Source)
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, June 5, 2017, 12:44 pm
The following post contains videos of whistleblowers who reveal classified information. While watching these videos my computer was subjected to a massive hack attack.
Those who watch these videos should proceed with caution. For those who prefer not to take the risk, a short summary of each of these videos is provided in the text.
A Presidential Warning
In January 1961, three days before the end of his term in office, President Dwight D. Eisenhower gave his farewell address to the nation. In it he included the following words:
“In the councils of government, we must guard against the acquisition of unwarranted influence, whether sought or unsought, by the military-industrial complex. The potential for the disastrous rise of misplaced power exists and will persist”.
As he was the first person to use the phrase “military-industrial complex” in a public speech, few people had any idea what he was talking about, especially when he warned that “the potential for the disastrous riseof misplaced power” not only existed, but would continue to be a threat.
But even if they did, they could probably never have imagined how this military-industrial complex would one day come to dominate every aspect of American society. Sadly, Eisenhower’s warning has fallen on deaf ears, for the very disaster that he warned the nation about has now come to pass.
A Strange Phenomenon
Some twenty years ago, a few observant citizens around the United States began to notice an unusual phenomenon. They noticed that as planes flew overhead, some of them left cloudy trails behind them, while others did not. And some of these cloudy trails often hung around for hours.
Curious as to what the source of this phenomenon might happen to be, they approached the authorities. They were assured that this was nothing to worry about, because they were simply condensation trails which persisted in the sky as a result of fortuitous atmospheric weather conditions.
In fact these condensations trails, or contrails as they are usually called, are formed whenever water vapour condenses and freezes around small particles that are emitted from aircraft engine exhaust. They typically form when planes fly at high altitudes in sub-freezing temperatures.
According to Wikipedia, “depending on the temperature and humidity at the altitude these contrails form, they may be visible for only a few seconds or minutes, or may persist for hours and spread to be several miles wide, eventually resembling natural cirrus or altocumulous clouds”.
And according to the authorities, the reason why these contrails seemed to be seen more often was easy to explain. More contrails were being seen, they said, because more planes were flying in the sky. And this continues to be the explanation that is offered to the public to this day.
My Personal Odyssey
I first began to notice these vapour trails in the sky about twenty years ago while I was taking my customary walks along the beach. Ever since I was young I have been in the habit of watching planes as they travelled across the sky. But there was something about these trails that was distinctly odd.
I was well aware of the existence of condensation trails forming behind aircraft travelling at high altitudes. But this is not a common feature in Vancouver where I live, because most planes operating around the airport fly at lower altitudes, as they are either taking off or landing.
But some of the planes left trails that did not dissipate after a few minutes as they normally would if they were simple condensation trails. Instead, they began to change shape almost immediately after they were formed, and then later spread out until they covered the sky.
Each individual trail would begin to break up into a sequence of separate tendrils, rather like the teeth of a comb. These tendrils would then steadily grow into separate patches of white cloud. It was these patches that would then expand until they filled the sky with a thin film of cloud.
I soon noticed that whenever one of these planes flew overhead leaving their distinctive trails behind them, that the sky would soon become overcast, filled with a thin veil of white cloud in a Cirrus type formation. But that in itself was not the most mysterious part of this phenomenon.
As I watched the planes that were laying down these trails, I saw that they would fly backwards and forwards along the same flight path. This made it obvious that they were not normal passenger planes, as FAA regulations forbid them from changing their prescribed routes in this way.
But what was even stranger was the fact that these planes had the ability to turn their exhaust trails on and off. So what would happen would be that a plane would lay down a certain length of trail, and then turn around and leave a similar trail parallel to it on the return journey.
It was clear to me that these parallel trails were being laid down in a precise pattern designed to take advantage of the offshore winds, so that these cloud formations would then blow inland and cover the whole of what is known as the “Lower Mainland” area of Vancouver.
I noticed that on summer days whenever the sky was clear, these planes would start spraying their mysterious trails as early as eight o’clock in the morning, and would then continue throughout the day until well past eight o’clock in the evening.
I also became aware of another odd phenomenon, this time associated with human behaviour. Whenever I pointed out these trails to strangers and asked them what they thought they were, they expressed no interest in them. They merely shrugged and carried on walking.
Meeting with the Media
After pestering my friends with questions about these trails which they could not answer, one of them suggested that I contact the Press about them. I did so, and made arrangements to meet with the Managing Editor of Vancouver’s largest newspaper at a local hotel.
At our meeting I explained what I had seen, and supported this with numerous documents and photographs. I pointed out that these trails hardly needed any documentation, because anyone could see them for themselves merely by going outside and looking up at the sky.
To my dismay, the Managing Editor responded by saying: “I do not believe in conspiracies”, and abruptly terminated our meeting. I subsequently learned that I was not alone, and that this was the standard response given by all authorities when confronted with questions about this subject.
To me this defied all logical reasoning. Here was a phenomenon that was clearly visible to anyone who cared to look. Yet even though local authorities must have been aware that something unusual was happening in Canadian skies, no one was prepared to talk about it.
It was as if the veil of cloud that filled the skies above Vancouver was being matched by a similar veil of secrecy by those responsible for protecting the environment. Even local weather forecasters ignored the presence of these clouds, dismissing them as normal features of the weather.
Digging Deeper
As I began to delve into this subject further, I discovered that one of the first people to undertake a serious investigation into these unusual trails was a fellow Canadian who lived not far from Vancouver. He was the award-winning environmental journalist William Thomas.
William Thomas
In January 1999, Thomas was asked by the Environment News Service to investigate these mysterious trails that were appearing in the sky. He did so, and subsequently issued a report entitled “Mystery Contrails may be Modifying Weather”.
This report gained immediate prominence, especially after he appeared as a guest on the popular late-night radio talk show hosted by Art Bell. Listeners from all over the United States called in to corroborate his findings, and he soon attracted a large following.
Thomas was also the first person to refer to these trails as “Chemical Trails”, later shortened to “Chemtrails”. He then went on to publish two books on the subject. The first was entitled Probing the Chemtrails Conundrum, which was followed by Chemtrails Confirmed.
Despite the success of both of these publications and the popularity of the subject with the general public, the reaction of the authorities was always the same. They dismissed his research as baseless, while his ideas of weather modification were greeted with ridicule and scorn.
To this day the word “chemtrails” has become inextricably linked with conspiracy, and anyone who tries to discuss this subject seriously in an open forum is treated as being of unsound mind. If anyone doubts this, I suggest they try raising this subject at their next dinner party!
Anyway, I was undeterred by this public opprobrium. In fact I have learned over the years that if you want to find out the truth about anything in life, it is a good idea to focus first on anything that is rejected by the authorities. And the more strident the criticism, the more likely it is to bear fruit.
I wanted to know what these trails were made of. I found out that over the years many people had taken samples of soil and water from heavily sprayed areas and sent them to reputable laboratories for analysis. The results of these tests have revealed some highly disturbing results.
Independent testing has confirmed that chemtrails contain a dangerous and extremely poisonous mix of chemicals that includes: barium, nano-aluminum-coated fibreglass (known as CHAFF), radioactive thorium, cadmium, chromium, nickel, ethylene dibromide and polymer fibres.
It is hardly surprising therefore that concerned citizens throughout the United States have come together to voice their outrage at what they see as a threat to their health and to the environment. A recent meeting in Shasta County in California is a case in point, as shown below. (Video later withdrawn)
Once it became obvious that a cocktail of dangerous chemicals was being systematically sprayed all over the country on a regular basis, concerned citizens began asking the obvious question: Who is doing this and why? The trouble was that those who should have had an answer, had no answer.
When approached, the authorities simply dismissed the whole topic of chemtrails as a conspiracy hoax that had been foisted upon a gullible public. The situation has been neatly summarised by Richard Leviton in his book Welcome to Your Designer Planet! In it he writes:
“We see these anomalous jet vapor trails increasingly overhead with no explanation. Hardly any media attention is given to them, yet often 50-75 trails are laid across the sky in an area in a single day, and this goes on, reportedly, all around the world, and it has been increasing since about the year 2000”.
“It is surprising how many otherwise intelligent people are hoodwinked into assuming the bizarre expanding chemtrails are normal jet exhaust from heavy air traffic. They are dispensed by jets clearly flying much higher than commercial traffic, presumably at 40,000+ feet, probably higher”.
Leviton writes about the standard response given by the authorities when asked about this phenomenon. “To start with, the U.S. Air Force refuses to discuss chemtrails as they brand this notion a hoax and they do not discuss hoaxes”.
And this is where the warning given by President Eisenhower in his farewell address, quoted earlier, assumes a grim reality, not just for the United States but for the whole of humanity. For as Richard goes on to point out:
“When you look up at what used to be a clear blue sky and see obnoxious criss-crosses of white feathery artificial substances and numerous parallel tracks of straight white lines, you know that not only is something being done to you but it’s done with contempt and a kind of black magic-flavored glee”.
We are reminded again of Eisenhower’s words when he warned: “The potential for the disastrous rise of misplaced power exists and will persist”. The threat which this poses for humanity has been exposed by Leviton when he writes:
“They’re not even bothering to veil their activities or hide behind facades and lies. They’re doing it and they refuse to discuss it; our public reaction is utterly irrelevant to them”.
When Eisenhower warned the country about this threat of “misplaced power”, he called it the Military-Industrial Complex. And that is exactly what it is. It is a combination of military power and industrial might that is shrouded in secrecy beyond the reach of any governmental agency.
It is worth noting here that when Edward Snowden revealed his trove of classified information about how the Central Intelligence Agency was spying on Americans, he was not an employee of the CIA. He actually worked for one of its contractors by the name of Booz Allen Hamilton.
So classified programmes conducted by the military frequently use private contractors, where all employees are bound by the highest levels of secrecy. But despite this tight control, whistle-blowers like Snowden do occasionally slip between the cracks. Another of these is Kristen Meghan.
So here we have the testimony of a person who worked for the U.S. Air Force for nine years as a specialist in Bio-engineering, whose job it was to review the use of all chemicals to ensure that they posed no threat to people or the environment, and that they met EPA standards.
And when she discovered orders for large quantities of hazardous chemicals, and then found that samples of air, soil and water taken from surrounding areas in Oklahoma, Georgia and Chicago showed unusually high levels of these same chemicals, she was “demonised” by fellow staff.
And when she persisted in raising questions about the use and purpose of these chemicals, she was told that she would be locked up in a mental institution and that her daughter would be taken away from her. It would be easy to dismiss her testimony if she was alone in what she said.
But she is not.
Disturbing stories continue to emerge from sources within the U.S. Air Force which corroborate her claims. Kristen said that pilots involved in spraying these chemicals were too scared to come forward and tell the world what they know. The following video would seem to bear this out.
It is clear from the third-hand information provided in the video above, that the U.S. Air Force pilot quoted here has gone to great lengths to ensure that his testimony could not be traced back to him, and that he felt that his career and possibly even his life would be in peril if it was.
He claims that he was employed as an aerosol (chemtrail) dispersal pilot engaged in a global geo-engineering programme operating under a classified top-secret code-name. It was his job, he said, to fly designated patterns within a 250 mile zone that alternated between day and night flights.
He said that pilots were rotated constantly, and seldom stayed in one place for more than 18 months. This was done to prevent “loose lips” and to preserve strict security. He said he was warned that harsh disciplinary action would be taken against him if he ever talked about what he did.
He said that pilots were told that the reason for the aerosol dispersal programme was to create an atmospheric shield designed to protect the United States from fearsome aerial weapons that could be used by hostile nations, although he said he thought that this was just a cover story.
He then referred to something that goes to the very heart of the strategy that was devised many years ago by the Military-Industrial Complex. It is the strategy of “compartmentalisation”. Over the years this has proved to be highly successful in preventing leaks in classified operations.
Under this strategy, all secret military projects operate on a “need to know” basis. What this means is that people who are assigned to a particular area or department are never told what other departments are doing. So only the most senior people are permitted to know what is really going on.
So a person working within a particular aspect of a secret project is forbidden to talk about what they do with anyone else, and they are never told what others involved in that project are doing. And anyone who breaks that rule of secrecy quickly attracts the attention of military security.
Anyone who tries to reveal classified information to the press or to the general public invites retribution by any or all of the forces available to the Federal government. And for those whose breach of security is deemed extreme, the penalty is death.
The compelling saga described in the video above (Since withdrawn) should shock any American who still believes that they live in a free country ruled by the Articles of the Constitution, and governed by elected officials who carry out their duties within the constraints set out in that Constitution.
For in this video Kevin Shipp relates his experiences while working for the Central Intelligence Agency as an Anti-terrorism Specialist. When he joined the CIA he was required to sign an oath that he would protect the country from any and all threats, both foreign and domestic.
He then goes on to describe his dismay at finding out that people within the Agency were doing illegal and unconstitutional things. But as he points out, most people who work at the Agency simply turn a blind eye to these things, knowing that their careers are at stake if they try to protest.
He goes on to claim that a secret government exists that is operating outside of the constraints of the Constitution that is beyond the reach of the U.S. Congress. He calls this secret government the Shadow Government, the Hidden Government or by the popular term of “Deep State”.
He believes that America is currently being ruled by subversion, force and fear, and that covert (secret) programmes exist in almost all of the government agencies, including the National Weather Service (NWS) and the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).
As he explains, these agencies require all of those people engaged in classified black budget projects to sign binding secrecy agreements (non-disclosure agreements) as a condition of employment, and that it is these agreements which serve as the ultimate tool in maintaining secrecy.
People who sign these agreements actually sign away their rights under the American Constitution, and those who challenge these agreements can be terminated and put into prison. They can also be denied their pension benefits, and have interest rates on loans raised to penal levels.
Shipp also revealed a little known fact about the Whistleblower Protection Act of 1989, which was designed to protect those who disclosed information from retaliatory Government action, and that is those who have signed non-disclosure agreements are specifically excluded from the Act.
Shipp also had some deeply disturbing things to say on the subject of chemtrails. He said that the Secret Government had been spraying the skies above North America since 1997 with a cocktail of toxic substances, and that this was routinely denied by military and government officials.
He pointed out that by cooperating in secret with jet fuel manufacturers, the government had kept the knowledge about this aerosol dispersal programme completely under wraps for over twenty years, and had ignored the threat that it poses to the public and to the environment.
It was the actually the presence of these chemicals that poisoned his family and caused him to leave the Agency. The story of his personal struggle to reveal the truth of what was really going on in the CIA was finally published under the title “From the Company of Shadows”.
The Great Enigma
So here we have an enigma with profound implications for the future of humanity.
On the one hand we have the Paris Accord, where 195 countries have accepted the scientific verdict that global warming is the result of human beings burning fossil fuels, and have committed themselves to a campaign of reducing greenhouse gases in the atmosphere.
And on the other hand we have a global programme conducted by the military that has been going on for more than twenty years, of aircraft spraying toxic chemicals in the atmosphere and thereby increasing the amount of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere.
How can we possibly explain these two diametrically opposing campaigns?
One possible answer presents itself. And that is that the true cause of global warming is not the result of what human beings are doing on the planet, but is rather the result of what is happening to the entire solar system as it travels through space.
In the book The Last Days of Tolemac, when asked about the causes of climate change upon the earth, the Oracle replied:
“The most significant change that has taken place in the weather of your planet has been the phenomenon called global warming. While this phenomenon is real, its true causes are little understood by your scientists. Most of them are convinced that this is a phenomenon that is limited to the earth, and that because of this human behaviour must be to blame.
“These scientists believe that global warming can be reversed if only humanity can be persuaded to reduce their use of such things as fossil fuels before it is too late. While anything that your scientists can do to improve the atmosphere on earth is desirable, it is already too late to reverse these changes.
“That is because the problem of global warming does not have its origin on the earth. It will be clear to those scientists who care to look, that the heating of the earth is the localized effect of an increase in energy that is affecting the entire solar system.
“Not only are higher temperatures being recorded on the earth, but on other planets as well. Even the sun itself is undergoing a profound change.
“The reason why the sun and the planets are undergoing these changes together, is because the area of space through which the entire solar system is now travelling has much higher levels of cosmic radiation than was the case during the Piscean age”.
As we will see in the next instalment, there is evidence that the Military-Industrial Complex certainly believes this to be the case, and that the true purpose of their global aerosol dispersal programme is to shield the earth from the increased cosmic radiation impacting the earth from space.
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, May 21, 2017, 12:17 pm
“During its peak, the capital of Tiwanaku boasted a huge stone-faced pyramid, cut stone enclosures, elite residences, exquisitely decorated buildings, a system of subterranean canals, and at least four square kilometers of residential buildings.
/cdn.vox-cdn.com/uploads/chorus_image/image/50132881/fethullah-gulen-75.0.jpg)
When the airport was officially dedicated on March 19, 1994, a capstone was placed inside the terminal building displaying a Masonic symbol above an inscription referring to the “New World Airport Commission”. But no one has yet been able to identify this organization, or say what it is or does.
Curious as to what the source of this phenomenon might happen to be, they approached the authorities. They were assured that this was nothing to worry about, because they were simply condensation trails which persisted in the sky as a result of fortuitous atmospheric weather conditions.
